project manual le meridien / ac hotel denver, colorado asi 6...jun 13, 2016 · a. this section...

HKS Project No. 16811.000

Project Manual

Le Meridien / AC Hotel

Denver, Colorado

ASI 6.0

June 13, 2016

LE MERIDIEN | AC HOTEL DENVER, COLORADO

HKS 16811.000 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2016-06-13

000001 - 1

06/13/2016

PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

LEGEND

First Column: Current Date for Section

Second Column: Checked Indicates Section is Included in Current Issue

Third Column: Section Number

Fourth Column: Section Title

Fifth Column: Section Author

ISSUES

2014-11-12 Design Development

2014-12-23 Package 1.0 - Structural Frame Permit

2015-04-15 50% Construction Documents

2015-05-15 Package 3.0 - Building Permit

2015-07-08 Package 4.0

2015-10-09 Submittal Package 3.2

2015-12-17 ASI 1.0

2016-03-09 ASI 3.0

2016-04-05 ASI 4.0

2016-05-16 ASI 5.0

2016-06-13 ASI 6.0



000001 - 2

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

2015-05-15 00 3100 Available Project Information HKS 2015-05-15 00 5200 Agreement Form HKS 2015-05-15 00 7200 General Conditions HKS 2015-05-15 00 7300 Supplementary Conditions HKS

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2016-06-13 01 0510 Exterior Design Selections– Building Exterior HKS 2015-05-15 01 0520 Interior Design Selections – Back of House HKS 2016-06-13 01 0530 Interior Design Selections – Front of House SDG 2015-05-15 01 2100 Allowances HKS 2015-05-15 01 2200 Unit Prices HKS 2015-05-15 01 2300 Alternates HKS 2015-05-15 01 2500 Substitution Procedures HKS 2015-05-15 01 2600 Contract Modification Procedures HKS 2015-05-15 01 2900 Payment Procedures HKS 2015-05-15 01 3100 Project Management and Coordination HKS 2015-05-15 01 3200 Construction Progress Documentation HKS 2015-05-15 01 3300 Submittal Procedures HKS 2015-05-15 01 4000 Quality Requirements HKS 2015-05-15 01 4200 References HKS 2015-05-15 01 4339 Visual Mock Up Requirements HKS 2015-05-15 01 4500 Structural Testing, Inspection, and

Quality Assurance

MKA

2015-05-15 01 4516 Field Test for Water Leakage HKS 2015-05-15 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls HKS 2015-05-15 01 6000 Product Requirements HKS 2015-05-15 01 7100 Construction Tolerance MKA 2015-05-15 01 7300 Execution HKS 2015-05-15 01 7700 Close Out Procedures HKS 2015-05-15 01 7823 Operation and Maintenance Data HKS 2015-05-15 01 7839 Project Record Documents HKS 2015-05-15 01 7900 Demonstration and Training HKS

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

No Sections



000001 - 3

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

2015-05-15 03 1000 Concrete Forming and Accessories MKA 2015-05-15 03 2000 Concrete Reinforcing MKA 2015-05-15 03 3000 Cast In Place Concrete MKA 2015-05-15 03 3060 Integrally Colored Concrete ND 2015-05-15 03 3500 Concrete Finishing HKS 2015-05-15 03 3713 Shotcrete MKA 2015-05-15 03 3800 Post-Tensioned Concrete MKA 2015-05-15 03 4500 Architectural Precast Concrete HKS

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY

2015-05-15 04 2200 Concrete Unit Masonry HKS

DIVISION 05 – METALS

2015-05-15 05 1200 Structural Steel Framing MKA 2015-05-15 05 1213 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel MKA 2015-05-15 05 3100 Steel Decking MKA 2015-05-15 05 4100 Cold-Formed Steel Framing HKS 2015-05-15 05 4300 Slotted Channel Framing HKS 2015-05-15 05 5000 Metal Fabrications HKS 2015-05-15 05 5100 Metal Stairs HKS 2015-05-15 05 5213 Pipe and Tube Railings HKS 2015-05-15 05 7300 Ornamental Handrails and Railings HKS

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 2015-05-15 06 1053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry HKS 2015-05-15 06 1643 Exterior Gypsum Sheathing HKS 2015-05-15 06 4023 Interior Architectural Woodwork HKS 2015-05-15 06 6400 Plastic (FRP) Paneling HKS 2015-05-15 06 6813 Plastic Gratings HKS

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

2015-05-15 07 1328 Pre-Applied Sheet Waterproofing HKS 2015-05-15 07 1352 Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing HKS 2015-05-15 07 1413 Hot Fluid-Applied Rubberized Asphalt

Waterproofing

HKS

2015-05-15 07 1616 Crystalline Waterproofing HKS 2015-07-08 07 2100 Thermal Insulation HKS 2015-05-15 07 2400 EIFS HKS 2015-05-15 07 2617 Below Slab Vapor Retarder HKS 2015-05-15 07 2713 Self-Adhering Air and Water Barrier HKS 2015-05-15 07 4243 Composite Metal Wall Panels HKS 2015-07-08 07 5013 Single Ply Membrane Roofing HKS 2015-05-15 07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim HKS 2015-05-15 07 7200 Roof Accessories HKS



000001 - 4

2015-05-15 07 8116 Cementitious Fireproofing HKS 2015-05-15 07 8123 Intumescent Mastic Fireproofing HKS 2015-05-15 07 8413 Penetration Firestopping HKS 2015-05-15 07 8446 Fire Resistive Joint Firestopping HKS 2015-05-15 07 9200 Joint Sealants HKS

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

2015-05-15 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames HKS 2015-05-15 08 1416 Prefinished Flush Wood Doors HKS 2016-06-13 08 1700 Integrated Door Opening Assemblies DHC 2015-05-15 08 3113 Access Doors and Frames HKS 2015-05-15 08 3323 Overhead Coiling Doors HKS 2015-05-15 08 4233 Revolving Entrance Doors HKS 2015-05-15 08 4239 Stainless Entrance Doors HKS 2015-05-15 08 4400 Glazed Aluminum Framing Systems HKS 2015-05-15 08 4410 Point Supported Glazed AESS Systems HKS 2016-06-13 08 4420 Aluminum Framed Folding Panel System HKS 2015-05-15 08 5113 Aluminum Windows HKS 2015-07-08 08 5123 Steel Windows and Doors HKS 2016-06-13 08 7100 Door Hardware DHC 2015-05-15 08 8000 Glazing HKS 2015-05-15 08 8300 Unframed Mirrored Glazing HKS 2015-05-15 08 9100 Wall Louvers HKS

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

2015-05-15 09 2900 Gypsum Board Assemblies HKS 2015-05-15 09 3000 Tiling HKS 2015-05-15 09 5113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings HKS 2015-05-15 09 6500 Resilient Flooring HKS 2015-05-15 09 6513 Resilient Base and Accessories HKS 2016-03-09 09 6723 Resinous Flooring HKS 2015-05-15 09 6800 Carpeting HKS 2015-05-15 09 7200 Wall Coverings HKS 2015-05-15 09 7500 Interior Stone Facing HKS 2015-05-15 09 9100 Painting HKS 2015-05-15 09 9600 High Performance Coatings HKS 2015-05-15 09 9663 Textured Acrylic Coating HKS

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 2015-05-15 10 2113 Toilet Compartments HKS 2015-05-15 10 2238 Operable Panel Partitions HKS 2015-05-15 10 2613 Wall and Corner Guards HKS 2015-05-15 10 2813 Toilet Accessories HKS 2015-05-15 10 4400 Fire Protection Specialties HKS 2015-05-15 10 5113 Metal Lockers HKS



000001 - 5

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 2015-05-15 11 1326 Hydraulic Chain Lift HKS 2015-05-15 11 2300 Laundry Equipment SDI 2015-05-15 11 2400 Building Maintenance HKS 2015-05-15 11 4000 Food Service Equipment SDI

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 2015-05-15 12 2413 Roller Shades HKS 2015-05-15 12 3640 Stone Countertops HKS 2015-05-15 12 3661 Simulated Stone Countertops HKS 2015-05-15 12 9300 Site Furnishings ND

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION No Sections

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 2015-12-17 14 2100 Electric Traction Elevators LB 2015-05-15 14 9100 Chutes HKS

DIVISION 20 – GENERAL MEP/FP REQUIREMENTS 2014-11-12 200000 MEPF Basis of Design BCE

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION 2015-05-15 210001 Basic Fire Protection Requirements BCE 2015-05-15 210002 Fire Protection BCE

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 2015-05-15 220501 Basic Plumbing Requirements BCE 2015-05-15 220505 Plumbing BCE

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING 2015-05-15 230501 Basic Mechanical Requirements BCE 2015-05-15 230510 Basic Materials and Methods BCE 2015-05-15 230540 Vibration Isolation BCE 2015-05-15 230593 Testing Adjusting and Balancing BCE 2015-05-15 230701 Insulation BCE 2015-05-15 230800 Commissioning of HVAC Systems BCE 2015-05-15 230901 Building Control System BCE 2016-03-09 230993 Sequence of Operation for HVAC Controls BCE 2015-05-15 232123 Hydronic Pumps BCE 2015-05-15 232500 HVAC Water Treatment BCE



000001 - 6

2015-05-15 232923 Variable Frequency Drives BCE 2015-05-15 233113 Metal Ducts BCE 2015-05-15 233300 Air Duct Accessories BCE 2015-05-15 233401 HVAC Equipment – Air Side BCE 2015-05-15 235110 Breechings, Chimneys and Draft Control

Devices

BCE

2015-05-15 235201 Heating Equipment BCE 2015-05-15 238146 Water-Source Unitary Heat Pumps BCE

DIVISION 25 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION No Sections

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 2015-05-15 260501 Basic Electrical Requirements BCE 2015-05-15 260510 Basic Materials and Methods BCE 2015-05-15 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems BCE 2015-05-15 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems BCE 2015-05-15 260573 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination

Study

BCE

2015-05-15 260800 Electrical Systems Commissioning BCE 2016-06-13 260933 Central Dimming Controls – Public Spaces MCLA 2015-05-15 260934 Lighting Control System (Dimming) BCE 2015-05-15 262000 Electrical Distribution BCE 2015-05-15 263213 Engine Generators BCE 2015-05-15 263623 Automatic Transfer Switches BCE 2015-05-15 264113 Lightning Protection for Structures BCE 2016-06-13 265100 Interior Lighting – Public Areas MCLA 2015-05-15 265101 Lighting BCE 2015-07-08 265200 Decorative Interior Lighting MCLA 2016-06-13 265600 Exterior Lighting – Public Spaces MCLA 2015-05-15 266000 Electrical Testing BCE

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS

No Sections

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

2015-05-15 283113 Area of Rescue System BCE 2015-05-15 283163 Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System with

Voice Evacuation

BCE



000001 - 7

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 2015-05-15 311000 Site Clearing MM 2015-05-15 312000 Earth Moving MM 2015-05-15 312319 Dewatering MM 2015-05-15 312333 Trenching and Backfilling MM 2015-05-15 315000 Excavation Support and Protection MKA 2015-05-15 316329 Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts MKA

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 2015-05-15 320180 Irrigation Maintenance ND 2015-05-15 321313 Concrete Paving MM 2015-05-15 321373 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants MM 2016-06-13 321400 Deck Pedestals ND 2015-05-15 321723 Pavement Markings MM 2015-05-15 321816 Synthetic Grass Surfacing System – Roof Decks ND 2015-05-15 328005 Design-Build Irrigation Systems ND 2015-07-08 329000 General Landscape ND 2015-05-15 329010 Landscape Maintenance ND 2015-05-15 329110 Soil Preparation ND

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 2015-05-15 331100 Water Utility Distribution Piping MM 2015-05-15 333100 Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping MM 2015-05-15 334100 Storm Utility Drainage Piping MM 2015-05-15 334600 Subdrainage MM

SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION No Sections

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS



000001 - 8


HKS 16811.000 DESIGN SELECTIONS SUMMARY BUILDING EXTERIOR 2016-06-13

010510 - 1

SECTION 010510

DESIGN SELECTIONS SUMMARY – BUILDING EXTERIOR

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes a schedule summary of Design Selections for materials and finishes technically specified in various technical Sections of this Project Manual.

1.2 PROCEDURES

A. References in this Section to specific manufacturer, model name and model number, are to establish preferred design selection standard only. Other "Acceptable Manufacturers" listed in the technical section, if qualified, are allowed to submit in accordance with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

B. Each material selection is referenced by Section name and number to where it is specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL SELECTIONS

A. Following materials may be included in a number of technical specification sections and are scheduled together to avoid duplication.

B. EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL METAL FINISH

1. AMF-01:

a. Material Type: Aluminum b. Finish Type: High-Performance Organic Fluoropolymer. c. Coating Color: Silver Color; Match Sample Mock Up Approved by Architect

2. AMF-02:

a. Material Type: Aluminum b. Finish Type: High-Performance Organic Fluoropolymer. c. Coating Color: Dark Bronze Color; Match Sample Mock Up Approved by Architect

3. AMF-03:

a. Material Type: Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel and Shapes (AESS) b. Finish Type: High Performance Coating / Polyurethane c. Coating Color: Match AMF-01



010510 - 2

4. AMF-04: Steel Windows and Doors

a. Material Type: Steel b. Finish Type: Manufacturer’s Standard Epoxy/Polyurethane Finish. c. Coating Color: Black Color; Match Sample Mock Up Approved by Architect

5. AMF-05: AESS at Steel Windows and Doors

a. Material Type: Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel and Shapes (AESS) b. Finish Type: High Performance Coating / Polyurethane c. Coating Color: Match AMF-04

C. 034500 - Architectural Precast Concrete

1. APC-01: Thin Masonry Veneer Facing

a. Thin Masonry Veneer - Field: Endicott Brick, Norman, Medium Ironspot #46 Smooth Finish, 1/3 Running Bond

b. Thin Masonry Veneer – Accent: Endicott Brick, Norman, Light Grey Blend, Smooth Finish, Stacked Bond

c. Size (Actual Dimensions): 2 ¼”H x 1/2”W x 11 5/8”L. d. Sealant Color: TBD; Match Sample Mock Up Approved by Architect e. Remarks: 2” Spray Applied Fiberglass Insulation on Back of Panel

2.2 DIVISION 4 SELECTIONS BY SECTION

A. 042200 - Concrete Unit Masonry

1. CMU-01: Level 1 Adjacent Existing Building

a. Manufacturer: TBD b. Product Series: TBD c. Color and Finish: Standard Grey d. Face Texture: Normal e. Size (Actual Dimensions): Width: 7-5/8 in, Height: 7-5/8 in, Length: 15-5/8 in f. Mortar Color: TBD; Match Sample Mock Up Approved by Architect g. Remarks: Masonry Cell Insulation


A. 057300 - Ornamental Handrails and Railings

1. OHR-01 – Glass Guardrail:

a. Top Rail Material / Finish: Stainless Steel U-Shaped Cap; Match Sample Mock Up Approved by Architect

b. Top Rail Material / Finish: AMF-01; See Architectural Metal Finishes c. Glass Type: GL-06 with ¾” Open Joints between Panels



010510 - 3


A. 072400 - EIFS

1. EIFS-01:

a. Manufacturer: Dryvit b. Texture: Match Sample Mock Up Approved by Architect c. Color: Match Sample Mock Up Approved by Architect d. Sealant Color: Match EIFS

B. 072423 - DEFS For Soffits

1. DEFS-01: Match EIFS-01

a. Manufacturer: Dryvit b. Texture: Match Sample Mock Up Approved by Architect c. Color: Match Sample Mock Up Approved by Architect d. Sealant Color: TBD; Match Sample Mock Up Approved by Architect

C. 074213 – Formed Metal Panels

1. FMP-01:

a. Basis of Design: Centria; CS-660 Series b. Finish Color: Match AMF-01; See Architectural Metal Finishes

D. 074243 - Composite Metal Wall Panels

1. CMP-01:

a. Finish Color: Match AMF-01; See Architectural Metal Finishes

2. CMP-02:

a. Finish Color: Match AMF-04; See Architectural Metal Finishes

E. 079200 - Joint Sealants

1. Silicone Construction Sealant:

a. Custom Color, Match Sample Approved by Architect

2. Silicone Mildew Resistant Sealant:


3. Acrylic Latex Sealant:




010510 - 4

4. Urethane Construction Sealant:



A. 084213 - Exterior Aluminum Entrance Doors

1. Finish Color: AMF-01; See Architectural Metal Finishes 2. Hardware Finish Selection: TBD.

B. 084233 - Revolving Entrance Doors

1. Basis of Design: Boon Edam; Crystal TQ 2. Finish Color and Hardware: TBD.

C. 084236 – Balanced Stainless Steel Doors

1. Basis of Design: Dawson Doors; Ultra Narrow Stile Stainless Steel Doors 2. Finish Color and Hardware: Stainless Steel, No.4 Finish.

D. 084400 - Glazed Aluminum Framing Systems

1. GAFS-01 – Punched Window System at Precast with Thin Masonry Veneer

a. System: 6” Frame; 4-Way Captured Glass with Intermediate Mullion b. Basis of Design: Kawneer 1600 Wall c. Finish Color: AMF-02; See Architectural Metal Finishes

2. GAFS-02 – Punched Window System at EIFS

a. System: 6” Frame; 4-Way Captured Glass b. Basis of Design: Kawneer 1600 Wall c. Finish Color: AMF-01; See Architectural Metal Finishes

3. GAFS-03 – Window Wall System

a. System: 6” Frame; Vertically Butt Glazed; Horizontally Captured with 6” Deep Vertical Accent Fins located per Elevations

b. Slab Edge Covers: 1/8” Formed Aluminum; See Architectural Metal Finishes above.

c. Basis of Design: Kawneer 1600 Wall d. Finish Color: AMF-01; See Architectural Metal Finishes

4. GAFS-04 – Tower Curtain Wall System

a. System: 6” Frame; Vertically Butt Glazed; Horizontally Captured b. Basis of Design: Kawneer 1600 Wall c. Finish Color: AMF-01; See Architectural Metal Finishes

5. GAFS-05 – Podium Curtain Wall System

a. System: 10” Frame Vertically Butt Glazed Horizontally Captured



010510 - 5

b. Basis of Design: Kawneer 1600 Wall c. Finish Color: AMF-01; See Architectural Metal Finishes

6. GAFS-06 – Podium Curtain Wall System

a. System: 10 1/8” Frame; Vertically Butt Glazed; Horizontally Captured b. Basis of Design: Kawneer; Toggle Glazed Clearwall SBI c. Finish Color: AMF-01; See Architectural Metal Finishes

E. 084410 – Point Supported Glazed AESS System

a. PSG-01: Point Supported Glass at Canopy

1) Framing System: AESS; AMF-03 See Architectural Metal Finishes 2) Glazing: GL-05

F. 085113 – Aluminum Windows

1. GAFS-07 – Aluminum Windows

a. System: 1 1/16” Frame; Vertically and Horizontally Captured b. Basis of Design: Custom Window : 8300 (SQ) Square Profile c. Finish Color: AMF-01; See Architectural Metal Finishes

2.6 088000 - Glazing

1. Exterior Glass Schedule: (Note: Provide FT glass where required for safety glazing.)

a. GL-01A: Insulating Coated Glass - Vision

1) Overall Thickness: 1 in (25 mm) nominal. 2) Outboard Lite: Clear HS; 1/4 in (6 mm) thick glass with coating on No. 2

surface. 3) Air Space: 1/2 in (12 mm); Black spacer; Black sealant. 4) Inboard Lite: Clear HS; 1/4 in (6 mm) thick glass. 5) Basis of Design Manufacturer and Product: VRE 1-59

b. GL-01B: Insulating Coated Glass - Spandrel


surface. 3) Air Space: 1/2 in (12 mm); Black spacer; Black sealant. 4) Inboard Lite: Clear HS; 1/4 in (6 mm) thick glass with V933 Warm Grey Frit

on No. 4 surface. 5) Basis of Design Manufacturer and Product: VRE 1-59

c. GL-02A Insulating Coated Glass - Vision


surface. 3) Air Space: 1/2 in (12 mm); Black spacer; Black sealant.



010510 - 6

4) Inboard Lite: Clear HS; 1/4 in (6 mm) thick glass. 5) Basis of Design Manufacturer and Product: VRE 26-59

d. GL-02C Insulating Coated Glass – With Back Panel


surface. 3) Air Space: 1/2 in (12 mm); Black spacer; Black sealant. 4) Inboard Lite: Clear HS; 1/4 in (6 mm) thick glass. 5) Basis of Design Manufacturer and Product: VRE 26-59 6) Back Panel: Aluminum, with prefinished Warm Grey color.

e. GL-03A Insulating Coated Glass - Vision


surface. 3) Air Space: 1/2 in (12 mm); Black spacer; Black sealant. 4) Inboard Lite: Clear HS; 1/4 in (6 mm) thick glass. 5) Basis of Design Manufacturer and Product: VE 1-2M

f. GL-03B Insulating Coated Glass - Spandrel


surface. 3) Air Space: 1/2 in (12 mm); Black spacer; Black sealant. 4) Inboard Lite: Clear HS; 1/4 in (6 mm) thick glass with V933 Warm Grey Frit

on No. 4 surface. 5) Basis of Design Manufacturer and Product: VE 1-2M

g. GL-03C Insulating Coated Glass – With Back Panel


surface. 3) Air Space: 1/2 in (12 mm); Black spacer; Black sealant. 4) Inboard Lite: Clear HS; 1/4 in (6 mm) thick glass. 5) Basis of Design Manufacturer and Product: VE 1-2M 6) Back Panel: Aluminum, with prefinished Warm Grey color.

h. GL-04: Laminated Glass – Glass Canopy

1) Overall Thickness: As required by design. 2) Outboard Lite: Clear Glass, Custom White Ceramic Frit Pattern on No.2

Surface; 1/4 in (6 mm) minimum thick glass. 3) Inboard Lite: Clear HS; 1/4 in (6 mm) minimum thick glass. 4) Interlayer – Basis of Design: Dupont SentryGlas “Ionoplast”; Clear,

thickness as required for intended use. 5) Basis of Design Manufacturer and Product: Viracon Clear Laminated Glass



010510 - 7

i. GL-05: Laminated Glass – Guardrail

1) Overall Thickness: As required by design. 2) Outboard Lite: Clear HS; 1/4 in (6 mm) minimum thick glass. 3) Inboard Lite: Clear HS; 1/4 in (6 mm) minimum thick glass. 4) Interlayer – Basis of Design: Dupont SentryGlas “Ionoplast”; Clear,

thickness as required for intended use. 5) Basis of Design Manufacturer and Product: Viracon Clear Laminated Glass

j. GL-06: Laminated Glass – Monolithic Vision at Lobby

1) Overall Thickness: 3/4 in Minimum, As required by design. 2) Description: Clear HS 3) Basis of Design Manufacturer and Product:

B. 089100 – Wall Louvers

1. Basis of Design Manufacturer and Product: C/S RS-7705 2. Finish Color: AMF-01; See Architectural Metal Finishes


A. 099663 – Textured Acrylic Coatings

1. TAC-01 – Textured Acrylic Coating at Wall:

a. Manufacturer: BASF Building Systems, MasterProtect HC400 b. Texture: Smooth c. Color: TBD d. Coats: Cementitious Waterproof Coating, Texture and Finish Coats; Number of

coats as recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Used

END OF SECTION


SDG INTERIOR DESIGN SELECTIONS – FRONT OF HOUSE 2016-06-13

010530 - 1

SECTION 010530

INTERIOR DESIGN SELECTIONS – FRONT OF HOUSE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes a schedule summary of Design Selections for materials and finishes technically specified in various technical Sections of this Project Manual.

1.2 PROCEDURES

A. References in this Section to specific manufacturer, model name and model number, are to establish preferred design selection standard only. Other "Acceptable Manufacturers" listed in the technical section, if qualified, are allowed to submit in accordance with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements".

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SELECTIONS

A. Refer to attached Schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION - Not Used

END OF SECTION

LeMeridien/ AC Hotel Denver - 14017 FINISH SCHEDULE Issued: 06.24.15Rev 1: 01.29.2016Rev 2: 02.18.2016Rev 3: 04.01.2016Rev 4: 04.18.2016Rev 5: 06.09.2016

Series Designations100: LM Guestrooms200: LM Guest Bathrooms 300: LM Guest Tower Corridors / Elevator Lobbies 400-449: 1st Floor - LM Lobby Level450-499: 1st Floor - AC Lobby Level500: 2nd Floor600: 20th Floor - Amenity Level700: LM Restaurant - Level 1800: AC Guestrooms, Bathroom, Corridor

TAG LM / AC TAG REVISION DESCRIPTION LOCATION MANUFACTURER CONTACT STYLE / FINISH / DIMENSIONS NOTES

ARTWORK

AA-200 (AA-602) LM 6/9/2016 Back-Lit Vanity Mirror

King Model Room, K02-LM | Double Queen Model Room, DQ01-

LMElectric Mirror

Elaine Tosko (Ryan & Associates) [email protected]

(216) 956-3111

Custom Silhouette Lighted Mirror : SIL-CUSTOM-24.00" x 44.00" - SO-2700K. | 2" frosted glass at perimeter and a polished edge, curved at upper

corners only. | =/> 2"D (Manufacturer to confirm overall depth with Designer).

Electric Mirror to provide Lit Mirror component. GC to provide frame & mirror back. Adjustable sleeves

as required for field installation. Must be coordinated with GC and verified in field. Refer to attached

specification and Model Room DWGs for location.

CONTRACTOR INSTALLED.

AA-201 (AA-605) LM 6/9/2016 Back-Lit Vanity Mirror ADA Guestrooms Electric Mirror

Elaine Tosko (Ryan & Associates) [email protected]

(216) 956-3111

Custom Silhouette Lighted Mirror : SIL-CUSTOM-24.00" x 48.00" - SO-2700K. | 2" frosted glass at (2)

sides and top w/polished edge, curved at upper corners only. | =/> 2"D (Manufacturer to confirm overall

depth with Designer).

Electric Mirror to provide Lit Mirror component. GC to provide frame & mirror back. Adjustable sleeves

as required for field installation. Must be coordinated with GC and verified in field. Refer to attached

specification and Model Room DWGs for location.

CONTRACTOR INSTALLED.

ACCOUSTICAL TILE & CEILING GRID

AC-501 LM AC Tile Pre-Function & Meeting Room Ceiling Armstrong

Tabitha Ruez [email protected]

(312) 282-0759

Optima-Vector, Prelude Suspension System, Color: White, Size: 20"x60" Refer to DWGs for location.

AC-502 LM 4/18/2016 AC Tile Ballroom Ceiling ArmstrongTabitha Ruez

[email protected] (312) 282-0759

Calla-Tegular, Suprafine Suspension System, Color: Stone (SE), Size: 24"x24" Refer to DWGs for location.

AC-451 LM/AC AC Tile Bar & Lobby Ceiling ArmstrongTabitha Ruez


Woodworks Concealed, 5983W3 (TBD); Shape: Panel; Edge: Square 15/16"; W3 Perforation | Walnut

Espresso Color | 48" x 24" (TBD)Refer to DWGs for location.

AC-701 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Accoustical Ceiling Panels Ceiling beyond Wood Beams Sound Away

Alex [email protected]

866-768-6381760-599-3985

Soundaway: Ambience SA2000 acoustical panels, 1" thick. Attached via Rotofast Snap-On anchors per

manufacturer's recommendation, attached to ceiling between ceiling and faux wood beams. Fabric: FR701

2100 acoustic panel, color Moleskin 796.

Rotofast Snap On Anchors to be coordinated with ceiling design

and MEP locations.

Simeone Deary Design Group605 North Michigan Avenue, Suite 301

Chicago, Illinois 60611t: 312-274-0606 f: 312-274-0707



CARPET

CP-100 (CP-600) LM 2/2/2016 K | DQ Guestroom Inset Carpet LM K1, K1 ADA, K3 Guestrooms Aqua Carpet Lisa Homan

Contract Alliance

Avalar Solution Dyed Nylon, Cut and loop pile. Custom Pattern Number: Custom HP22-4. Style Name:

k032315a-mlcl. Pattern Repeat: 18"W x 25.42"L @ 14spi. Colors: A=SPC27 | B=4640/4650.

(Approximate inset size: 8'6" W x 8' L)

Refer to specification for further information & manufacturer's instructions. To have schluter transition between carpet and

vinyl flooring.

CP-100.1 (CP-602) LM 2/2/2016 K | DQ Guestroom Carpet Pad LM K1, K1 ADA, K3 Guestrooms Aqua Carpet Lisa Homan

Contract Alliance

Product Name: 32 oz. Fiber Pad. Content: 100% Recycled Fiber (70% Pre Consumer Recylced

Material, 30% Post Consumer Recycled Material). Roll Size: 12'W x 60'/60L

Refer to specification for further information & manufacturer's

instructions.

CP-101 LM 1/29/2016 DQ Guestroom Carpet LM Double Queen Guestrooms Aqua Carpet Lisa Homan Contract Alliance

Solution Dyed Nylon, Cut and loop pile Custom Pattern Number: k061812m mlcl. Approximate inset

size: 14'6" W x 8' L

with pile heights of k061812N. Approximate dimensions

CP-101.1 LM 1/29/2016 Carpet Pad

CP-102 LM 1/29/2016 K2 Guestroom Wall to Wall Carpet LM K2, K2ADA Guestrooms Aqua Carpet Lisa Homan

Contract Alliance

Solution Dyed Nylon, Cut and loop pile. Custom Pattern Number: k061812m mlcl. Approximate inset

size: TBD W x 8' L

with pile heights of k061812N. Approximate dimensions

CP-102.1 LM 6/9/2016 Carpet Pad LM K2, K2ADA Guestrooms Aqua Carpet Lisa Homan Contract Alliance

Product Name: 32 oz. Fiber Pad. Content: 100% Recycled Fiber (70% Pre Consumer Recylced

Material, 30% Post Consumer Recycled Material). Roll Size: 12'W x 60'/60L (Size to be verified).


instructions.

CP-300 LM 2/15/2016 Corridor Carpet Guestroom Level Corridors TaiPingHelen Morley


Custom Pattern Number: Custom-BX05776-10. Pattern Repeat: 143.4" x 84". Colors: G311, N311,

F314, E312/33D, E311/32D, D314/37C. Content: 80% Wool, 20% Nylon. Total Weight: 68.4 oz/sq yard


instructions. Carpet will be pattern matched and seamed for model

purposes. Manufacturer to provide seaming diagram prior to installation and axminster spec

sheet.

CP-300.1 LM 2/15/2016 Carpet Pad Guestroom Level Corridors Sponge Cushion Inc.Tom Dunn

[email protected] 303-884-9428

Product name: Tred-MOR. Product Number: 2568QL (Manufacturer to verify). Content: 100% Virgin

Enriched SBR synthetic rubber. Weight: 80oz/sq yd


instructions.

CP-301 LM 6/9/2016 Elevator Lobby Carpet Guestroom Level Elevator Lobbies TaiPingHelen Morley


Style: Custom Design to be developed by SDDG | Color: Custom | Content: 7/9 Row Axminster |

Dimensions: To be verified by MFR

CP-301.1 LM 6/9/2016 Carpet Pad Guestroom Level Elevator Lobbies Sponge Cushion Inc.Tom Dunn


Product Name: Tred-MOR. Product Number: 2580 (Manufacturer to verify). Content: SBR Rubber.

Weight: 80oz/sq yd. Properties: Antimicrobrial. Size: 54" x 60' (30 sy.). Color: Black


instructions.

CP-401 LM 6/9/2016 Inset Hand Tufted Wool Area Rug Level 1 Lobby/ Fireplace TaiPingHelen Morley


Style: Custom Design to be developed by SDDG | Color: Custom | Content: Hand Tufted Wool Rug, inset

in flooring | Dimensions: 31'-10" x 14'-0"Inset Rug Over Pad

CP-401.1 LM 6/9/2016 Carpet Pad for Area Rug Level 1 Lobby/ Fireplace Sponge Cushion Inc.Tom Dunn





instructions.

CP-402 LM 6/9/2016 Hand Tufted Wool Area Rug (Inset) Level 1 Lobby/ Library TaiPing

Helen Morley [email protected]

(630) 469-6850

Style: Custom Design to be developed by SDDG | Color: Custom | Content: Hand Tufted Wool Rug |

Dimensions: 14'-0" x 8'-0"Inset Rug Over Pad

CP-402.1 LM 6/9/2016 Carpet Pad for Area Rug Level 1 Lobby/ Library Sponge Cushion Inc.Tom Dunn





instructions.





CP-403 LM 6/9/2016 Hand Tufted Wool Area Rug (Inset) Level 1 Lobby/ Concierge Lounge TaiPing


(630) 469-6850



CP-403.1 LM 6/9/2016 Carpet Pad for Area Rug Level 1 Lobby/ Concierge Lounge Sponge Cushion Inc.Tom Dunn





instructions.

CP-501 LM 6/9/2016 Axminster Carpet Ballroom & Pre-Function & Meeting Rooms TaiPing


(630) 469-6850

Style: Custom Design to be developed by SDDG | Color: Custom | Content: 7/9 Row Axminster |

Dimensions: To be verified by MFRTo Be Installed Over Pad

CP-501.1 LM 6/9/2016 Carpet Pad For Axminster Carpet Ballroom & Pre-Function & Meeting Rooms Sponge Cushion Inc.

Tom Dunn [email protected]

303-884-9428




instructions.

CP-451 AC Inset Hand Tufted Wool Area Rug Living Room TBD TBDStyle: Custom Design to be developed by SDDG |

Color: Custom | Content: Hand Tufted Wool Rug, Inset in flooring | Dimensions: 22'-5" x 12'-0"

Inset Rug Over Pad

CP-451.1 AC 6/9/2016 Carpet Pad for Area Rug Living Room Sponge Cushion Inc.Tom Dunn





instructions.

CP-452 AC Hand Tufted Wool Area Rug (Inset) Library TBD TBD



CP-452.1 AC 6/9/2016 Carpet Pad for Area Rug Library Sponge Cushion Inc.Tom Dunn





instructions.

CP-453 AC 6/9/2016 Hand Tufted Wool Area Rug (Inset) Lounge TBD TBD



CP-453.1 AC 6/9/2016 Carpet Pad for Area Rug Lounge Sponge Cushion Inc.Tom Dunn





instructions.

CP-801 AC 6/9/2016 Area Rug Carpet (Loose Lay) AC King Guestroom Luzern LimitedChristy Jones

[email protected](800) 843-1728 x314

Style: AC Marriott Standard Spec (Modified), Pattern #53211 (Modified - Custom Color in Development) | Construction: CYP, Cut & Loop Pile; New Zealand

Heather Wool with Halo Nylon | Dimensions: 8'-0" x 6'-0"

Loose Lay Rug

CP-802 AC 6/9/2016 Area Rug Carpet (Loose Lay) AC Double Queen Guestroom Luzern LimitedChristy Jones

[email protected](800) 843-1728 x314

Style: AC Marriott Standard Spec (Modified), Pattern #53211 (Modified - Custom Color in Development) | Construction: CYP, Cut & Loop Pile; New Zealand

Heather Wool with Halo Nylon | Dimensions: 13'-6" x 6'-0"

Loose Lay Rug

CP-803 AC 6/9/2016 Modular Carpet Tile AC Corridor Tandus Centiva / Desso USAChristine Topf

[email protected](312) 507-1470

Style: Evoke #A0001 | Color: Coventry Grey #31905 | Content: 100% Dynex SD Nylon | Backing: Flex-Aire

Cushion Backing | Dimensions: 24" x 24" TileModular Carpet Tile

CONCRETE

CO-401 LM Polished Concrete Stair Tread & Riser Concrete CollaborativeMichael Mangin michael@concrete-

collaborative.com 312-888-1703

Range: Laguna Stair Tread; Color: Coal | Size: 45"W Tile. Refer to DWGs for dimensions.

MFR Recommended Prosoco Polishguard Sealant





CO-402 LM Polished Concrete Fireplace Base Surround Concrete CollaborativeMichael Mangin michael@concrete-


Range: Laguna; Color: Coal MFR Recommended Prosoco Polishguard Sealant

CO-451 AC 6/9/2016 Stained/Matte Concrete Topping Field Flooring AC Lobby Ardex Chris Nathe | 815-322-3431 | [email protected]

Ardex Concrete Topping SD-T | Color: Grey | Troweled on finish 1/16" per layer, 2-3 layers expected. Ardex

SD-T Grey finished with 1 coat, TK6 NanoCoat & StoneLok "E3" (20.00625) and 2 coats StoneLok "MLT

Plus" Matte

MFR to recommend sealant. Mfr to provide mockup.

TZ AC 9/10/2015 Terrazzo Field Flooring Throughout Concrete CollaborativeMichael Mangin michael@concrete-


TBD

TZ AC 9/28/2015 Terrazzo Field Flooring Throughout TM Supply Mike Brawley


TBD

CO-453 AC 6/9/2016 Stained/Gloss Concrete Topping Accent Flooring AC Lobby Ardex Chris Nathe | 815-322-3431 | [email protected]

Ardex Concrete Topping SD-T | Color: Grey | Self Leveling product, topically dyed once dividers are

placed. Ardex SD-T Grey finished with 1 coat, TK6 NanoCoat & StoneLok "E3" (20.00625) and 2 coats

StoneLok "MLT Plus" Gloss

MFR to recommend sealant. Concrete pattern to have inlay

metal schluter strip to match MT-453. SDDG to provide DWG of pattern. Mfr to provide mockup.

CO-600 LM Polished Concrete Bar Countertop Concrete CollaborativeMichael Mangin michael@concrete-


Range: Laguna; Color: Coal

Ref Dwgs for locations. Manufacturer confirms material

can withstand extreme temperatures

FLOORING

LVT-100 LM 6/9/2016 Luxury Vinyl Tile Flooring LM Guest Rooms Shaw Hard Surface

Leanne Waters [email protected] (800)

241-4826 (312) 543-3120

Quiet Cover #0186V Vinyl Plank with InStep Locking System | Color: Cottonwood | Class/ASTM F1700:

Class III Printed Film Vinyl Plank, Type B (embossed) | Overall Thickness: 0.203" | Nominal Dimensions: 7"

W x 48" L | Finish: ExoGuard Quartz-Enhanced Urethane | Edge Profile: Micro Bevel | FlorSept

Antimicrobial

Backing Class: Commercial Grade. Installation: Floating; adhesive not recommended.

WF-401 LM Walnut Wood Flooring Reception - Floor Accent LV WoodLee Knop


Engineered Wood Heritage Walnut Flatsawn: Character, Surface Smooth | Finish Oiled | Solid 5/8"

Thick. Board Size: 6"W x 5' L

To match SDDG control sample. Refer to DWGs for location.

GLAZING & MIRROR

GL-100 LM 6/9/2016 Etched Graphic Acrylic DQ01 Model Room | LM Guestroom Closet Doors TBD TBD To match SDDG control sample. Pending model room

review.GC to submit sample for SDDG

review.

GL-200 LM 6/9/2016 Shower Partition LM King Guest Bath GC to Source GC to Source

Full length shower partition. Low Iron Glass. 3/8" Thick. 8' H x 2' 4-3/4" W x 5/16" T. Dimensions to be

V.I.F. From floor to 5'-2-7/8" (100%) opaque. 2'-7-1/8" to ceiling (glass fade from opaque to clear).

White (confirm w/Marriott Standard fade). Square polished edges. GC to coordinate with BA-205 (Pull) AND HD-202 Hinges.

Send samples to SDDG for approval.

GL-201 LM 6/9/2016 Shower Door LM King Guest Bath GC to Source GC to Source

Full length shower door. Low Iron Glass. 3/8" Thick. 7'-6"'H x 2'-6"W x 5/16" T. Dimensions to be V.I.F. From floor to 5'-2-7/8" (100%) opaque. 2'-7-1/8" to

ceiling (glass fade from opaque to clear).







GL-202 LM 6/9/2016 Shower Partition LM Double Queen Guest Bath GC to Source GC to Source

Full length shower partition. Low Iron Glass. 3/8" Thick. 8' H x 2'-2-3/4" W x 5/16" T. Dimensions to be

V.I.F. From floor to 5'-2-7/8" (100%) opaque. 2'-7-1/8" to ceiling (glass fade from opaque to clear).



GL-203 LM 2/15/2016 Smoked Glass LM Vanity Millwork (Side Facing Guestroom) GC to Source GC to Source Smoked glass mirror. Dimensions to be V.I.F. Provide

sample to SDDG for approval.

Dimensions to be coordinated with Electric Mirror

spec.compoenent. GC to provide frame & mirror back. Cap/cover to be developed and provided for the ceiling. Must be coordinated

with GC and verified in field. Refer to Model Room DWGs for location. CONTRACTOR

FURNISHED. CONTRACTOR INSTALLED.

GL-204 LM 6/9/2016 Shower Door LM Double Queen Guest Bath GC to Source GC to Source

Full length shower door. Low Iron Glass. 3/8" Thick. 7'-6"'H x 2'-8"W x 5/16" T. Dimensions to be V.I.F. From floor to 5'-2-7/8" (100%) opaque. 2'-7-1/8" to

ceiling (glass fade from opaque to clear).



GL-401 LM Laminated Antique Mirror Lobby Bar "Door" Front Panel Bendheim Architectural Glass Derek Larsen


Laminated Antique Mirror: CHIW-125604 | 3/8" Thick; Refer to DWGs for Overall Dimensions (Approx. 28"W

x 130"H per "door" panel). Overall MFR Sheet Size Span Available: 96"W x 130"H

Refer to DWGs. Any seamage to be minimal.

GL-402 LM Clear Tempered Glass Lobby Bar Shelving & Back & Fireplace Hood Design GC to Source GC to Source Clear, Low Iron Tempered Glass | 1/4" Thick SDDG to Approve Sample

GL-403 LM/AC Glass Toilet Partitions (System) L1 Public Restrooms Carvart Nicole Stark

[email protected] 312.288.5611

Cabrillant Freestanding Glass Cubicle, 700 Recessed Leg Support | Exterior Finish: White Glass (TBD);

Interior Finish: White; Hardware Finish: Clear Anodized Aluminum

Refer to DWGs for Dimensions. SDDG to approve Glass Finish

Sample

GL-403 LM/AC8/26/2015 Alternative

OptionGlass Toilet Partitions (System) L1 Public Restrooms Prospec

Jose "Jorie" Aluquin The Spargo Group, Inc.


Cabrillant System/Privada System TBD

GL-404 LM Glass on Wall LM Elevator Cab Interior Walls FORMS+SURFACES Todd Gore [email protected] (800) 451-0410

LEVELe Elevator Interiors Wall panel system; ViviChrome Glass, color white, weight approx 5lbs per

SF.


Sample

GL-405 LM 4/18/2016 Clear Tempered Mirror LM Lobby Fireplace GC to Source GC to Source Clear, Low Iron Tempered MirrorRefer to DWGs for Dimensions. SDDG to approve Glass Finish

Sample

GL-501 LM/AC Glass Toilet Partitions (System) L2 Public Restrooms Carvart Nicole Stark


Cabrillant Freestanding Glass Cubicle, 700 Recessed Leg Support | Exterior Finish: White Glass (TBD);

Interior Finish: White; Hardware Finish: Clear Anodized Aluminum

SDDG to Approve Glass Color Sample

GL-502 LM 7/24/2015 Bronze Mirror Ballroom Walls GC to Source GC to Source Bronze Mirror | 1/4" Thick. Refer to DWGs for Overall Dimensions

SDDG to Approve Glass Color Sample

GL-451 AC Smoked Frosted Mirror Bar Custom Faux Doors & Library Millwork Niche GC to Source GC to Source Smoked Frosted Mirror | 1/4" Thick. Refer to DWGs

for Overall Dimensions SDDG to Approve Sample

GL-452 AC 8/26/2015 Back Painted Glass Lobby Fireplace and North & South Column Faces McGrory Glass Chris McGrory [email protected]

(800) 220-3749SDDG-186 | 1/4" Thick; Refer to DWGs for Overall

DimensionsGlass intent to be large scaled.

Minimize seaming.





GL-453 AC Clear Tempered Glass Dividing Screens & Fireplace GC to Source GC to Source Clear, Low Iron Tempered Glass | 1/4" Thick SDDG to Approve SampleGL-600 LM Clear Tempered Mirror L20 Fitness GC to Source GC to Source Clear, Low Iron Tempered Mirror SDDG to Approve Sample

GL-601 LM Clear Tempered Glass L20 Bar Rooftop Enclosure GC to Source GC to Source Clear, Low Iron Tempered Glass | 1/4" Thick

SDDG To Approve Sample. Manufacturer to confirm

material/finish will withstand extreme temperatures.

GL-601 LM Clear Tempered Glass with etched pattern L20 Bar Rooftop Enclosure GC to Source GC to Source Clear, Low Iron Tempered Glass | 1/4" Thick

SDDG to develop etched pattern with manufacturer. Manufacturer

to confirm material/finish will withstand extreme temperatures.

GL-701 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Clear Tempered GlassTypical Glass at Semi Private

Dining surround, Screens at Open Kitchen, and Lobby Divider screens

GC to Source GC to Source Clear, Low Iron Tempered Glass | 3/8" thick, Tempered Refer to DWGs for location.

GL-702 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Tempered Seeded Glass Decorative Glass at Open Kitchen and Lobby Divider Screens Bendheim

Derek E. Larson [email protected]

(773) 571-7882

Clear Seeded Glass | Thickness: 3/8" tthick (4mm of seeded glass + low iron glass laminate), Tempered/

Laminated Refer to DWGs for location.

GL-703 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Clear Acrylic Bar Shelving GC to Source GC to Source Clear | 1/2" thick | To be coordinated with bar shelving detail for uplighting at bar shelf.

Refer to DWGs for location and details

GL-704 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Antiqued Mirror Bar Mirror Pulp Studio, INC Rae Radovich [email protected] (847) 972-1161 REF # AM BEN 02 | Max Dim. 47x93 Refer to DWGs for location and

details

GL-705 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Textured Tempered Glass Divider Screens at Lobby BendheimDerek E. Larson


Low Iron Etched Structure, Tempered for Safety Refer to DWGs for location and details

GL-706 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Tinted Tempered Glass Glass Partition at Private Dining Room Bendheim

Derek E. Larson [email protected]

(773) 571-7882Light Bronze Tinted Glass, Tempered for Safety Refer to DWGs for location and

details

METAL

MT-100 LM 6/9/2016 Typical Brass Finish DQ01 Model Room Closet Door Frame | LM Guestrooms GC to Source GC to Source Satin Brass Typical Brass finish for closet

frames. Submit sample.

MT-200 LM 6/9/2016 Typical Brass Finish K02 Model Room Vanity Mirror Frame | LM Guest Bath GC to Source GC to Source Black Matte Metal

Black matte finish at vanity frame. 1/2"W x 3"D frame to be durable

enough to withstand abuse. Submit sample.

MT-300 LM 12/23/2015 Brushed Brass Finish Corridor Trim @ Portal Wood Veneer GC to Source GC to Source Brass Metal | Brushed|

Assume High-Grade Metal. To Match SDDG Control Sample. Refer to DWGs for location.

MT-401 LM Brushed Brass Finish Throughout Level 1 GC to Source GC to Source Brass Metal | Brushed| Refer to DWGs for lineal footage required.


MT-402 LM 8/26/2015 Not used Black Brass Finish L1 Metal Screens GC to Source GC to Source Brass Metal | Black Finish | Refer to DWGs for lineal

footage required.


MT-403 LM 8/26/2015 Graphite Metal LM Elevator Cab Interior FORMS+SURFACESTodd Gore


LEVELe Elevator Interiors Wall Panel System; Handrail Panel in Fused Graphite; Seastone Finish

Refer to DWGs for Dimensions. SDDG to approve metal sample

MT-404 LM Black Powder Coated Finish Inside of LM Staircase GC to Source GC to Source Powder Coated | Black, Low Texture, High Gloss | Refer to DWGs for lineal footage required.






MT-405 LM 8/26/2015 Stainless Steel & Fused Metal Elevator Door Skin L1 Elevator Door FORMS+SURFACES

Todd Gore [email protected]

(800) 451-0410

Stainless Steel & Fused Metal Elevator Door Skin | Fused White Gold, Seastone Finish | Pattern: None |

3'-6" x 8-0" Opening Size

Apply Forms & Surfaces CeramiLoc treatment for Stainless Steel Finishes. Refer to DWGs for Dimensions. SDDG to approve

metal sample. Finish to coordinate with typ. Metal finish.

MT-501 LM Brushed Brass Throughout Level 2 GC to Source GC to Source Brass Metal | Brushed | Refer to DWGs for lineal footage required.


MT-502 LM Black Brass Finish Ballroom Portal Surround Level 2 GC to Source GC to Source Brass Metal | Black, Matte (Sheen to coordinate with WD-501) | Refer to DWGs for lineal footage required.


MT-503 LM 8/26/2015 Stainless Steel & Fused Metal Elevator Door Skin L2 Elevator Doors FORMS+SURFACES


(800) 451-0410

Stainless Steel & Fused Metal Elevator Door Skin | Fused White Gold, Seastone Finish| Pattern: None | 3'-

6" x 8-0" Opening Size

Apply Forms & Surfaces CeramiLoc treatment for Stainless

Steel Finishes. Refer to DWGs for Dimensions. SDDG to

approve metal sample. Finish to coordinate with typ. Metal finish.

MT-451 AC Satin Nickel Finish Throughout Public Spaces GC to Source GC to Source Nickel Metal | Satin | Refer to DWGs for lineal footage required.


MT-452 AC Textured Rustic Bronze Bar Screen & Dividing Panel Frames GC to Source GC to Source Bronze Metal | Textured Rustic | Refer to DWGs for

lineal footage required.


MT-453 AC Plated Polished Nickel Lobby & Bar Floor Pattern GC to Source GC to Source Nickel Metal | Plated Polished Nickel | Refer to DWGs for lineal footage required.

Assume High-Grade Metal. To Match SDDG Control Sample.

Refer to DWGs for location. To coordinate with CO-452 Custom

Floor Design.

MT-454 AC 8/26/2015 Stainless Steel & Fused Metal Elevator Door Skin L1 & L2 Elevator Doors FORMS+SURFACES


(800) 451-0410

Stainless Steel & Fused Metal Elevator Door Skin | Fused Nickel Silver, Seastone Finish | Pattern: None |

3'-6" x 8-0" Opening Size

Apply Forms & Surfaces CeramiLoc treatment for Stainless

Steel Finishes. Refer to DWGs for Dimensions. SDDG to

approve metal sample. Finish to coordinate with typ. Metal finish.

MT-455 AC 4/1/2016 Blackened Steel Finish Registration Pod GC to Source GC to Source Aluminum | Black | Low Texture | Matte Finish Refer to DWGs for Dimensions. SDDG to approve metal sample

MT-600 LM Black Aluminum Finish L20 Rooftop Bar GC to Source GC to Source Black Metal Finish structure for suspended trellis, glazing system and panels.


Manufacturer to confirm material/finish will withstand

extreme temperatures.

MT-601 LM 6/9/2016 Metal Wire Mesh L20 Rooftop Bar Equipment Cage Banker Wire

Abby [email protected]

(262) 363-6120

M22-37 Square Weave | Stainless Steel Finish | 66.2% Openness | .210" Thickness

Refer to Dwgs for locations. SDDG to approve metal sample.





MT-701 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Coated Brass Rail Bar Footrail HAFELETy Lefever

[email protected] (800) 423-3531 x5304

Straight Railing Tube Bar Railing System (Custom: System: 51; Cat. No.: 812.10.802), Stainless Steel

Quality 1,4301 in PVD Coated Brass Coloured Finish, Tube 2" Dia. X Custom Length:12'-6" L (Refer to

DWGs for Dimensions)

Hafele to provide all railing components (end caps, post

fittings, foot rail brackets)

MT-702 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Blackened Steel Finish

Semi Private Dining Screens, Open Kitchen Screens, Lobby Divider

Screens, half height wall dividers in Main Dining

GC to Source GC to SourceBlackened Steel Finish | Low Texture | Satin Finish - to be coordinated as part of operable glazing system at

open kitchen.

Refer to Dwgs for locations. SDDG to approve metal sample.

MT-703 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Champagne Bronze Wine Display GC to Source GC to Source Champagne Bronze | Satin Finish Refer to Dwgs for locations. SDDG to approve metal sample.

MT-704 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Blackened Steel Finish Wine Display GC to Source GC to Source Aluminum | Black | Low Texture | Matte Finish Refer to Dwgs for locations. SDDG to approve metal sample.

PAINT

PT-100 LM 2/2/2016 Paint @ Wall LM Guest Rooms Benjamin MooreJason Walker


Snowfall White OC-118 | Eggshell

Paint at exterior wall and VFCU supply, O/A, and access panel of VFC and window valance. Paint

to be suitable for exterior wall.

PT-101 LM 2/2/2016 Paint @ Ceilings LM Guest Rooms Benjamin MooreJason Walker


Snowfall White OC-118 | Flat

PT-102 LM 6/9/2016 Paint @ Window Treatment Vallance and Window Wall LM Guest Rooms Benjamin Moore

Jason Walker [email protected]

(773) 597-8698Graytint 1611 | Eggshell

PT-103 LM 4/1/2016 Paint @ Door Casing LM Guest Room Walnut Doors Benjamin MooreJason Walker


Paint color to match adjacent door, Paint sample to match door finish submittal. Designer to approve

sample.

Paint to be suitable for metal casing where applicable.

PT-104 LM 2/2/2016 Paint @ Hollow Metal Door Frames

LM Guest Room (Walnut Doors) Benjamin Moore


(773) 597-8698Coconut Grove 1029 (Classic Collection) | Semi-Gloss

Paint at hollow metal door frames for guestroom side door frame. To coordinate with typ. walnut wood

finish.

PT-105 LM 2/2/2016 Paint @ Grilles LM Guest Room Benjamin MooreJason Walker


Super White PM-1 | Semi-Gloss Paint color for grille

PT-200 LM 6/9/2016 Paint @ Air Supply/Return Grilles LM Guest Room Bathroom Benjamin MooreJason Walker


Olympus Green 679 | Eggshell Paint color for grille

PT-300 LM 2/2/2016 Paint @ Ceilings LM Guest Room Corridors Benjamin MooreJason Walker



PT-301 LM 2/2/2016 Paint @ Door Casing LM Guest Room Corridors Benjamin MooreJason Walker


Mink 2112-10 | Semi-Gloss Paint to be suitable for metal casing where applicable.





PT-302 LM 2/2/2016 Paint @ Door Drop Portal LM Guest Room Corridors Benjamin MooreJason Walker


Daltic Gray 1467 | Eggshell Refer to ISK-010

PT-401 LM Paint @ Ceilings Lobby Benjamin MooreJason Walker



PT-402 LM/AC 4/1/2016 Paint @ Ceilings L1 Public Restrooms Benjamin MooreJason Walker


White Dove PM-19 | Semi-Gloss

PT-403 LM 4/1/2016 Paint @ Door Frames L1 Walnut Wood Doors Benjamin MooreJason Walker



sample.


PT-404 LM 4/1/2016 Paint @ Door Frames L1 Oak Wood Doors Benjamin MooreJason Walker



sample.


PT-405 LM 6/9/2016 Paint @ Door & Door Frames L1 Stair Benjamin MooreJason Walker


To Match SP-401 Submit sample to Designer for review.

PT-501 LM 4/18/2016 Remaining Pearlescent Paint @ Wall Accent Ballroom Scuffmaster Liz Saitta [email protected]

(312) 343-1670Product ID: G 9218367; Description: Smooth Pearl;

Product #: SP9674 | Satin Clearcoat

PT-502 LM Paint @ Ceilings L2 Pre-Function & Ballroom Ceilings & Coves Benjamin Moore


(773) 597-8698Snowfall White OC-118 | Flat

PT-503 LM/AC 4/1/2016 Paint @ Ceilings L2 Public Restrooms Benjamin MooreJason Walker


White Dove PM-19 | Flat

PT-504 LM Paint @ Door Frame (Main Doors @ Entry) L2 Pre-Function & Ballroom Benjamin Moore


(773) 597-8698Onyx 2133-10 | Semi-Gloss Paint at metal door frames

PT-505 LM 4/1/2016 Paint @ Door Frame L2 Pre-Function, Ballroom, & Meeting Rooms (Walnut Doors) Benjamin Moore


(773) 597-8698


sample.


PT-506 LM 4/1/2016 Paint @ Door Frame L2 Pre-Function (Oak Doors) Benjamin MooreJason Walker



sample.


PT-451 AC Paint @ Ceilings Throughout Public Spaces Benjamin MooreJason Walker


Chantilly Lace OC-65 | Flat

PT-452 AC Paint @ Soffit Breakfast & Library Benjamin MooreJason Walker


Natural Linen 966 | Flat Color to coordinate with TI-451





PT-453 AC Paint @ Wall Library Benjamin MooreJason Walker


Natural Linen 966 | Satin Color to coordinate with TI-451

PT-454 AC Paint @ Door Trim Library Door Benjamin MooreJason Walker


Natural Linen 966 | Semi-GlossPaint at hollow metal door frames.

Color to coordinate with TI-451 and WD-451

PT-600 LM Paint @Walls L20 Fitness Center Benjamin MooreJason Walker


Snowfall White OC-118 | Satin

PT-601 LM Paint @Ceiling L20 Common Area Benjamin MooreJason Walker


Snowfall White OC-118 | Satin

PT-602 LM Paint @Ceiling L20 Fitness Center, drapery pocket Benjamin MooreJason Walker


Black 2132-10 | Flat

PT-603 LM 4/1/2016 Paint @ Ceilings L20 Public Restrooms Benjamin MooreJason Walker


White Dove PM-19 | Flat

PT-604 LM 4/1/2016 Paint @ Rooftop Bar L20 Bar Benjamin MooreJason Walker


Black | Exterior Rated Paint | Semi-Gloss FinishManufacturer to confirm

material/finish will withstand extreme temperatures.

PT-701 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Paint @ Ceilings Typical Benjamin MooreJason Walker


BM AC-27 Galvaston Gray | Flat

PT-702 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Paint @ Millwork Bar and Open Kitchen Benjamin MooreJason Walker


BM Essex Green EXT. RM | High-Gloss

PT-703 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Paint @ Columns Columns in Main Dining, behind drapery at Settees Benjamin Moore


(773) 597-8698BM AC-27 Galvaston Gray | Eggshell

PT-704 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Paint @ Air Supply/Return Grilles in Ceiling Gyp Ceiling Benjamin Moore


(773) 597-8698To Match PT-701 | Eggshell

PT-705 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Paint @ Air Supply/Return Grilles on Walls Walls Benjamin Moore


(773) 597-8698BM OC-118 Snowfall White | Eggshell

PT-706 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Accent Paint @ Ceiling Private Dining Room Benjamin MooreJason Walker


BM Essex Green EXT. RM | Flat

PT-707 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Paint @ Ceiling Kitchen Benjamin MooreJason Walker


BM OC-118 Snowfall White | Expoxy





PT-708 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Paint @ Walls Typical Walls Benjamin MooreJason Walker


BM OC-118 Snowfall White | Eggshell

PT-709 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Paint @ Niche Wall Base at Dining Niche Benjamin MooreJason Walker


BM 2105-10 Forest Brown | Eggshell

PT-710 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Paint @ Niche Wine Display Benjamin MooreJason Walker


BM AC-28 Smoke Embers | Eggshell

RUBBER BASE

RB-100 LM 6/9/2016 LM Guest Room Base LM Guest Room & Water Closet JohnsoniteIvana Rosich


4" - Johnsonite Millwork Profile Reveal, Color: TA5 Colonial Grey CG, Toeless

RB-300 LM 6/9/2016 LM Corridor Base LM Corridor JohnsoniteIvana Rosich


6" MW-XX-F6 - Johnsonite Millwork Profile Reveal, Color: TA5 Colonial Grey CG

RB 600 LM L20 Fitness Base L20 Fitness JohnsoniteIvana Rosich


4" - Johnsonite Millwork Profile Reveal, Color: TA5 Colonial Grey CG, Profile: Toeless

SOLID SURFACE

SS-200 LM 1/20/2016 Bath Vanity Top & Shower Curb K02 and DQ01 Model Rooms Stone Design Chris Sorrell


Engineered Stone; Neolithic Calacata Pulido, 12 mm, Polished

SS-401 LM/AC 4/1/2016 Solid Surface Level 1 FOH Corridor Below Chair Rail Caesarstone

Katie [email protected]

(847) 595-7866

Engineered Stone; Squared Edge, Color: To match concrete CO:452 | 1/4" Thick

SS-402 LM 4/1/2016 Solid Surface Level 1 Public Restroom Countertop Caesarstone


(847) 595-7866

Quartz Surface 4030 | Honed Finish | .3/4" Thick | Miter Edge

SS-451 AC 4/1/2016 Solid Surface Registration Pod ParksiteAudra Mika


Engineered Stone; Zodiaq, Calacatta Natura, 2cm Thick, Polished

SS-452 AC 4/1/2016 Solid Surface Buffet Countertops CaesarstoneKatie Ozinga


Engineered Stone; Frosty Carrina 5141, 2cm Thick, Polished



(847) 595-7866




(847) 595-7866


SPECIALTY

SP-100 LM 2/2/2016 Bumper Corner bead LM Guestrooms Trim-tex Steve [email protected] Recessed / flush corner guard

SP-401 LM 6/9/2016 White Plaster Finish Lobby Walls, Column Inset, Outer Stair Form Artisan Venetian Plaster

Renee Pinto [email protected]

(708) 452-8819Marmorino Frattonato 2867

Finishes proprietary to manufacturer. Artisan Venetian Plaster to install their material

only.





SP-402 LM 6/9/2016 Dark Gray Plaster Finish Reception Art Wall Artisan Venetian PlasterRenee Pinto


Veneziano Frattonato 1207-A


only.

SP-403 LM 6/9/2016 Dark Gray Plaster Finish Column Trim & Beam/Millwork Surround Artisan Venetian Plaster


(708) 452-8819Veneziano Frattonato 1207-A


only.

SP-501 LM 4/18/2016 Not Used Specialty Ceiling Panel System Ballroom Arktura

Chrissy Thompson The Ruder Group


Atmosphera Contour | Sumitomo SM-01 | 10" Blade spaced 6" apart

Exact Pattern TBD. SDDG to further develop.

SP-502 LM 6/9/2016 White Plaster Finish Level 2 Columns Artisan Venetian PlasterRenee Pinto


Marmorino Frattonato 2867


only.

SP-401 LM 6/9/2016 White Plaster Finish Lobby Walls, Column Inset, Outer Stair Form Artisan Venetian Plaster


(708) 452-8819Marmorino Frattonato 2867


only.

SP-403 LM 6/24/2015 Ebonized Wood Finish Column Trim & Beam/Millwork Surround GC to Source GC to Source High Gloss Ebonized Wood Finish | Butt Joint To match SDDG control sample.

Refer to DWGs for location.

SP-451 AC 8/26/2015 Zinc Bar Countertop Bastille Metalworks

Emily Backman [email protected]

(912) 344-6060 Christopher Plummer

[email protected] (866) 570 9690

Custom Slip-cast Natural Zinc counter top cast over a 26 ply premium grade Baltic birch wood substrate |

Color TBD | Squared Edge | Size 2" Thick

Color sample to be submitted to SDDG for approval.

SP-452 AC 4/1/2016 Faux Leather Wall Tile Lobby Napa Tile

Tom Brassell Brassell Design Consultants


Custom Napa Wall Tile, Beveled and Padded 38" x 38" | Concertex Fabric Pattern: Incognitus Rustique; Color: Java (54" Width; 100% Polyurethane Face,

65% Polyester/35% Cotton Back; Exceeds 100,000 Double Rubs; Passes NFPA-260, UFAC, CAL-117

Class 1)

Refer to DWGs for location. Door @ wall to be clad in faux leather

wall system. Manufacturer to provide installation options.

SP-600 LM Rubber Sports Flooring Fitness Center - L20 Pliteq Morgan Sadler (647)588.7721 Style: Genie Mat FIT-30 | Color: GREY A10 | Size: 24x24 interlocking tile Refer to DWGs for location.

SP-601 LM Wood Acoustical Ceiling System Fitness Center - L20 ArmstrongTabitha Ruez


Style: Woodworks Grille 7264BOGWH | 1-3/8" 8 Blades, 12" x 96" x1 7/8" Refer to DWGs for location.

SP-701 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Faux Wood Beams Decorative Ceiling FOAM CO.Josh Degano

[email protected] (858(277-3636

Custom Finish, to match designers sample (Reclaimed, natural matte Oak). Size 3.5" W x 12" H,

beam spacing at 16" OC.


SP-702 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Faux Wood Beams Decorative Ceiling FOAM CO.Josh Degano

[email protected] (858(277-3636

Custom Finish, to match designers sample (Reclaimed, natural matte Oak). Size 9" W x 14" H


STONE

ST-300 LM 6/9/2016 Stone @ GR Corridor Elevator Lobby

Guest Room Corridor Elevator Lobby Terrazzo & Marble Supply

Mike Brawley [email protected]

(847) 777-6754

Engineered Stone, Difiniti Quartz, Evoke, Crestola. 2cm. Polished

ST-401 LM 8/26/2015 Marble @ Countertop L1 Reception Pods Stone SourceLindsey Schotke


Calacatta Vision | Honed | Slab: 2CM Thick | Eased Edge Profile

Refer to Stone Source Care & Maintenance: Fila PRW200

(Pregrouting protection) and Fila MP90 (Protection natural effect).


ST-402 LM NOT USED





ST-403 LM Quartzite Stone Countertop Lobby Bar Marble-GraniteRae Radovich


Lucent Quartzite | Slab: 2CM Thick | Eased Edge Profile; Finish with sealant to protect surface against

water absorption and staining.


ST-403 LM 6/9/2016 Alternative Quartzite Stone Countertop Lobby Bar Terrazzo & Marble Supply

Mike Brawley [email protected]

(847) 777-6754

Fiarbanks Extra Quartzite | Slab: 2CM Thick | Eased Edge Profile; Polished Finish with sealant to protect

surface against water absorption and staining. Manufacture recommended DuPont Bulletproof

sealant (8 year guarantee).

To match DDG control sample. Refer to DWGs for location. To be

backlit.

ST-501 LM Marble @ Millwork & Vanity Countertops

Meeting & Boardrooms & L2 Public Restroom Stone Source

Lindsey Schotke [email protected] (312)

970-5660





ST-451 AC Marble @ Millwork Countertop Lobby & Restaurant Stone CityManthy Hiotis


Black River (Crosscut) | Slab | 3CM Thick | Eased Edge Profile; HMK Sealer 534N Silicone Impregnator


ST-452 AC Honed Marble @ Millwork Tables Integrated with Window Seating Lobby and Lounge Stone Source

Lindsey Schotke [email protected] (312)

970-5660

Bianco Dolomiti | Polished | Slab: 2CM | Eased Edge Profile




ST-453 AC 4/1/2016Not Used

Custom, Rough Hewned Natural Stone Block Registration Pod GC to Locally Source GC to Locally Source

Custom Rough Hewned Natural Stone Block | White Calacatta-like color | Approx. Dimensions: 3'-3"W x 3'-

6"H x 2'-10" D (Refer to DWGs)

Stone to be locally sourced. Refer to DWGs for location.

ST-601 LM Marble @ Countertop L20 Fitness Millwork Stone SourceLindsey Schotke






ST-701 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Stone @ Countertop Back Bar Countertop, Host Stand, Service Stations Stone Source

Lindsey Schotke [email protected]

(312)970-5660

Imperial Danby, Polished Marble | Honed | 2 cm thick slab, with 1 1/2" thick profile | Eased Edge Profile

Refer to Stone Source Care and Maintenance: Fila PRW200

(pregrouting protection) and Fila MP90 (Protection and natural

effect). Refer to Dwgs for location.

TILE BASE

TB-100 LM 2/2/2016Tile base

*alt to wood base if porcelain flooring selected

LM Guestroom Ergon Michael Montorsi Tile base for guestrooms To match floor tile TI-100

TB-200 LM 6/9/2016 Shower and toilet room base LM Guest Bath GlenrockRandy Kendrick

Glenrock [email protected]

Iki (Leonardo Ceramica) | Color: DG | 4" Height.

Tile base for guest bathroom shower and toilet compartment.

To match floor tile TI-200. FINAL SPEC PENDING

CONFIRMATION WITH GLENROCK

TB-401 LM 6/9/2016 Custom Colorbody Black Porcelain Wall Base Tile Level 1 Public Spaces Daltile

Hannah Petro [email protected]

(312) 402-6800

Custom Series: Custom Match Point, Twilight Black P126, Bullnose Trim S-43C9 | Polished | Custom 6" x

12" x 3/8" ThickRefer to Drawings.

TB-601 LM 6/9/2016 Custom Colorbody Black Porcelain Wall Base Tile Level 20 Common Foyer Daltile


(312) 402-6800

Custom Series: Custom Match Point, Twilight Black P126, Bullnose Trim S-43C9 | Polished | Custom 6" x

12" x 3/8" ThickRefer to Drawings.

TB-602 LM 4/1/2016 Porcelain Wall Tile Base L20 Public Restroom Ceramic Technics Ltd.Colleen Wehrley


Sassuolo Stone Concrete Bullnose, Grey | Finish: Natural | 4"x 24" x 3/8" Rectified | Grout: Laticrete,

Color: 60 Dusty Grey, 1/16"





TB-701 LM RESTAURANT 4/1/2016 Quarry Tile Base Kitchen DaltileHannah Petro


Quarry Tile base to match TI-704; Epoxy Grout to Match Mapai 47 Charcoal

TILE

TI-200 LM 6/9/2016 Shower Floor Tile LM King and Double Queen Guest Bath Mincey Marble [email protected]

(770) 532-0451 (800) 533-1806Mincey Shower Pan with Linear Drain/Metal Cover|

White | 34" x 60"Final Selection Pending Model

Review

TI‐200_ALT LM 6/9/2016 ShowerandBathroomFloorTile LMDoubleQueenGuestBath GlenrockRandyKendrick

[email protected]

GlenrockScale4x5|Grout:Mapei,47Charcoal,1/16"

Final Selection Pending Model Review

TI-201 LM 6/9/2016 Shower Wall Tile LM King and Double Queen Guest Bath Glenrock

Randy Kendrick Glenrock Distributing

[email protected]

Equipe Masia 3x12 white glossy | Grout: Mapei, 93 Warm Gray, 1/8"


TI‐201_ALT LM 6/9/2016 ShowerWallTile LMDoubleQueenGuestBath GlenrockRandyKendrick

[email protected]

2x8Evolutionwalltile–white,glossy|Grout:Mapei,93WarmGray,1/16"


TI-401 LM Custom Printed Porcelain Floor Tile Reception Daltile


(312) 402-6800

(3) Custom Patterns to be developed by SDDG. (3) Different Sizes: Size A: 24"x24", Size B: 12" x 12",

Size C: 6"x6" | Grout Color TBD, 1/16"Refer to DWGs for location

TI-402 LM 6/9/2016 Geometric Ceramic Tile @ Bar Front Lobby Bar Ann Sacks

Mary Lou Stengele [email protected]

(312)923-0919

Series: Tableau by Kelly Wearstler, Horizon 1 & 2 (Earthenware & Stoneware) | Antique 105 White

Crackle Gloss | 9" x 9" x .375"

Color to be submitted to SDDG designer for approval.

TI-403 LM 4/1/2016 Wood Ceramic Floor Tile Throughout

Level 1 Public Spaces, LM Restaurant Ceramic Technics Ltd.

Colleen Wehrley [email protected]

(773) 701-2365

Pavimenti Pattern Wood, Ash| Natural |10" x 60", 3/8" Thick | Grout: Butech, Color: Cemento, 1/16" Refer to DWGs for location

TI-404 LM Wood Ceramic Floor Tile Accent Level 1 Elevator Lobby Ceramic Technics Ltd.Colleen Wehrley


Pavimenti Pattern Wood, Ash | Natural | 24" x 24", 3/8" Thick | Grout: Butech, Color: Cemento, 1/16" Refer to DWGs for location.

TI-405 LM/AC Porcelain Tile @ Half Wall and Floor Public Restroom Artistic Tile

Meghan Murphy [email protected]

312.670.0612

Astra Porcelain Collection, Selenite Grey Rectified Field Tile # PASTGRH23 | Polished | 23" x 23" x 3/8" |

Grout: Mapei Ultracolor Plus Sanded, 1/16"Refer to DWGs for location.

TI-406 LM/AC 8/27/2015 Porcelain Tile @ Vanity Wall Public Restroom Artistic TileMeghan Murphy


Astra Porcelain Collection, Selenite Grey Rectified Field Tile # PASTGRH23 | Polished | Custom Size:

6"H x 12"W, 3/8" Thick | Grout: Mapei Ultracolor Plus Sanded, 1/16"

Tile to run horizontal. Refer to DWGs for location.

TI-407 LM BOH Floor Tile Level 1 Lobby Bar Ceramic Technics Ltd.Colleen Wehrley


Cooperative Naturali 2.0 | Light Grey | Honed | 24" x 24", 3/8" Thick

TI-501 LM Wall Tile Level 2 Elevator Lobby Stone SourceLindsey Schotke


Bianco Carrara - Raw Tile | Textured | 8" x 24", 5/8" Thick | Grout: Laticrete, Color: 88 Silver Shadow, 1/16"

Textured of pattern to run verticle; tile to run horizontal. Refer to

DWGs for location.

PLASTER LM 8/27/2015 Wall Plaster Finish Option Level 2 Elevator Lobby Atova International Antonio Pinto (708) 452-9982

Contacted for Custom Samples - Custom Plaster Finish to match Stone Source Bianco Carrara - Raw

Tile

Textured of pattern to run verticle; tile to run horizontal. Refer to

DWGs for location.

TI-502 LM 4/1/2016 Porcelain Floor Tile Level 2 Elevator Lobby Stone SourceLindsey Schotke


Pure White Porcelain Tile | Natural Finish |24" x 48" x 3/8" Thick | Grout Color TBD, 1/16" Refer to DWGs for location.

TI-503 LM/AC Porcelain Tile @ Half Wall and Floor Level 2 Public Restroom Artistic Tile

Meghan Murphy [email protected]

312.670.0612

Astra Porcelain Collection, Selenite Grey Rectified Field Tile # PASTGRH23 | Polished | 23" x 23" x 3/8" |

Grout: Mapei Ultracolor Plus Sanded, 1/16"Refer to DWGs for location.

TI-504 LM/AC Porcelain Tile @ Vanity Wall Public Restroom Artistic TileMeghan Murphy


Astra Porcelain Collection, Selenite Grey Rectified Field Tile # PASTGRH23 | Polished | Custom Size:

6"H x 12"W, 3/8" Thick | Grout: Mapei Ultracolor Plus Sanded, 1/16"






TI-451 AC 8/27/2015 Large Porcelain Wall Panel Throughout Level 1 CrossvilleHeidi Vassalotti


Laminam Travertino Romano 5.6 L0004.1M3M | Satin Finish | 60" x 120", 1/4" Thick | Grout: Laticrete, Color:

39 Mushroom, 1/8"Refer to DWGs for location.

TI-451A AC Porcelian Wall Base Throughout Level 1 CrossvilleHeidi Vassalotti


Laminam Travertino Romano | Satin Finish | 6" High, 1/4" Thick | Grout: Laticrete, Color: 39 Mushroom, 1/8"

To coordinate with TI-451. Refer to DWGs for location.

TI-452 AC 8/27/2015 Glass Wall Tile Lobby, Bar, & Restaurant Ann SacksMary Lou Stengele

[email protected] (312)923-0919

Reveal Field Tile, Mt# AS15336-01 | Onyx | 12" x 24" x 1/16" | Grout: Laticrete, Color: 45 Ramen, 1/16" Refer to DWGs for location.

TI-453 AC 2/5/2016 Large Format Porcelain Floor Tile Throughout Level 1 CrossvilleHeidi Vassalotti


Laminam Travertino Romano 5.6L4938. Size: 1M x 1M , Grout: Dark TBD

TI-600 LM 6/9/2016 Dimensional Concrete Tile L20 Rooftop Bar Fine Line TileScott Bartos


SY - Terrain | Finish: Bright White Gloss | Size: 4"x4" | Grout: TBD, Color: White (Pending Tile Review) TBD,

1/8"

Manufacturer confirms material can withstand extreme

temperatures. Refer to DWGs for location.

TI-601 LM Wood Ceramic Floor Tile Level 20 Public Spaces Ceramic Technics Ltd.Colleen Wehrley


Pavimenti Pattern Wood, Ash| Natural |10" x 60", 3/8" Thick | Grout: Butech, Color: Cemento, 1/16"

Refer to DWGs for location. Manufacturer confirms material

can withstand extreme temperatures.

TI-602 LM 4/1/2016 Porcleain Tile @ Floor L20 Public Restroom Ceramic Technics Ltd.Colleen Wehrley


Sassuolo Stone Concrete, Grey | Finish: Structured | 24" x 24" x 3/8" Rectified | Grout: Laticrete, Color: 60

Dusty Grey, 1/16"Refer to DWGs for location

TI-603 LM NOT USED

TI-604 LM Penny Round Tile @ Back Bar L20 Rooftop Bar The Fine Line Rachel Hammer Tile to be mixed :

30%: JAS-1" LOOP 40024H 70% JAS-1" LOOP 40044H

Mix Tile @ 30% Glossy & 70% Matte. Manufacturer confirms

material can withstand extreme temperatures.

TI‐701 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/16 Mosaic Tile ‐ Field Bar Dining, Main Dining DaltileHannah Petro

[email protected] (312) 402‐6797

Keystones, 1" x 1" Ceramic Tile Mosaic, Running Bond pattern, to come in 12" x 12" mesh sheets. Color:

D311 Black/Ebony STD, Designer to coordinate finish and color with manufacturer.

Refer to DWGS for location.

TI-702 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Mosaic Tile - AccentAccent at Main Dining and Semi-Private Dining, and Private Dining

RoomDaltile


(312) 402-6798

Keystones, 1" x 1" Ceramic Tile Mosaic, Running Bond pattern, to come in 12" x 12" mesh sheets. Custom Pattern with up to 4 colors, Designer to coordinate finish, color and custom pattern with manufacturer.


TI-703 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Mosaic Tile - Accent Entry from exterior DaltileHannah Petro


1" x 1" Ceramic Tile Mosaic, Running Bond pattern, to come in 12" x 12" mesh sheets. Color: D311 Black/Ebony STD, Exterior Rated material.


TI-704 LM RESTAURANT 4/1/2016 Quarry Tile Kitchen DaltileHannah Petro


6"x6" Quarry Tile, Black 0Q74 | 1/2" thick | min. grout reccomendation 3/8" | Epoxy Grout to Match Mapai 47

Charcoal

To be installed at front line as noted on plans. Refer to Kitchen Consultant Dwgs for additional

information

TI-705 LM RESTAURANT 4/1/2016 Subway Tile Kitchen @ Front Line DaltileHannah Petro


Modern Dimensions: Semi Gloss wall tile, Size: 2 1/8" x 8 1/2", Color: Suede Grey 0182 | Epoxy Grout to

Match Mapai 47 Charcoal

To be installed at front line as noted on plans. Refer to Kitchen Consultant Dwgs for additional

informationTRANSITIONS

TR-100 LM 2/2/2016 Threshold @ Guestroom Entry Guestroom Terrazzo & Marble SupplyMike Brawley


Engineered Stone, Difiniti Quartz, Evoke, Crestola. 2cm. Polished Refer to ISK-006





TR-101 LM 2/2/2016 Schluter Strip Guestroom Carpet to Vinyl Floor Transition Schluter Systems

Janet Kennedy Bentz AOM Senior A&D Representative


Schluter - SCHIENE | Bright brass anodized aluminum (AMB) | Size to be verified with vinyl and carpet

selection

GC to provide cut sheet & finish submittal. Refer to ISK-012

TR-401 LM 4/1/2016 Schluter Strip Geometric Ceramic Tile @ Lobby Bar Front Schluter Systems

Janet Kennedy Bentz AOM Senior A&D Representative


Schluter - Jolly | Brushed Brass Anodized Aluminum (AMGB)

GC to provide cut sheet & finish submittal.

TR-701 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Transition Strip - Ceramic Tile to Quarry Tile Main Dining to Kitchen Schluter Earl Maicus (800)472-4588 Schluter RENO-U | Finish: (M) Solid Brass Installer to verify required height

and length on site.

TR-702 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Transition Strip - Ceramic Tile Mosaic to Porcelain Tile Main Dining to LM Lobby Schluter Earl Maicus (800)472-4588 Schluter DECO | Finish: (M) Solid Brass Installer to verify required height

and length on site.UPHOLSTERY

UP-501 LM Upholstered Walls Ballroom & Air Wall Partitions MaharamMandy McCoy


Pattern: Glint 901380; Color: 003 Aluminum | Teflon Finish | 54" Width

Acrylic Backing. Coordinate with MFR of Air Wall Partitions.

UP-502 LM Upholstered Walls Boardroom MaharamMandy McCoy


Pattern: Sharkskin 2 901650; Color: 040 Clarify | PFOA Free Stain Resistant Finish | 54" Width Acrylic Backing

UP-451 AC 4/1/2016 Upholstered Walls Bar and Library Perimeter Seating Napa Tile



Napa Tile Custom Pattern: Unpadded tiles comprised of 6"x12", 12"x12", 12"x24", 12"x18", 18"x24" |

Concertex Fabric Pattern: Incognitus Green Seville; Color: Marble (54" Width; 100% Polyurethane Face, 65% Polyester/35% Cotton Back; Exceeds 100,000 Double Rubs; Passes NFPA-260, UFAC, CAL-117

Class 1)

Refer to manufacturer information for installation options.

UP-451A AC 8/27/2015 Upholstered Cushion Bar and Library Perimeter Seating Moore & GilesMary Darnell Group


Pattern: Kipling; Color: Acorn | 45.50 SQ FT Average Hide Size

UP-452 AC 4/1/2016Not Used Upholstered Walls Bar and Library Perimeter Seating Napa Tile



Napa Tile Custom Pattern: Unpadded tiles comprised of 6"x12", 12"x12", 12"x24", 12"x18", 18"x24" |

Concertex Fabric Pattern: Incognitus Green Seville; Color: Marble (54" Width; 100% Polyurethane Face, 65% Polyester/35% Cotton Back; Exceeds 100,000 Double Rubs; Passes NFPA-260, UFAC, CAL-117

Class 1)

Refer to manufacturer information for installation options.

UP-701 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Upholstered Wall Panels Dining Niche Moore & GilesMary Darnell Group


Pattern: Echo; Color: Cognac | 55 SQ FT Average Hide Size | 1-1.2 mm Weight

Panels to be installed from floor to ceiling on curved wall as noted on

drawings.WOOD BASE o

WB-100 LM 1/29/2016 Ebonized Wood LM Guest Room Corridors GC to Source GC to Source Ebonized Wood Finish To match SDDG control sample. Refer to DWGs for location.

WB-401 LM American White Oak Wood L1 Library Millwork Wall Base GC to Source GC to SourceWhite Oiled American White Oak | Provide Protective

Polyurethane Finish Coating | Refer to DWGs for Dimensions.


WB-501 LM Ebonized Wood L2 Pre-Function, Boardroom & Meeting Room Wall Base GC to Source GC to Source

Ebonized Wood | Provide Protective Polyurethane Finish Coating | 1/4" Thick Protrusion x 6" High; Refer

to DWGs for Linear Dimensions


WB-502 LM 7/24/2015 Painted Wood L2 Ballroom Base GC to Source GC to Source Painted To Match: Benjamin Moore 1472 Silver Chain To match SDDG control sample. Refer to DWGs for location.

WB-503 LM American White Oak Wood L2 Pre-Function Library Millwork Wall Base GC to Source GC to Source

White Oiled American White Oak | Provide Protective Polyurethane Finish Coating | Refer to DWGs for

Dimensions.






WB-451 AC American Walnut Wood AC Lobby Leather Wall Base GC to Source GC to Source

Danish Oiled American Black Walnut | Provide Protective Polyurethane Finish Coating | 1/4" Thick

Protrusion x 6" High; Refer to DWGs for Linear Dimension.

WB-701 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Painted Wood Main Dining GC to Source GC to Source 6" H Base with Moulding Profile. Refer to drawings for details, Painted To Match: PT-708


WB-702 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Painted Wood Bar and Open Kitchen GC to Source GC to Source 6" H Base with Moulding Profile. Refer to drawings for details, Painted To Match: PT-702


WB-703 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Painted Wood Dining Niche GC to Source GC to Source 6" H Base with Moulding Profile. Refer to drawings for details. Painted to match PT-709


Dining Niche is curved as noted on drawings.

WB-704 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Painted Wood Private Dining Room GC to Source GC to Source 6" H Base with Moulding Profile. Refer to drawings for details, painted finish to match PT-702


Dining Niche is curved as noted on drawings.

WALLCOVERINGWC-100

(WC-602) LM 2/2/2016 Vinyl Wall Covering LM Guestroom MDC Wallcoverings Jennifer Kaipio Mulberry (Genon Contract) W2MU | Organza 07 Isntall per instructions.

WC-101 (WC-601) LM 2/2/2016 Graphic Vinyl Wall Covering LM Guestroom Headboard MDC Wallcoverings Jennifer Kaipio Custom Dream Scape Vinyl Type II Wallcovering

product in "Agate Stone" pattern.Custom pattern. Install per

instructions.WC-200

(WC-603) LM 6/9/2016 Vinyl Wall Covering LM Guestroom Bath (Water Closet) D.L. Couch Susanne Nelsen 312-371-4077 Majestic 2VMC | Ocean 17 Isntall per instructions.

WC-300 (WC-604) LM 6/9/2016 Graphic Main Wallcovering LM Corridor MDC Wallcoverings Jennifer Kaipio Chipper Y468 | First Snow 62CI Custom pattern. Install per

instructions.WC-301

(WC-605) LM 6/9/2016 Accent Wall Covering LM Corridor (Door Drops) MDC Wallcoverings Jennifer Kaipio Chipper Y468 | First Snow 64CI Isntall per instructions.

WC-302 LM 4/1/2016 Wall Covering LM Elevator Lobbies MDC Wallcoverings Jennifer Kaipio Mulberry (Genon Contract) W2MU | Organza 07 Isntall per manufacturer instructions.

WC-401 LM/AC 4/1/2016 Vinyl Wallcovering Level 1 FOH Corridor D.L. Couch Susanne Nelsen 312-371-4077 Source One Exclusive | Palisade #2VPA | Almond 07 Isntall per manufacturer

instructions.

WC-402 LM/AC 4/1/2016 Vinyl Wallcovering Level 1 Public Restroom Upper Walls Wolf Gordon

Liz Saitta [email protected]

(312) 343-1670

Atlas GOH 10149661 | Color: Albicant (SKU: ATA 2070) Description: 100% Vinyl | 54" Width

Backing: Osnaburg; Hanging Information: Reversible, Random Match; Weight: 20 oz

per linear yad; Fire Rating: NFPA 101 & IBC Class A

WC-501 LM 4/1/2016 Vinyl Wallcovering Pre-Function Wolf GordonLiz Saitta


Atlas GOH 10149660 | Color: Frost (SKU: ATA 2069) Description: 100% Vinyl | 54" Width

Backing: Osnaburg; Hanging Information: Reverse

Hang, Random Match; Weight: 20 oz per linear yad; Fire Rating:

Class A

WC-502 LM 4/1/2016 Vinyl Wallcovering Meeting Rooms Wolf GordonLiz Saitta


Atlas GOH 10149656 | Color: Storm (SKU: ATA 2065) Description: 100% Vinyl | 54" Width



WC-503 LM 4/1/2016 Vinyl Wallcovering Level 2 Public Restroom Upper Walls Wolf Gordon

Liz Saitta [email protected]

(312) 343-1670

Atlas GOH 10149661 | Color: Albicant (SKU: ATA 2070) Description: 100% Vinyl | 54" Width

WC-600 LM 4/1/2016 Vinyl Wallcovering Level 20 Common Foyer MDC Wallcoverings Jennifer Kaipio Mulberry (Genon Contract) W2MU | Organza 07 Isntall per manufacturer instructions.

WC-601 LM 4/1/2016 Wall Covering Level 20 LM Elevator Lobby MDC Wallcoverings Jennifer Kaipio Mulberry (Genon Contract) W2MU | Organza 07 Isntall per manufacturer instructions.





WC-602 LM 4/1/2016 Vinyl Wallcovering Level 20 Restrooms Wolf GordonLiz Saitta


Reef GOH 10149669 | Color: White (SKU: REF 2555) Description: 100% Vinyl | 54" Width



WC-801 AC 6/9/2016 Vinyl Wallcovering AC Guestroom Wolf GordonLiz Saitta


Lisburn LSB 2193 | Color: Cashmere (GOH 10810371) | Description: 100% Vinyl | 54" Width

Backing: Osnaburg; Hanging Information: Reverse

Hang, Random Match; Weight: 20 oz per linear yard; Fire Rating:

ASTM E84

WC-802 AC 6/9/2016 Vinyl Wallcovering AC Guestroom Bath (Water Closet) Wolf GordonLiz Saitta


Atlas ATA 2064 | Color: Slate (GOH 10810381) | Description: 100% Vinyl | 54" Width

Backing: Osnaburg; Hanging Information: Straight

Hang, Random Match; Weight: 20 oz per linear yard; Fire Rating:

ASTM E84

WC-803 AC 6/9/2016 Vinyl Wallcovering AC Corridor KorosealCeline Ehlers


Aurora 67164 | Color: 64 | Description: 100% Vinyl | Repeat: 38.625" V, 26" H | 54" Width

Backing: Osnaburg; Hanging Information: Straight

Match, Non-Reverse; Weight: 20 oz per linear yard; Fire Rating:

ASTM E84WOOD

WD-100 LM 6/9/2016 American Walnut LM Guestroom Entry, Connecting Doors, and Bathroom Door. GC to Source GC to Source

American Walnut to match Bespke Walnut Flooring. D&L's submittal approved by SDDG 3/2/2016 - 14017-

09-013 | GC to verify dimensions.

Refer to DWGs for location and hardware schedule.

WD-101 LM 6/9/2016 American Walnut LM Guestroom Bathroom Sliding Door Trim & Rail GC to Source GC to Source

American Walnut to match Bespke Walnut Flooring. D&L's submittal approved by SDDG 3/2/2016 - 14017-

09-013 | GC to verify dimensions.

Refer to DWGs for location and hardware schedule.

WD-102 LM 2/2/2016 Grey Weathered wood LM Guestrooms GC to Source GC to Source Grey Weathered wood for closet Shelving @ closet. To match SDDG control sample.

WD-103 LM 2/2/2016 Wood @ Guestroom Entry and Connector Doors LM Guestrooms GC to Source GC to Source American Walnut stain at guestroom entry and

connector doorsStain to match WD-100 and WD-

101

WD-200 LM 2/2/2016 American Walnut LM Guestroom Bath Vanity Millwork GC to Source GC to Source American Walnut | GC to verify dimensions.

To match SDDG control sample: #HP09223 Cathedral Walnut to

match Bespoke Walnut Flooring. Refer to DWGs for location and hardware schedule. Send range

of 20-50 for sheen.

WD-401 LM American Black Walnut Wood Level 1 Millwork & Furniture & Doors GC to Source GC to Source Danish Oiled American Black Walnut | Refer to DWGs

for Dimensions.To match SDDG control sample.


WD-402 LMCustom American Black Walnut &

American White Oak "Door Panel" Wood

Lobby Lounge - Bar GC to Source GC to SourceCustom design with American Black Walnut (WD-401) at Pattern Design and American White Oak (WD-403)

at Wood Field. Refer to DWGs for dimensions.

SDDG to provide image for design direction. Refer to DWGs

for location.

WD-403 LM American White Oak Wood Library - Shelving & Door GC to Source GC to Source White Oiled American White Oak | Refer to DWGs for Dimensions.


WD-404 LM American White Oak Veneer Library - Back Wall GC to Source GC to Source White Oiled American White Oak | Refer to DWGs for Dimensions (To Match WD-403)






WD-405 LM/AC 4/1/2016 Teak Wood L1 Public Restroom - CountertopGC to source locally. Match

control sample. SDDG to approve.

TBD Teak Wood with Waterproof Finish, Size: 6"x72" planks

Sealed w/Monocoat clear for a waterproof finish. Teak color to

coordinate with typ. Walnut wood finish.

WD-501 LM American Black Walnut Wood Boardroom & Meeting Room Millwork GC to Source GC to Source Danish Oiled American Black Walnut | Refer to

DWGs for Dimensions.To match SDDG control sample.


WD-502 LM/AC 4/1/2016 Teak Wood L2 Public Restroom - CountertopGC to source locally. Match

control sample, SDDG to approve.


Sealed w Monocoat clear for a waterproof finish. Teak color to


WD-503 LM American Black Walnut L2 Ballroom, Pre-Function, Meeting Room, Secondary, and Louvered

Restroom DoorsGC to Source GC to Source Danish Oiled American Black Walnut | Refer to DWGs



WD-504 LM NOT USED

WD-505 LM American White Oak Wood (Same as WD-403)

L2 Pre-Function Library - Shelving & Door GC to Source GC to Source White Oiled American White Oak | Refer to DWGs for

Dimensions.To match SDDG control sample.


WD-506 LM American White Oak Veneer (Same as WD-404)

L2 Pre-Function Library - Back Wall GC to Source GC to Source White Oiled American White Oak | Refer to DWGs for

Dimensions (To Match WD-505)To match SDDG control sample.


WD-451 AC French Oak Wood Lobby, Bar, Restaurant Seating Wall Millwork, Doors GC to Source GC to Source French Oak | Oil Wax Natural Finish * Color to

coordinate with Wall Tile (TI-451)To match SDDG control sample.


WD-452 AC American Black Walnut Bar, Lobby, Library Millwork,

Ceiling Beams, Registration Desk, & FOH Doors

GC to Source GC to Source Danish Oiled American Black Walnut | Refer to DWGs for Dimensions.


WD-453 AC Wood Panels on Wall AC Elevator Cab Interior Walls FORMS+SURFACESTodd Gore


LEVELe Elevator Interiors Wall panel system; Walnut Wood Panels, weight approx 5lbs per SF.


Sample

WD-454 LM 3/24/2016 Wood Panels on Wall LM Elevator Cab Interior Walls GC to Source GC to Source Maple wood Stained to Match: ASI Decorative Surfaces | SKU DSKEX254


Sample

WD-455 AC 4/1/2016 Ebonized Wood AC Registration Desk GC to Source GC to Source Cerused Ebonized Wood | Refer to DWGs for Dimensions.


WD-601 LM 4/1/2016 Teak Wood L20 Public Restroom - CountertopGC to source locally. Match

control sample, SDDG to approve.


Sealed w Monocoat clear for a waterproof finish. Teak color to


WD-602 LM American Black Walnut Wood L20 Interior Doors & Fitness Millwork GC to Source GC to Source Danish Oiled American Black Walnut | Refer to DWGs



WD-701 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Stained Oak Wood Service Station Millwork, Bar countertop GC to Source GC to Source

Stained Wood to match Carlisle Quartersawn White Oak in Bradfor Umber, Finish Amber | Provide

Protective Polyurethane Finish Coating at bar top | Refer to DWGs for locations and dimensions






WD-702 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Paint Grade Wood Slats Typical Wall Treatment GC to Source GC to SourcePainted finish to match PT-708, Wood Slats at equal

4" height with 1/8" reveals. Refer to Drawings for Details.


WD-703 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Painted Wood and Moulding Bar, Open Kitchen Millwork, Private Dining Millwork GC to Source GC to Source Refer to drawings for details, painted finish to match

PT-702To match SDDG control sample.


Wall Protection

WP-100 LM 6/9/2016 Bumper Corner Bead LM Guestroom C/S Group [email protected] (630) 393-1919 Acrovyn Pebbletex | 265 Fog | 1/2" W

WP-300 LM 6/9/2016 Metal Corner Guard LM Guestroom Corridor C/S Group [email protected] (630) 393-1919 Acrovyn Pebbletex | 265 Fog | 1/2" W Send SDDG sample and cutsheet

to approve.

WP-701 LM RESTAURANT 2/18/2016 Stainless Steel Corner Guard Kitchen GC to Source GC to Source 1-2" full wall height corner guards to be installed at all exterior corners in Kitchen.

Refer to Kitchen Consultant Drawings for scope not covered in

ID dwgs.



LeMeridien/ AC Hotel Denver - 14017 DECORATIVE DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE Issued: 06.24.15Rev 1: 01.29.2016Rev 2: 03.10.2016Rev 3: 04.01.2016Rev 4: 06.09.2016

Series Designations100: LM Guestrooms200: LM Guest Bathrooms 300: LM Guest Tower Corridors / Elevator Lobbies OS: AC Guestrooms / bathrooms / corridors / elevator lobbies400: 1st Floor - Lobby Level500: 2nd Floor600: 20th Floor - Amenity LevelFor AC: Use AC standard designations: HW-XX


LM Guestrooms

HD-100 LM 6/9/2016 DECORATIVE PULLS LM GUESTROOM MILLWORK CLOSET (DQ-01 MR) MOCKETT

Doug Mockett & Company, Inc. [email protected]

(800) 523-1269

DP3F - 12" Tab Drawer Pull | Polished Brass | 12" Long, 1-1/2" Projection, 3-5/16" on center (4 holes), 1/2" wood screws are

included.Provide cut sheet.

HD-101 LM 2/2/2016 ENTRY PULLS LM GUESTROOM DOOR HKS to advise. HKS to advise. HKS to advise.

HD-102 LM 2/2/2016 HINDGES LM GUEST BATH SHOWER GLASS DOOR AGALITE N/A Grazig Standard Hinge OR Similar | Brushed Nickel | 135

Degree Hinge

HD-103 LM 3/10/2016 DOOR STOP LM GUESTROOM Signature Hardware 1-866-855-2284 Solid Brass Angled Door Stop: Chrome Finish, SKU:918755, Projects 3-1/4".

LM Guest Bathrooms

HD-200 LM 3/10/2016 DECORATIVE PULLS LM GUESTROOM TOILET COMPARTMENT DOOR TRIMCO Customer Service: 323-262-4191 Trimco 1111C BTB: with custom back to back orientation.

Stainless Steel Finish

HD-201 LM 2/2/2016 DOOR PEEP HOLE LM ENTRY DOORS SECURE A VIEW [email protected] (224) 565-9000

SecureAview Peephole Cover Self-Closing | Finish: Polished Brass GC to provide cut sheet.

HD-202 LM 6/9/2016 HINGES LM GUEST BATH SHOWER GLASS DOOR AGALITE N/A Grazig Standard Hinge OR Similar | Chrome | 135 Degree Hinge Provide cut sheet. GC to

coordinate with shower glass.

Level 1

HD-400 DECORATIVE PULLS LUGGAGE ROOM DOOR/ LIBRARY WALL

ROCKY MOUNTAIN HARDWARE Scott Corbin (847) 608-9100

FLUTE PRIVACY SET, lockable, 3"x8" plate,FINISH: SILICON BRONZE BRUSHED (LM lobby side), WHITE BRONZE

BRUSHED (AC Lobby Side)

HD-401 DECORATIVE PULLS LOBBY LEVEL RESTROOM ENTRY DOORS

ROCKY MOUNTAIN HARDWARE Scott Corbin (847) 608-9100 FLUTE GRIP G10023 - 24", FINISH: WHITE BRONZE

BRUSHED

HD-402 DECORATIVE PULLS LOBBY LEVEL RESTROOM COMPARTMENT DOORS (front face)

ROCKY MOUNTAIN HARDWARE Scott Corbin (847) 608-9100 FLUTE GRIP G10012 - 12", FINISH: WHITE BRONZE

BRUSHED

HD-403 DECORATIVE PULLS AC WINE BAR/ MEDIA WALL RICHELIEU Heidi Guthrie (847) 373-6727 Contemporary Metal Pull - 7125 - BP7125192195, Brushed Nickel Finish, 7 9/16"

HD-403 DECORATIVE PULLS AC BACK BAR/ BUFFET/ LIBRARY MILLWORK RICHELIEU Heidi Guthrie (847) 373-6727 Contemporary Metal Pull - 7125 - BP7125192195, Brushed

Nickel Finish, 7 9/16"

HD-404 DECORATIVE HANDRAIL LM ELEVATOR CAB FORMS+SURFACES Todd Gore [email protected] (800) 451-0410

LEVELe Elevator Interiors, Round Series Handrail, Flat End, Finish: Satin Bronze

HD-405 DECORATIVE HANDRAIL AC ELEVATOR CAB FORMS+SURFACES Todd Gore [email protected] (800) 451-0410

LEVELe Elevator Interiors, Round Series Handrail, Flat End, Finish: Satin Stainless Steel

HD-406 BAR FOOTRAIL LM BAR HAFELETy Lefever

[email protected] (800) 423-3531 x5304

Straight Railing Tube Bar Railing System (Custom: System: 51; Cat. No.: 812.10.802), Stainless Steel Quality 1,4301 in PVD

Coated Brass Coloured Finish, Tube 2" Dia. X Custom Length:12'-6" L (Refer to DWGs for Dimensions)

Hafele to provide all railing components (end caps, post

fittings, foot rail brackets)

HD-407 PURSE HOOK LM BAR AMEROCKhttp://amerock.com/support/dealer-

locator/Arrondi Robe Hook AME-BH26542BBZ | Satin Bronze | 1-15/16"

W x 2-1/4" H x 2" Projection



LeMeridien/ AC Hotel Denver - 14017 DECORATIVE DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE Issued: 06.24.15Rev 1: 01.29.2016Rev 2: 03.10.2016Rev 3: 04.01.2016Rev 4: 06.09.2016

Level 2

HD-500 CUSTOM DOOR HANDLE BALLROOM AND PREFUNCTION ENTRY DOORS TBD TBD BRUSHED ANTIQUE BRASS FINISH

HD-501 DOOR HANDLE MEETING ROOM DOORS (BOTH SIDES)

ROCKY MOUNTAIN HARDWARE Scott Corbin (847) 608-9100 FLUTE PASSAGE SET, 3"X10", SILICON BRONZE LIGHT

HD-502 DECORATIVE PULLS RESTROOM ENTRY DOORS ROCKY MOUNTAIN HARDWARE Scott Corbin (847) 608-9100 FLUTE GRIP G10023 - 24", FINISH: SILICON BRONZE LIGHT

HD-503 DOOR HANDLE TOILET COMPARTMENT DOORS, FAMILY RESTROOM

ROCKY MOUNTAIN HARDWARE Scott Corbin (847) 608-9100 FLUTE PRIVACY SET, 3"x3", FINISH: WHITE BRONZE

BRUSHED (SATIN NICKEL LOOK)Level 20

HD-600 DECORATIVE DOOR PULL FITNESS CENTER ENTRY ROCKY MOUNTAIN HARDWARE Scott Corbin (847) 608-9100 FLUTE GRIP G10023 - 24", FINISH: WHITE BRONZE

BRUSHED (SATIN NICKEL LOOK)

HD-601 DECORATIVE PULL ROOFTOP BAR ENCLOSURE RICHELIEU Heidi Guthrie (847) 373-6727 Square Recessed, Flush Handle for Sliding Doors - 89IN1630035170 - customized brass finish

LM Restaurant

HD-700 4/1/2016 DECORATIVE SHELF BRACKET WALL SHELVES NEAR BAR RESTORATION HARDWARE Todd Hilt (312) 659-0686 ARC BRACKET, ITEM # 40400116 RUST | 10" H, 10" D

HD-701 4/1/2016 DECORATIVE PULL SERVICE STATIONS/ WINE CASE RESTORATION HARDWARE Todd Hilt (312) 659-0686 RUST RING PULL | 2¼"W x ½"D x 2"H | Item#24070192

HD-702 4/1/2016 DECORATIVE PULL SERVICE STATIONS/ WINE CASE RESTORATION HARDWARE Todd Hilt (312) 659-0686 RUST BAIL PULL | 4"W (center-to-center screw holes) | Item#24070193

HD-703 4/1/2016 DOOR PULL PRIVATE DINING ROOM ROCKY MOUNTAIN HARDWARE Scott Corbin (847) 608-9100

Verdura Grip (G10526) | Length: 30", Center to center: 28", Projection: 3 1/4"| Finish: Silicon Bronze Dark. 1 pull on each

side of the door.



LeMeridien/ AC Hotel Denver - 14017 PLUMBING SCHEDULE 06.24.15Rev 1: 06.09.2016

Series Designations100: LM Guestrooms200: LM Guest Bathrooms 300: LM Guest Tower Corridors / Elevator Lobbies 400: 1st Floor - Lobby Level500: 2nd Floor600: 20th Floor - Amenity LevelFor AC: Use AC standard designations: PL-XX

TAG REVISION DESCRIPTION LOCATION MANUFACTURER CONTACT MODEL / STYLE / FINISH NOTES

PF-200 6/9/2016 Toilet LM Guest Bath Duravit Steve Harris #630.694.8945 #216001 Two Piece Toilet Within toilet compartment,

Ref. plan/elevations

PF-201 6/9/2016 Lavatory Faucet LM Guest Bath Delta Steve Harris #630.694.8945

Ara Bath Collection 3567-MPU-DST Two Handle Widespread Deck Mount. | Dimensions:

Widespread - 4" to 16" centers. 5 3/8" long, 4 3/16" high, rigid spout. Minimum 2 1/2" clearance

to back splash. Maximum mounting deck thickness is 2 1/4". Finish: Chrome

Faucet @ Vanity, Ref. plan/elevations

PF-202 6/9/2016 Lavatory LM Guest Bath Kohler Christine Topf #312.507.1470

Ladena Bathroom Sink K-2214-0. | Overall Dimensions: 20 7/8" W x 14 3/8" D; Bowl Area Dimensions: Length: 18-3/8", Width: 11-5/8",

Water depth: 4-5/8", Drain hole: 1-3/4"; Under-mount installation. Recommended Accessories: K-

8998 P-Trap. | Finish: 0-White

Ref. plan/elevations for locations

PF-203 6/9/2016 Tub-Shower System LM Guest Bath Delta Steve Harris #630.694.8945

Ara Bath Collection T14267 Shower Trim, Head, Arm & Escutcheon. | Finish: Chrome. Multichoice

Universal Rough Valve Body- R10000-UNWS (Universal with Stops)

Within shower compartment, Ref. plan/elevations

PF-204 Tub LM Guest Bath Kohler Christine Topf #312.507.1470

K-837 Bellwether: White cast iron w/ safeguard finish

Within tub compartment, Ref. plan/elevations

PF-205 ADA Toilet LM Guest Bath Kohler Christine Topf #312.507.1470

K3654 - Persuade Dual Flush Toilet, Finish: 0 -White


PF-207 6/9/2016 ADA Tub LM Guest Bath Kohler Christine Topf #312.507.1470

Bellwether K-838-0 - Bath with integral Apron; Right drain 60" x 30-1/4" x 14-1/2"; White cast

iron w/ safeguard finish


PF-210 6/9/2016 ADA Tub-Shower System LM Guest Bath Delta Steve Harris 630.694.8945

Ara Bath Collection T14267+51400+50 Duro-Tub-Hand ADA Shower System. Finish: Chrome.


PF-211 6/9/2016 ADA Sink Bowl LM Guest Bath Kohler Christine Topf #312.507.1470

Verticyl Under-mount Bathroom Sink K-2882-0 | Overall Dimensions: 19-13/16" W x 15-5/8" D; Bowl Area Dimensions: Length: 17-1/4", Width:

13", Water Depth: 3-1/8", Drain Hole: 1-3/4". Under-mount installation. Recommended

Accessoreis: K-8998 P-Trap. | Finish: White




LeMeridien/ AC Hotel Denver - 14017 PLUMBING SCHEDULE 06.24.15Rev 1: 06.09.2016

PF- 400 Toilet Level 1, 2, 20 Public Restroom Toto Richard Lussier #312.661.0876

CT708EVG_Wall mounted flushometer toilet, with Toto SC534 Seat, Color 01 Cotton; With Toto TET2LN wall mounted automatic flushometer.

PF- 401 Urinal Level 1, 2 Public Restroom Toto Richard Lussier #312.661.0876 UE930#1 Lloyd Urinal and electronic flush valve

PF-402 Lavatory Level 1, 2, 20 Public Restroom Kohler Christine Topf #312.507.1470

K-2314-0 Purist Wading Pool Above-counter/wall-mount bathroom sink ADA, Finish: white

PF-403 6/9/2016 Lavatory Faucet Level 1, 2, 20 Public Restroom Kohler Christine Topf #312.507.1470

Purist Faucet Trim K-T11837-CP Touchless wall-mounted faucet trim; 8 1/4" spout; 0.5 gal/min. flow rate; Insight adaptive infrared technology;

Finish: CP/Polished Chrome; Required Accessories: K-11830-NA Wall-mount valve



LeMeridien Denver - 14017 PLUMBING ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE 06.24.15Rev 1: 06.09.2016

Series Designations100: LM Guestrooms200: LM Guest Bathrooms 300: LM Guest Tower Corridors / Elevator Lobbies 400: 1st Floor - Lobby Level500: 2nd Floor600: 20th Floor - Amenity LevelFor AC: Use AC standard designations: TA-XX

TAG REVISION DESCRIPTION LOCATION MANUFACTURER CONTACT MODEL / STYLE / FINISH NOTES

BA-200 6/9/2016 Towel Bar LM Guest Bath ADA Delta Jillian Sampson #630.330.3005

77518 - 18" Towel Bar (3 1/2" projection from wall); Finish: Chrome

To be mounted @ vanity, Ref. plan/elevations

BA-201 6/9/2016 Shower Towel Bar Shelf LM Guest Bath Delta Jillian Sampson #630.330.3005

43624-ST Towel Shelf | Dimensions: 24"W x 8-1/2"H x 9-7/8 Projection from wall | Finish: Bright Stainless -

Chrome Appearance

Within shower compartment, Ref. plan/elevations

BA-202 6/9/2016 Robe Hook LM Guest Bath Delta Jillian Sampson #630.330.3005

77535 Robe Hook | Dimensions: 1-1/2"W x 2-1/8" OH x 3-1/2" Projection | Finish: Chrome

(1) Robe hook mounted @ wall outside of bathroom

compartment, (2) robe hooks mounted @ wall next to closet at

65"AFF. Ref. plan/elevations

BA-203 6/9/2016 Toilet paper holder LM Guest Bath Delta Jillian Sampson #630.330.3005

77550 Tissue Holder | Dimensions: 6-1/4" OW x 6-1/4"OH x 3-1/2" Projection | Finish: Chrome

Within toilet compartment, Ref plan/elevations

BA-204 6/9/2016 Soap Dish LM Guest Bath WingIts, LLC

David Burcon #734.330.4662 #734.878.9176

[email protected]

Shower corner soap basket, Contour Series #WCONCBPS8 | Dimensions: 8"W x 6"D x 2-1/4" H |

Finish: Polished Stainless Steel (Solid 18/8)

Mounting hardware supplied by manufacturer. Within shower

compartment, Ref. plan/elevations

BA-205 6/9/2016 Shower Door Pull LM Guest Bath C.R. Laurence

Ceci Gonzales #800. 421.6144

x6183 ceci_gonzales@crlau

rence.com

RM8X8CH | CRL 8" Polished Chrome RM Series Flat Outside Surface/Round Tubing Inside Back-to-Back

Pull Handle

To be mounted @glass shower door Ref. plan/elevations

BA-206 ADA Shower Seat LM Guest Bath ADA Bobrick Jose Aluquin #630.853.6786

B-5181 Reversible Folding Shower Seat

BA-207 ADA Tub Shower Grab Bar LM Guest Bath ADA Bobrick Jose Aluquin #630.853.6786

B-68616.99 Two-Wall Shower/Tub Compartment Grab Bar Peened

BA-208 12" Grab Bar LM Guest Bath ADA Bobrick Jose Aluquin #630.853.6786

B-6806.99 x 12 Straight Grab Bar Peened


Chicago, Illinois 60611t: 312-274-0606 f: 312-274-0707 Page 1

LeMeridien Denver - 14017 PLUMBING ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE 06.24.15Rev 1: 06.09.2016







BA-212 ADA Shower Curtain Rod/ Hooks LM Guest Bath ADA Bobrick Jose Aluquin #630.853.6786

B-6047 x 60 Classic SeriesExtra-Heavy-Duty Shower Curtain Rod

BA-213 Shower Curtain LM Guest Bath ADA FF&E to be spec'd by SDDG

BA-214 ADA Shower Head LM Guest Bath ADA Symmons Jillian Sampson #630.330.3005 T-600B-36-V: Chrome Finish ADA rooms only

BA-400 Paper Towel Dispenser/ Trash Recptacle Public Restrooms L1, L2, L20 Bobrick Jose Aluquin

#630.853.6786Recessed Paper Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle B-36903 TrimLineSeries; Finish Satin Stainless Steel

BA-401 Soap Dispenser Public Restrooms L1, L2, L20 Bobrick Jose Aluquin #630.853.6786

B-2013 - Automatic, Wall mounted, foam soap dispenser,

BA-402 Toilet Paper Dispenser Public Restrooms L1, L2, L20 Bobrick Jose Aluquin #630.853.6786

B-386 Partition-Mounted Multi-Roll Toilet Tissue Dispenser

(Serves 2 Compartments)

BA-403 Toilet Seat Cover Public Restrooms L1, L2, L20 Bobrick Jose Aluquin #630.853.6786

B-3013 TrimLineSeriesRecessed Seat-Cover Dispenser

BA-404 Sanitary Napkin Disposal Public Restrooms L1, L2, L20 Bobrick Jose Aluquin #630.853.6786

B-35303 TrimLineSeriesRecessed Sanitary Napkins Disposal

BA-405 42" Grab Bar Public Restrooms L1, L2, L20 Bobrick Jose Aluquin #630.853.6786


Mounted at side partition in ADA stall


B-6806.99 x 12 Straight Grab Bar Peened Vertical Grab Bar in ADA stall


B-5806.99 x 36 Straight Grab Bar Peened Mounted at back wall in ADA stall

BA-408 Robe Hook Public Restrooms L1, L2, L20 TBD TBD TBD


Chicago, Illinois 60611t: 312-274-0606 f: 312-274-0707 Page 2

LeMeridien/ AC Hotel Denver - 14017 DECORATIVE LIGHTING SCHEDULE Issued: 06.24.15Rev 1: 01.29.2016Rev 2: 02.18.2016Rev 3: 04.01.2016Rev 4:04.18.2016Rev 5:04.22.2016Rev 6:06.09.2016

Series Designations100: LM Lobby/ Public 200: AC Lobby/ Public300: Level 2 400: Level 20500: LM Guestroom/ Corridor600: AC Guestroom/ Corridor700: LM Restaurant - Level 1

Hard wired (not plug in)

TAG REVISION DESCRIPTION LOCATION MANUFACTURER CONTACT MODEL / STYLE / FINISH NOTES QUANTITY

LM LOBBY/ PUBLIC

LF-100 4/22/2016 Custom Decorative Pendant LM Registration To Bid TBD

Custom pendant with brass metal body/detailng with decorative, hand-blown glass bulb per image

| Overall Size: 5' H x 2' W x 10" D (Exact Size TBD). Bulb type and wattage to be recommended

by manufacturer.

CONTRACTOR FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED QUANTITY: 2

LF-101 4/22/2016Universo Square Suspension, Surface Mounted Decorative

ChandelierLM Hub/ Collective Seating Edge Lighting

Tim O'Keefe (Edge Lighting)

[email protected] (773) 770-

1171, Jackie Bowen (Lightology)


Universo Square Suspension Chandelier / Reminiscent of a celestial shape comprised of interwoven shafts of glass and metal / Custom: Glass and Satin Brass / Large Size: 78.7"L x

39.25"H x 41"W x 41"D. Bulb type and wattage to be recommended by manufacturer.


LF-102 4/22/2016Universo Rectangular

Suspension, Surface Mounted Decorative Chandelier

LM Hub/ Collective Seating Edge Lighting

Tim O'Keefe (Edge Lighting)

[email protected] (773) 770-

1171, Jackie Bowen (Lightology)


Universo Rectangular Suspension Chandelier / Reminiscent of a celestial shape comprised of interwoven shafts of glass and metal / Custom: Glass and Satin Brass / Overall Size: 78.7"L x

15"H x 34"W x 15"D. Bulb type and wattage to be recommended by manufacturer.


LF-103 4/22/2016 Custom Wall Sconce LM Hub/ Collective Seating To Bid TBD

Custom spun brass and fabricated steel wall sconce with fabric shade / Overall Size: 5'-5"H x 4-

3/4" W x 24" Projection (Exact Size TBD). Bulb type and wattage to be recommended by

manufacturer.


Image For Inspiration Only





LF-104 4/22/2016 Custom Decorative Pendant LM Bar To Bid TBD

Custom pendant with brass metal body/detailng with decorative, hand-blown glass bulb per image

/ Overall Size: 84"' H x 108" W x 10" D (Exact Size TBD). Bulb type and wattage to be

recommended by manufacturer.


AC LOBBY/ PUBLIC

LF-200 4/22/2016Wireflow 0299 by Arik Levy, Surface Mounted Decorative

PendantAC Lobby Lounge Vibia

Tammy Motycka Ingred Meyer &

Associates [email protected] (773) 506-9000

x 12

Wireflow Pendant 0299-04 / Black Matte Lacquer / Custom Overall Size: 48"W x 48"D x 108"H

(Exact Size and drop height to be coordinated). Bulb type and wattage to be recommended by

manufacturer.


LF-201 4/22/2016

SLIM 0916 Design by Jordi Vilardell,

Surface Mounted Decorative Pendant

AC Registration Vibia



x 12

Slim Pendant 0916-04 / White Lacquer Fiber 0916-03 / Overall Size: 15-1/2" Dia. X 96"H of svelte pendant strands (Exact size and interval drop heights to be coordinated). Bulb type and wattage to be recommended by manufacturer.


LF-202 4/22/2016CFL Ceiling Mounted, 2008, Surface Mounted Decorative

Pendant

AC Lobby perimeter in booth seating Michael Anastassiades sales@michaelanast

assiades.com

CFL Ceiling Mounted, 2008 / Black patinated stainless steel / Overall Size: 3.15"W x 82"OH

w/rod (32.325"H pendant portion) (Exact interval drop heights to be coordinated). Bulb type and wattage to be recommended by manufacturer.


LF-203 4/22/2016Wireflow 0345 by Arik Levy, Surface Mounted Decorative

PendantAC Breakfast Vibia



x 12

Wireflow 0345 Hanging Lamps / Matt Black Lacquer 04 | 7-3/4" Dia. X 5"H (Light Source) x

Incremental drops of: 48"H, 60"H, 72"H. Pendants to fill approx.144" x 114" area. (Spacing/size and

interval drop heights to be coordinated and determined). Bulb type and wattage to be


CONTRACTOR FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED

QUANTITY: 1 Lot (Approx. 32

Individual Hanging Lamps

TBD)

LF-204 4/22/2016Suspended shelving design

with integrated base downlighting

AC Bar To Bid TBD

Custom shelving design with integrated base downlighting / Satin Nickel (TBD) / Overall Size: 108"W x 20"D (Exact Size TBD). Bulb type and wattage to be recommended by manufacturer.







LF-205 TBD 4/22/2016 Custom Pendant (SDDG to develop design) AC Bar TBD TBD

Custom rectangular pendant / Material TBD / Overall Size: 108"W x 20"D (Exact Size TBD). Bulb type and wattage to be recommended by

manufacturer.


LEVEL 2

LF-300 4/22/2016 Duke Chandelier, Surface Mounted Level 2 - Prefunction Delightful

Joana Reis (Delightful)

[email protected] (917) 267-8927,

Jackie Bowen (Lightology)


Duke Chandelier / Shade Color: Glossy Black, Body Finish: Gold / Overall Size: 11.8"H x 65.9"W

x 53"OH (TBD). Bulb type and wattage to be recommended by manufacturer.


LF-301 4/18/2016 Recessed Light Level 2 - Ballroom Swarovski(866) 344-3875

www.lightingnewyork.com

Swarovski Octa 1 Light Recessed Light in White, SKU# A9950NR700125 | Finish: White; Crystal: Clear Swarovski Elements | 3.54"L x 3.54"W x

6.61"H. Primary Bulbs: 1 x 35 watts GU5.3 (Bulbs not included).


LF-302 4/22/2016 Custom Fluted Wall Sconce Level 2 - Ballroom To Bid TBD

Custom wall sconce with fluted shape / Metal TBD (to coordinate with Ballroom Chandelier);

Finish: Champagne (to coordinate with Ballroom Chandelier) / Overall Size: 5-3/4"W x 5'-0"H

(Exact Size TBD). Bulb type and wattage to be recommended by manufacturer.


LF-303 4/22/2016 Custom Sculptural Chandelier Level 2 - Stairs To Bid TBD

Custom Sculptural Chandelier. Form and shape to be derived from floating cottonwood in wind / Material TBD with designer / Overall Size to be free floating and span 6'-8' Dia. x 24'H (Exact

Size TBD). Bulb type and wattage to be recommended by manufacturer.


LF-304 4/18/2016 Custom Decorative Chandelier Level 2 - Ballroom Sonneman A Way of Light

SWI Lighting Ryan Hubert


Custom Suspenders Chandelier System: SLS0011 | LED Modular System with Single Luminaires | Finish: Custom Powder Coated

Champagne Finish | Overall Size 10' x 20' (Height TBD). Wattage to be recommended by

manufacturer. Custom specifications to be coordinated with Sonneman.






LEVEL 20

LF-400 6/9/2016 Alto Sconce Level 20 Unisex Restroom @ Vanity Cedar and Moss

(503) 635-0820 www.cedarandmoss.

com

Alto Sconce / Material: Brass; Finish: Brass, Opal Glass Shade | Overall Size: 8.5"D x 10.5"L x 6"W.

Bulb type and wattage to be recommended by manufacturer.


LF-401 6/9/2016 Cedar & Moss Northwest Modern Pendant Level 20 Bar Rejuvenation

Nan Holloway (Rejuvenation) (971) 200-9058

[email protected]

www.rejuvenation.com

Cedar & Moss Pendant 10 IN #A0053 | Finish: Brushed Satin, B0023 - 10" White Globe

(Included). Damp UL Rated | Overall Size: 10"OW x 9" Shade Length x 22" Overall Length (Ceiling to the bottom of fixture). Bulb type and wattage to be recommended by manufacturer

rated for exterior use.

Center of globe to suspend at mid-point of cage frame. Refer

to DWGs for location. CONTRACTOR FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED

QUANTITY: 4

LF-402 6/9/2016 Lucia, Surface Mounted Fixture Level 20 Elevator Lobby Cedar and Moss


com

Lucia Surface Mounted Fixture | 18 individual fixtures to comprise design element (To be

confirmed) | Material: Solid Brass; Finish: Modern Black w/Brass | Overall Size: 4"D x 8"L x 8"W x 5-3/4" Canopy Width. Bulb type and wattage to be


Center of globe to suspend at mid-point of cage frame. Refer

to DWGs for location. CONTRACTOR FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED

QUANTITY: 1 Lot (Approx. 18

Individual Fixtures to be

verified)

LF-403 6/9/2016 Cedar & Moss Northwest Modern Pendant Level 20 Bar Rejuvenation

Nan Holloway (Rejuvenation) (971) 200-9058

[email protected]

www.rejuvenation.com

Cedar & Moss Pendant 14 IN #A0195 | Finish: Brushed Satin, B0023 - 14" White Globe

(Included). Damp UL Rated | Overall Size: 14"OW x 13" Shade Length x 25" Overall Length (Ceiling to the bottom of fixture). Bulb type and wattage to be recommended by manufacturer



LM GUESTROOM/ CORRIDOR

LF-500.A (LF-601) 6/9/2016 Nightstand Wall Sconce King Model Room | K02-LM Trinity Lighting

Chris O'Brien (901) 871-4942

[email protected]

Custom Glass Globe wall sconce with grey ombre glass | Material & Finish: rod, armature, &

eschutheon plate finished in black matte metal. All fittings finished in satin brass metal. Globe to

have ombre fade from clear (top) to grey glass (bottom). | 10" Dia. Globe, 59" OAH, 16-1/4"

(Overall Projection).

Design A or B to be selected pending model room review.

Refer Model Room DWGs for location. CONTRACTOR


QUANTITY: 272




LF-500.B (LF-601) 6/9/2016 Nightstand Wall Sconce Double Queen Model Room |

DQ01-LM Trinity Lighting

Chris O'Brien (901) 871-4942

[email protected]

Custom Glass Globe wall sconce with grey ombre glass | Material & Finish: rod, armature, &

eschutheon plate finished in black matte metal. All fittings finished in satin brass metal. Globe to

have ombre fade from grey (top) to clear glass (bottom). | 10" Dia. Globe, 59" OAH, 16-1/4"

(Overall Projection).

Design A or B to be selected pending model room review.

Refer Model Room DWGs for location. CONTRACTOR


LF-501 6/9/2016 Lucia, Surface Mounted Fixture

LM/AC Guest Floor Elevator Lobbys Cedar and Moss


com

Lucia Surface Mounted Fixture | 18 individual fixtures to comprise design element (To be

confirmed) | Material: Solid Brass; Finish: Modern Black w/Brass | Overall Size: 4"D x 8"L x 8"W x 5-3/4" Canopy Width. Bulb type and wattage to be



QUANTITY: 16 Lots (Approx. 18

Individual Fixtures to be

verified)

LF-502 6/9/2016 Wall Sconce LM Model Corridor/Guest Corridor Trinity Lighting

Chris O'Brien (901) 871-4942

[email protected]

Custom Wall Sconce | Material & Finish: stem and arm finished in black brass, matte finish. Decorative connector finished in satin brass. |

20"OH x 4" Projection. Shade Dimensions: 2-3/4" Dia. X 8-1/2"H.

CONTRACTOR FURNISHED. CONTRACTOR INSTALLED.

QUANTITY: 10 Per Floor

LM RESTAURANT

LF-701 4/22/2016 Eldridge Rectangular Pendant LM Restaurant Bar Ballard Design (800) 536-7551

Eldridge Rectangular Pendant | Antique Bronze and Glass | Custom Dimensions: 5' W x 18" H x

12" D. Bulb type and wattage to be recommended by manufacturer.


LF-702 4/22/2016 Sara Chandelier LM Restaurant - Main Dining Canopy DesignsMonica Diaz

[email protected]

Sara Chandelier (Old World 3 tier metal chandelier with decorative colored glass shades and bulbs) | Custom Frame Finish: Champagne

Bronze Metal: Hurricane Color: Pendeing per sample review | Custom Overall Dimension: 30"

Dia. x 30" H. 1. Bulb type and wattage to be recommended by manufacturer.





LF-703 4/22/2016 Custom Decorative Wicker Pendant

LM Restaurant - Main Dining (Niche) To Bid TBD

Custom Woven Wicker Bell Shade | Custom Finish: Natural | Custom Dimensions: 18"Dia. x

24" H (TBD). Bulb type and wattage to be recommended by manufacturer. Bulb type and wattage to be recommended by manufacturer.


LF-704 4/22/2016 Bookclub Swing-Arm Sconce 5226

LM Restaurant - Semi-Private Dining @ Art Wall Currey & Company

Christina Lucas christina@lucidcolle

ctions.com (312) 972-3110

Bookclub Swing-Arm Sconce 5226 | Material: Wrought Iron; Finish: Hiroshi Gray/Silver Leaf |

12"W x 8"H x 28"D. Bulb type and wattage to be recommended by manufacturer.

CONTRACTOR FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED.

Mounting Height to be coordinated with Artwork

locations

QUANTITY: 5

LF-705 4/22/2016 Woodbury Picture Light LM Restaurant - Service Stations Hudson Valley

Ryan Hubert [email protected] (847) 835-1212

Woodbury Picture Light | Custom Finish: Champagne Brushed Bronze | Overall

Dimensions: 6"H x 23"W x 11.75" Extension x 9.5"Min. H x 11.75" Max. H (Canopy/Backplate:

18"W x 3.5"H). Bulb type and wattage to be recommended by manufacturer.

CONTRACTOR FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED,

Mounting Height to be coordinated with Millwork

design

QUANTITY: 6

LF-706 4/22/2016 Atelier Task Table Clamp Lamp

LM Restaurant - Service Station @ Bar Restoration Hardware

Todd Hilt [email protected]

(312) 659-0686

Atelier Task Table Clamp Lamp | Custom Finish: Champagne Brushed Bronze Finish | Extension Arm and Rotating Shade Dimensions: 8½" Dia. x 45¼"H (Max. Extension), Shade: 6½"Dia. Bulb

type and wattage to be recommended by manufacturer.

CONTRACTOR FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED,

Mounting Height to be coordinated with Millwork

design

QUANTITY: 1




LF-707 4/22/2016 4 - Light Urban Renewal Chandelier Private Dining Room Feiss

Abigail Sorensen (PG Enlighten)


4 - Light Urban Renewal Chandelier, Style #: F2823/3+1STB | Custom Material & Finish: Steel with Antique Brass Finish and Antique Tiled Glass Shade. Exposed Decorative Bulbs (3 per fixture) | Overall Dimensions: 6-7/8" H x 32-1/8" H; Details: 9-1/2" Flush: 1-1/4"D x 5-1/8"Dia. Canopy. Bulb

type and wattage to be recommended by manufacturer.

CONTRACTOR FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED, QUANTITY: 2

LF-708 4/22/2016 Eastleigh Wall Sconce 5154 Restaurant Façade Currey & Company

Christina Lucas christina@lucidcolle

ctions.com (312) 972-3110

Eastleigh Wall Sconce 5154 | Material: Wrought Iron/Ceramic; Finish: Hiroshi | Overall

Dimensions: 9"W x 12"H x 7"D. Bulb type and wattage to be recommended by manufacturer


CONTRACTOR FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED, Mounting and Coordination of

Sconce locations to be coordinated with Operable

Exterior Glazing system and Architectural Drawings.

QUANTITY: 3

LF-709 4/22/2016 Hemisphere Table Lamp Host Stand Restoration HardwareTodd Hilt


Hemisphere Table Lamp | Material: Brass and Steel; Finish: Custom Champagne Bronze Metal |

Overall Dimension: 8-3/4" W x 8"D x 19"H; extends to 24"H; Base: 5-3/4"sq. (Cord: 8'L).

Bulb type and wattage to be recommended by manufacturer.

Mounting and Coordination of Table Lamp location to be

coordinated with Millwork of Host Stand. Plug In Table

Lamp to be powered through a floor outlet.

QUANTITY: 1

LF-710 4/22/2016 Woodbury Picture Light Restaurant Exterior (Menu Board Light) Hudson Valley

Ryan Hubert [email protected] (847) 835-1212

Woodbury Picture Light | Custom Finish: Blackened Steel Finish ( (Must be made for

exterior use) | Overall Dimensions: 6"H x 16"W x 11.75" Extension x 9.5"Min. H x 11.75" Max. H

(Canopy/Backplate: 12"W x 3.5"H). Bulb type and wattage to be recommended by manufacturer


Mounting and Coordination of Menu Light location to be

coordinated with Menu Board and Size. Light Fixture to be

Exterior Rated.

QUANTITY: 1



LE MERIDIEN | AC HOTELDENVER, COLORADO

D+HC 120011INTEGRATED DOOR OPENING ASSEMBLIESASI-6.0 2016-06-013

081700 - 1

SECTION 081700

INTEGRATED DOOR OPENING ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Integrated Door Assemblies including frames, doors, operating hardware and installation of complete opening.

1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):1. ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities

B. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA):1. ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Exit Devices.2. ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Door Controls - Closers.3. ANSI/BHMA A156.6 Architectural Door Trim.4. ANSI/BHMA A156.15 Release Devices: Closer Holders, Electromagnetic and

Electromechanical.5. ANSI/BHMA A156.16 Auxiliary Hardware.6. ANSI/BHMA A156.18 Materials & Finishes.7. ANSI/BHMA A156.22 Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems.8. ANSI/BHMA A156.25 Electrified Locking Devices.9. ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Continuous Hinges.10. ANSI/BHMA A156.28 Recommended Practices for Mechanical Keying Systems.11. ANSI/BHMA A156.32 Integrated Door Opening Assemblies.12. ANSI/BHMA A156.115W Hardware Preparation in Wood Doors with Wood or Steel Frames.

C. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI):1. DHI A115.IG Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware2. DHI Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule

D. International Building Code (IBC)

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):1. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Fire Windows2. NFPA 252 Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

F. Steel Door Institute (SDI):1. ANSI/SDI A250.8 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames

G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):1. UL 10C Positive Pressure Fire Tests Of Door Assemblies2. UL 305 Panic Hardware

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit for Information: Manufacturer's technical product data / catalog cut sheets, clearly marked for each component item, including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Submit for Approval: Door Schedule organized into headings, grouping doors to receive same hardware items, indicating quantity and complete designations of every item required for each door opening. The schedule shall include:1. A list of abbreviations used in schedule.



081700 - 2

2. Listing of each door in numerical order according to door numbers in the Architect's door schedule, and denoting: location, configuration (single, pair, etc.), door type (elevation, glazing, etc.), door and frame size(s), door and frame material(s), handing, frame profile, anchor details, and fire rating.

3. Type, style, model number, function, size, hand, and finish of each door hardware item.4. Manufacturer of each item.5. Fastenings and other pertinent information.

C. Submit for Approval: Shop Drawings showing each door and frame condition; frame type, profile, electrical rough-in requirements, and installation details. Details to include dimensioned plan view for each type of opening, and elevation for each type of pocketed opening including all dimensions required to complete necessary pockets.

D. Submit for Approval: Electrified Hardware Details, identified by door number, and detailed specifically for each type and function of electrified door opening. Format shall be single-sided, 8-1/2 by 11 inch page size:1. Sequence of Operation. Include description of component functions that occur when

authorized person wants to enter; authorized person wants to exit; unauthorized person wants to enter; and unauthorized person wants to exit; indicate alternate after-hours operation, if applicable. Describe operational interface with fire alarm, access control, and security systems as applicable.

2. Elevation (single-line riser diagram), showing interface between electrified door hardware and fire alarm, power, access control, and security systems as applicable. Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems; differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

3. Point-to-point wiring diagram for field-installed wiring.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide complete operating and maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guides.

F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer shall have no less than 5 years experience in the provision of Integrated Door Assemblies for projects similar in size, complexity and type to this Project.

B. Supplier / Installer of door assemblies shall be authorized representative of manufacturer, and have minimum of 2 years successful experience in supply and installation of Integrated Door Assemblies specified on projects of similar size, complexity and type to this Project.

C. Door manufacturer shall have no less than five years experience in the provision of wood doors for projects similar in size, complexity and type to this Project.

D. Comply with the following:1. AWI Quality Standard: Section 1300 "Architectural Flush Doors" for grade of door, core

construction, and other requirements.

E. Tolerances for warp, telegraphing, squareness, and prefitting dimensions as per the latest editions of AWI Section 1300.

F. Environmental Certification: All doors shall be marked with Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) authorized certification and certificate number.



081700 - 3

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide integrated door assemblies complying with all applicable requirements of the most current versions of NFPA 80, UL 10C, IBC; listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.1. At rated doors indicated with panic exit devices, provide devices labeled as “Fire Exit

Device.”2. Provide 450 degree temperature rise label at openings at exit passageways, exit

enclosures, and horizontal exits.

B. Comply with all applicable accessibility guidelines as set forth in Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) -- Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG).

C. Latching and locking doors that are hand-activated and that are in a path of travel shall be operable with a single effort by lever-type hardware, panic bars, push-pull activating bars, or other hardware designed to provide passage without requiring the ability to grasp the opening hardware; from egress side shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.1. All hand-activated hardware shall be mounted between 30 inches and 44 inches above

finished floor, except Panic Exit Devices and Fire Exit Devices shall be mounted between 36 inches and 44 inches above finished floor.

D. Door closing devices shall comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:1. Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door at latch.2. Fire Rated Doors: Minimum force allowable by the appropriate administrative authority, not

to exceed 15 lbf applied perpendicular to door at latch.

E. Where door closers are provided, adjust sweep speed so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.

F. Electrified door hardware shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Each door shall be properly marked to be readily identifiable with the approved door schedule.

B. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions, fasteners, and special tools shall be included.

C. Deliver pre-finished doors with protective wrappings. Remove wrappings prior to acceptance of project.

D. Store off ground, under cover, protected from weather and construction activities.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies, fire alarm system and detection devices, access control system, and security system as applicable.

B. Pre-Installation Conference: Arrange a conference at the job site to coordinate door, frame, hardware and electronic security hardware installation; to be attended by the Architect, Owner, Contractor and representative personnel of firms involved in the provision and installation of said items.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Provide two year warranty against defects in material and workmanship:



081700 - 4

1.9 MAINTENANCE

A. Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of Integrated Door Assemblies, including all hardware items.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements herein, provide products by one of the following manufacturers for each type of hardware:1. Continuous Pinned Hinges: Hager Companies (HAG), Markar Products (MAR), Select

(SEL), Stanley (STA), or approved equal.2. Full-Height Continuous Hinges: Openings/Total-Door (OPG) H13 Series, or approved equal.3. Integrated Locksets and Latchsets: Openings/Total-Door (OPG) M30 Series, or approved

equal.4. Surface Door Closers: Dorma (DOR) 8900 Series, LCN(LCN) 4000 Series, Norton (NOR)

7500 Series, Sargent (SAR) 351 Series, or approved equal.5. Overhead Holders And Stops: Glynn-Johnson (GLY), Rixson (RIX), Rockwood (ROC), or

approved equal.6. Electromagnetic Holder / Releases: Architectural Builders Hardware (ABH), Rixson (RIX),

Security Door Controls (SDC), or approved equal.7. Architectural Door Trim: Ives (IVE), Rockwood (ROC), Trimco (TRI), or approved equal.8. Auxiliary Hardware: Ives (IVE), Rockwood (ROC), Trimco (TRI), or approved equal.9. Door Seals and Gaskets: National Guard Products (NGP), Pemko (PEM), Reese

Enterprises(RSE), or approved equal.

2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

A. Requirements for grade, materials, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated herein.

B. Requirements for design, function, finish, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware at specific openings are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3.

C. Door Construction: Doors to meet or exceed Premium or Custom Grade, as selected by Architect. Some components and/or construction requirements in this section may exceed this Grade standard.

D. All fire rated doors shall include, as part of the door construction, all components required per "Category A" positive pressure testing guidelines as published by ITS/Warnock Hersey. No intumescent material shall be required on frame. Applied smoke gasketing to meet "S" rating shall be provided under Section 08710 “Door Hardware” and coordinated with this Section

E. Non-Rated and 20 Minutes Fire-Rated Doors:1. Doors to comply with AWI 1300; Type PC-5 ME, SLC-5ME, or SCLC-5ME.2. For Particle Core (PC-5): Mat Formed Wood Particle Board, Grade 1-L-2; 28-32 pcf density

meeting requirements of ANSI A208.1. Through-bolting shall not be permitted for attaching door hardware. Provide mill option hardwood blocking for all surface applied hardware.

3. For Staved Lumber Core (SLC-5): A combination of blocks or strips, not more than 2-1/2” wide, of one species of wood at 6% - 9% moisture content. Joints to be tight and staggered in adjacent rows.

4. For Structural Composite Lumber Core (SCLC-5): Structural composite lumber (SCL) in accordance with ASTM D 5456; uniform density of 38 pcf, with minimum target MOR at 6,000 psi/MOE 1.3 x 10^6 psi.



081700 - 5

5. Bonding: Fabricate doors using bonded core construction; stiles and rails bonded to core, using adhesive and pressure during the curing process. Abrasively plane the assembled and cured core unit to a uniform thickness prior to applying crossbanding and veneers.

6. Crossbands: Dried to 6-9 percent moisture content, minimum 1/16 inch thick spliced hardwood with no voids or defects, extending full width of doors with grain at right angles to face veneer.

7. Stiles: Hardwood, solid or laminated, minimum 1-1/2 inch thick before fitting; 1-1/8 inch minimum after trimming; without fingerjoints; on laminated stiles, minimum 1/2 inch thick outer band specie matching face veneer; meet minimum test ratings as follows: a. 525 pounds per the WDMA TM-5 "Split Resistance." b. 930 pounds per the WDMA TM-8 "Hinge Loading Resistance." c. 1,000 pounds per the WDMA TM-10 "Screw Holding Capacity" test reports.

8. Rails: Wood Rails, 1-1/8 inch minimum after trimming; mill option hardwood or softwood of a density equal to or exceeding Douglas Fir.

9. Pairs: Provide 20 minute labeled pairs with fire retardant stiles, tested to meet fire rating without metal edges or metal edge and astragal.

F. Fire Rated, 45, 60, and 90 Minute Doors:1. AWI 1300; Type FD-5.2. Core: Door manufacturer's standard non combustible mineral core; incombustible,

asbestos-free mineral composition, engineered to meet labeling requirements.a. Where concealed rod hardware is indicated, provide Georgia-Pacific Firestop

components, or approved equal, with matching full length wood edge meeting stiles; no visible finger joints; 1/2 inch maximum width of wood after trim; no metal edges or metal edge and astragal allowed.

3. Stiles and Rails: Manufacturer's standard sizes to meet fire rating, bonded to the core, complying with the following:

a. Stile Edge Screw Withdrawals: Minimum 740 pounds when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1037.

b. Stile Edge Split Resistance: Minimum 750 pounds when tested in accordance with ASTM D 143 (modified); vertical edge solid, laminated, or veneered of same species as visible surface. Reinforce hinge edge on all fire doors to accommodate full mortise hinges and to provide additional screw holding power when hinge is installed, unless specified otherwise.

4. Blocking: Through-bolting shall not be permitted for attaching door hardware. Provide composite blocking designed to maintain fire resistance of door while providing adequate screw holding and screw withdrawal resistance.

G. Acoustically Rated Construction:1. AWI 1300; Type SR.2. Core: Manufacturer's standard sound dampened core construction to achieve a sound

transmission class rating of not less than 41 for a door thickness of 1-3/4 inches (44 mm), certified by the manufacturer to be based on tests conducted at an independent testing agency in accordance with ASTM E 90 and E 413, as operating units.

3. Vertical Stiles: Minimum 1-3/8 inch minimum after trimming, 2 ply construction without fingerjoints, consisting of 5/8 inch thick mill option hardwood.

4. Bottom Rail: 2-1/8 inch minimum mill option hardwood.5. Top Rail: 1-3/8 inch minimum mill option hardwood.6. Face Veneer: Same as non acoustic doors.7. Doors provided with perimeter and bottom seals as required for STC rating.

2.3 FLUSH DOOR FACING

A. Interior Natural Wood Veneer Doors:1. Veneer Cut and Specie: As selected by Architect 2. Veneer Thickness and Grade: 1/50 inch before sanding minimum with quality

characteristics of AWI Section 1300. "A" Grade veneer face with edge glued joints.



081700 - 6

3. Veneer Leaf Match: Book or Slip match grain, as selected by Architect. 4. Veneer Face Match: Running, Balance or Center Balance match, as selected by Architect.5. Transoms: Continuous matched. 6. Pairs and Sets: Provide pair matching and set matching for pairs of doors and for doors

hung in adjacent sets.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Vision Lights:1. Cut openings and install flush (lip profile as detailed) wood beads, of species matching face

veneers. Mount permanently on one side, tacked loose on other side, factory prefinished to match faces.

2. Furnish light openings for fire doors with flush wood veneered lite bead, veneer to match door faces.

2.5 PREFIT AND PREMACHINE

A. Comply with tolerance requirements of AWI Quality Standards, Section 1300.

B. Prefit doors at the factory with the following clearances:1. 3/32 inch on top and hinge edges.2. 3/32 inch on lock edge of single doors.3. 1/16 inch per leaf on pair meeting edges.4. Bevel both edges of door 1/8 inch in 2 inches.5. Bottom: 1/4 inch above threshold, or 3/8 inch above finished floor where no threshold is

indicated.6. Slightly ease vertical edges.

C. Factory pre-machine doors for hardware in accordance with approved hardware schedule.

2.6 FACTORY FINISHING

A. All doors (including beading and mouldings) to be finished at the factory, with UV cured system with performance properties equivalent to TR-6 Catalyzed Polyurethane per AWI Section 1500. Individually protect factory pre-finished doors with poly-wrap at the factory. Final color, build, and sheen to be approved by architect based on actual review samples.

2.7 FASTENERS

A. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Combination machine screws and expansion shields shall be used for attaching items to concrete or masonry.

C. Fasteners exposed to the weather in the finished work shall be of brass, bronze, or stainless steel.

2.8 DOOR FRAMES

A. Conform to ANSI/SDI A250.8 for steel door frames. Cold rolled steel, 16 gauge. Fire labeled frames shall comply with NFPA 80.

B. Frames shall have mitered corners continuously welded and ground smooth on frame faces; shall be provided with a temporary spreader bar securely fastened to the bottom of each frame, and anchors for each jamb spaced at 24 inch maximum intervals.



081700 - 7

2.9 DOOR ASSEMBLIES

A. Door Assemblies shall meet ANSI/BHMA A156.32 requirements.

B. Door Assemblies shall include door body, with factory installed latching/ locking devices; and factory installed hinging system components.

C. Conform to ANSI/SDI A250.8, Grade I for steel doors. Doors shall be 1-3/4 inch thickness, with composite core, honeycomb core, or steel stiffened type core. Doors shall be internally reinforced for door closer and electromagnetic holder mountings. There shall be no seams or spot welds visible on the door faces.

2.10 CONTINUOUS HINGES

A. Continuous hinges shall meet ANSI/BHMA A156.26 requirements.

B. Type: Type: Pin and barrel construction; 1/4 inch diameter stainless steel pin; split nylon or stainless steel bearings. Fabricated from 14 gauge cold-rolled steel or 304 stainless steel as indicated.

C. Provide factory anodized or factory finished to match door and frame finish.

D. Type: Full-height steel body with integral hanger rod.

2.11 INTEGRATED LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS

A. Integrated locks and latches shall meet BHMA A156.13 Grade 1 requirements.

B. Operating trim shall be type as indicated in Hardware Sets.

C. Locksets or latchsets used on fire rated doors shall be listed and labeled for such use by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.12 SURFACE DOOR CLOSERS

A. Door closing devices shall meet ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 requirements.

B. Surface closers shall be fully adjustable with sweep speed, latch speed and back check position valves.

C. Provide closers size adjusted in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Table A1, unless modified by manufacturer's recommendations, and otherwise as required to insure closing and latching of doors.

D. Arm selection shall follow the requirements of the manufacturer's recommendations with brackets, drop plates and miscellaneous accessories provide as necessary.

E. Provide full rectangular cover completely enclosing the closer body.

F. Provide closers with arms designed to permit openings of doors as far as job conditions will permit; closers with arms restricting opening of door will not be acceptable.

2.13 ELECTROMAGNETIC HOLDER / RELEASES

A. Electromagnetic holders shall meet ANSI/BHMA A156.15 requirements.

B. Size and configuration shall provide degree of swing and hold open position as indicated on the drawings.



081700 - 8

2.14 ARCHITECTURAL DOOR TRIM

A. Architectural door trim shall meet ANSI/BHMA A156.6 requirements.

B. Door Protection Plates: Kick, mop, and armor plates shall be 0.050 inch thick brass, bronze, or stainless steel depending on finish indicated. Plates shall have beveled edges, and shall be provided with countersunk mounting holes and No. 6 oval head screw fasteners. Width of kick and armor plates shall be 2 inches less than door width for single doors and 1 inch less for pairs of doors. Width of mop plates shall be 1 inch less than door width. Unless otherwise indicated, height shall be 10 inches for kick and mop plates, and 34 inches for armor plates.

C. Door Edge Protection: Fabricated from 304 stainless steel as indicated; factory prepared for all mortise hardware; countersunk screw mounting.

2.15 AUXILIARY HARDWARE

A. Auxiliary hardware shall meet ANSI/BHMA A156.16 requirements.

B. Door Stops: Stops shall be of heavy duty construction, provided in finish indicated. Wall bumpers shall have no visible fasteners. Floor stops shall be of height required by floor conditions. Unless otherwise indicated, provide stops at all doors as follows:1. Provide floor stop Rockwood 441CU, wall bumper Rockwood 400 series, or approved

equal. Where it is not possible to properly place a floor or wall type stop, provide heavy duty concealed overhead type stop, or when door closer is indicated, provide heavy-duty dead stop function in closer.

C. Silencers: Gray rubber, non-marring configured for metal or wood frames as scheduled. Provide 3 per single door and 2 per pair of doors. Silencers shall be tamper resistant once installed in door frame.

2.16 GASKETING

A. Shall be a compression type product for use with wood or steel doors; labeled for use on fire-rated doors where required.

2.17 FINISHES

A. Door Frames: Factory prime painted for field applied finish.

B. Door Faces: Factory prime painted for field applied finish, or factory applied high pressure laminate, or factory applied wood veneer, or factory applied catalyzed polyurethane paint. (colors / patterns as selected by Architect.)

C. Hardware: Unless otherwise indicated, finishes shall conform to those identified in ANSI/BHMA A156.18. Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by the following:

1. BHMA 613: Dark-oxidized satin bronze, oil rubbed, bronze base metal.2. BHMA 695: Dark bronze painted, any base material.3. BHMA 710: Dark-oxidized satin bronze anodized, aluminum base metal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine rough openings and other site conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.



081700 - 9

B. Examine rough-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Wood doors shall be factory prepared for hardware per ANSI/BHMA A156.115W.

B. Installation shall be in accordance with DHI A115.IG.

C. Install work in accordance with approved shop drawings and these specifications using only manufacturer's certified installers.

D. Set frames plumb and square and brace until adjacent wall or finish is constructed and securely anchor thereto. Furnish necessary clips, fastenings and anchorages and conceal unless otherwise noted.

E. Fire doors shall be installed conforming with NFPA 80, and all other applicable building codes and regulations.

F. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

G. Install hardware items using fasteners provided by manufacturer.

H. If field trimming is required: 1. Trim non-rated doors in width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. Trim height by cutting

bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch (19 mm). 2. Trim fire rated door height at bottom edge and in accordance with fire rating requirements.3. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.

I. Protective door wrapping is to remain in place until all work by other trades is complete and final inspection is finished.

3.3 DOOR CLOSING DEVICES

A. Door closing devices shall be installed in accordance with the templates and printed instructions supplied by the manufacturer of the devices.

B. Door closing devices with adjustable spring power shall be adjusted for proper door operation, and compliance will all applicable codes and regulations.

3.4 HARDWARE LOCATIONS

A. Unless otherwise indicated install hardware as follows:1. Lockset / Latchset/ Exit Device Operating Trim: 38 inches from finished floor to center of

lever/ trim.2. Exit Device: 38 inches from finished floor to center of push bar.3. Wall Bumper: Centered at point on wall where lever, or other operating trim, first makes

contact with wall.4. Floor Stop: Adjacent to wall; not to exceed 4 inches from face of wall; located 3 inches from

latch edge of door; in any case never more than 50 percent of door width from latch edge of door.



081700 - 10

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to adjust door closing devices, compensating for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment, and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

C. Follow-up Adjustment: Approximately 6 months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer shall perform the following:1. Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of door

assembly.2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel on recommended maintenance procedures.3. Replace door assembly items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design,

materials, or installation of door units.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant:1. Engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant, certified by the Door

and Hardware Institute, to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.2. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant shall inspect installation and prepare written

report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, whether doors and hardware are properly installed and adjusted, and prepare a specific list of any deficiencies, a copy of which shall be provided to Architect.

3. Contractor shall correct all deficiencies noted in above report.4. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant shall re-inspect installation hardware and

prepare a report certifying correction of deficiencies and compliance with requirements.

3.7 COMPLETION

A. When complete all door, frame, hardware, and other components shall be properly secured in place and all exposed surfaces shall be clean and free from scratches, paint, and other defects and damages.

3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS

A. The following is a general listing of Integrated Door Assembly hardware requirements. Provide hardware items required for function indicated, and to meet state and local codes, whether or not specifically indicated in the following sets.

B. Refer to Door Schedule for door opening information, hardware set assignment, and related requirements.

--- Balance of page intentionally left blank ---



081700 - 11

LM-P02 Door(s): 2-01

2 Ea. Continuous Hinge H-13 --- OPN2 Ea. Flush Latchset M34 x M35 G01 613 OPN2 Ea. Pocket Closer 8907 PKT-180 Series 695 DOR2 Ea. Electromagnetic Holder 2000 Series 695 ABH1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM

Note: Electromagnetic holder(s) require 120VAC/24VACDC/12VDC power / connection to Fire Alarm.

END OF SECTION



081700 - 12

--- This page intentionally left blank ---


HKS 16811.000 ALUMINUM FRAMED FOLDING PANEL SYSTEM 2016-06-13

084420 - 1

SECTION 084420

ALUMINUM FRAMED FOLDING PANEL SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Aluminum framed folding panel systems and supplementary items necessary for installation.

1.2 DELEGATED ENGINEERING REQUIREMENTS

A. Contract Documents Design Intent: Drawings and Specifications indicate design intent for products and systems and do not necessarily indicate or specify total Work required. Contract Documents shall not be construed as an engineered design; furnish and install all Work required for a complete installation.

B. Delegated Engineering Responsibility: Contractor shall employ a qualified professional engineer to provide engineering for products and systems including attachment to building structure required to meet design intent of Contract Documents.

1. Preparation of structural analysis data including engineering calculations, shop drawings and other submittals signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer.

C. Delegated Engineering Professional Qualifications: Professional engineer legally authorized to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and experienced in providing engineering services of kind indicated for products and systems similar to this Project and has a record of successful in-service performance.

D. Coordination of Work:

1. Product Variations: In the event of minor differences between products and systems of acceptable or available manufacturers, Contractor shall notify Architect of such differences and resolve conflicts in a timely manner. Failure of Contractor to provide notification shall be construed as acceptance of conditions indicated, and changes caused by minor differences between products and Contract Documents shall be included in the Work at no additional cost to Owner.

2. Allowable Adjustments: Minor dimension and profile adjustments may be made in interest of fabrication or erection methods or techniques or ability to satisfy design intent, provided design intent is maintained as determined by Architect. Proposed deviations shall include a detailed analysis of impact to adjacent substrates or other building systems, including related design or construction cost impacts. If accepted by Architect, deviations causing changes in materials, constructability, substrates, or conditions shall be included in the Work at no additional cost to Owner.



084420 - 2

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product and system indicated.

1. Include manufacturer's specifications for materials, finishes, construction details, installation instructions, and recommendations for maintenance.

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components and attachments to other work. Distinguish between shop and field-assembled work.

1. Prepared by manufacturer, not installer. 2. Include typical unit elevations at 1/2 in (12 mm) scale and details at full scale. 3. Indicate where and how the system deviates from Contract Documents. 4. Shop drawings shall contain seal of a professional engineer currently registered in

licensing jurisdiction of the project and a written statement that the framing system conforms to project requirements, applicable codes, and specified conditions.

5. Provide for information only, material properties and other information needed for structural analysis including computations, prepared, signed, or, and sealed by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the jurisdiction where the project is located.

6. Design Modifications: If design modifications are proposed to meet performance requirements and field conditions, submit design calculations and Shop Drawings. Do not adversely affect the appearance, durability, or strength of units when modifying details or materials and maintain the general design concept.

7. Include Indicate dimensioning, direction of swing, configuration, swing panels, typical head jamb, side jambs and sill details, type of glazing material and handle height

8. System Operators for Operable Panel Systems: Show locations, mounting, and details for installing operator components and controls.

C. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide pairs of samples for each finish type and color on 12 in (300 mm) long sections of extrusions or formed shapes and on 6 in (150 mm) squares of sheet or plate. Include 2 or more units in each sample set showing the extreme limits of variations expected in color and texture of finish.

1. Glazing: Refer to Division 8 Section “Glazing”.

D. Fabrication Samples: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 12 in (300 mm) lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:

1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Welding Certifications: Qualification certificates required by “Quality Assurance” Article. Include names of firms and personnel certified.



084420 - 3

B. Energy Performance Certificates: For folding panel system, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each folding panel system.

C. Delegated Engineering Calculations: Informational submittal for products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation; test reports are not acceptable substitute for calculations.

D. Product Test Reports: Written reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by qualified testing agency indicating that each product complies with requirements.

E. Field Quality Control Reports: Written report of testing and inspection required by “Field Quality Control”.

F. Manufacturer’s Project Acceptance Document: Certification by the manufacturer that its products and systems are approved, acceptable, suitable for use in specific locations, for specific details, and for applications indicated, specified, or required, and that a warranty will be issued.

G. Qualification Data:

1. For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects.

H. Warranty: Sample of warranty.

1. Provide manufacturer’s written warranty covering materials and installation (labor) stating obligations, remedies, limitations and exclusions.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than 10 years of experience in the successful production and in-service performance of products and systems similar to scope of this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications:

1. Experience: Installer's personnel with not less than 5 years of experience in the successful performance of Work similar to scope of this Project.

2. Supervision: Installer shall maintain a competent supervisor at Project while the Work is in progress, and who has not less than 5 years of experience installing products and systems similar to scope of this Project.

3. Manufacturer Acceptance: Installer shall be certified, approved, licensed, or acceptable to manufacturer to install products.



084420 - 4

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS qualification requirements and the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel". 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum".

D. Energy Performance Standards: Comply with NFRC for minimum standards of energy performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if indicated.

1. Provide NFRC-certified folding panel system with an attached label.

E. Accessible Entrances for Aluminum Entrance Doors: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

F. Safety Glass: Refer to Division 8 Section “Glazing”.

G. Preconstruction Sealant Testing: Perform sealant manufacturer's standard tests for compatibility with and adhesion of each material that will come in contact with sealants and each condition.

1. Test a minimum five production-run samples each of metal, glazing, and other material. 2. Prepare samples using techniques and primers required for installed assemblies. 3. Perform tests under environmental conditions that duplicate those under which

assemblies will be installed. 4. For materials that fail tests, determine corrective measures necessary to prepare each

material to ensure compatibility with and adhesion of sealants including, but not limited to, specially formulated primers. After performing these corrective measures on the minimum number of samples required for each material, retest materials.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Pre-Installation Conference: Before Work begins, conduct conference at Project site.

1. Participants:

a. Architect. b. Contractor, including superintendent. c. Installer, including project manager and supervisor. d. If requested, Manufacturer's qualified technical representative. e. Installers of other construction interfaced with Work.

2. Minimum Agenda: Installer shall demonstrate understanding of the Work required by describing detailed procedures for preparing, installing, and cleaning the Work. Demonstration shall include, but not be limited to, following topics:

a. Tour representative areas of Work, inspect and discuss condition of substrate, and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

b. Review Contract Document requirements. c. Review approved submittals. d. Review inspection and testing requirements.



084420 - 5

e. Review environmental conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions.

f. Resolve deviations or differences between Contract Documents and the manufacturer's specifications.

3. Record discussions, including decisions and agreements, and prepare report.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Where products and systems are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of products and systems with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a successful installation without failure.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Furnish manufacturer’s written material and labor warranty signed by an authorized representative using manufacturer’s standard form agreeing to furnish materials and labor required to repair or replace work which exhibits material defects caused by manufacture or design and installation of product. “Defects” is defined to include but not limited to deterioration or failure to perform as required.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.

2. Warranty Period: Manufacturer shall warrant the products to be free from material and labor Defects for a period of 2 years from date of Substantial Completion

B. Installer’s Warranty: Furnish installer’s written workmanship warranty signed by an authorized representative using installer’s standard form agreeing to provide labor required to repair or replace work which exhibits workmanship defects. “Defects” is defined to include but not limited to deterioration or failure to perform as required.

1. Warranty Period: Installer shall warrant the installation to be free from workmanship Defects for a period of 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Factory Applied Finish Warranty for High-Performance Fluoropolymer Finishes: Furnish manufacturer’s written warranty signed by an authorized representative using manufacturer’s standard form agreeing to repair finish or replace work which exhibits finish defects. “Defects” is defined to include but not limited to deterioration or failure of finish to perform as required.

1. Coverage includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.



084420 - 6

2. Warranty Period: Manufacturer shall warrant the installation to be free from finish defects for a period of 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS

A. Basis of Design (Product Standard): Contract Documents are based on products and systems specified to establish a standard of quality. Other manufacturers offering products having equivalent characteristics may be considered, provided deviations are minor and comply with requirements of Contract Documents as judged by the Architect.

1. Basis of Design: NANA WALL SYSTEMS INC; SL70 Monumental Thermally Broken Aluminum Framed Folding Panel System, as indicated on Drawings.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of product from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.

2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. System Description: Sliding/folding aluminum and glass door system, including aluminum frame, threshold, panels, sliding/folding and locking hardware, weather stripping, glass and glazing; designed to provide an folding panel system, with sizes and configurations as shown on drawings.

B. General Performance: Engineer products and systems to withstand loads within limits of allowable working stresses of the materials involved under conditions indicated and without permanent deformation or failure of materials.

C. Design Loads: Engineer to withstand design loads including but not limited to gravity, wind, seismic, and erection design loads and thermal movements established by authorities having jurisdiction, applicable local building codes, and as indicated.

1. Structural Movement: Engineer to withstand movements of structure including, but not limited to: drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

a. Live Load Deflection: System shall accommodate plus or minus 1/4 in (6 mm) differential vertical deflection of floors.

D. Structural Test Performance: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.



084420 - 7

E. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6 lbf/sf (285 Pa).

1. Provide system with saddle sill as indicated and typical field installed weep holes and drainage in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions that do not evidence water penetration.

F. Thermal Movements: Engineer products and systems to accommodate thermal movements of supporting elements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures without buckling, damaging stresses, damaging loads on fasteners, failure of operating units to function properly, and other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (49 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (82 deg C), material surfaces.

G. Energy Performance: Certified and labeled energy performance ratings in accordance with NFRC.

1. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage of 0.30 cfm/sf as determined according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sf (300 Pa).

2. Condensation Resistance (CR): Fixed glazing and framing system shall have NFRC certified condensation resistance rating as determined according to NFRC 500.

a. AAMA Condensation Resistance (CRF): In addition to condensation resistance rating determined according to NFRC 500, provide folding panel system with thermally improved construction that has been tested in accordance with AAMA 1503 and certified by the manufacturer to provide a condensation resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 55.

H. Dimensional Tolerances: Engineer products and systems to accommodate dimensional tolerances of framing members and adjacent construction.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 / B 209M. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 / B 221M. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429 / B 429M. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308 / B 308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.

B. Steel Internal Reinforcement: Shapes and sizes to suit installation meeting delegated engineered performance requirements, as indicated on Shop Drawings.

1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36 / A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008 / A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011 / A 1011M.



084420 - 8

4. Primer: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

2.5 FRAMING AND PANEL SYSTEM

A. Frame and Panels: From manufacturer’s standard profiles, provide head track, side jambs, and panels with dimensions shown on drawings.

B. Locking Hardware and Handles: Provide manufacturer’s standard lever handles at interior and exterior. Unless indicated otherwise, provide Schlage compatible lock set with lockable latch, multi-point locking with dead bolt and rods at top and bottom on primary panel. Rods shall be concealed and not edge mounted. Depression of handles withdraws latch; lifting of handles engages rods and turn of key or thumb turn engages deadbolt and operates lock. On the secondary swing panel, if applicable, provide matching dummy lever handles on both sides and concealed flush bolts that operates rods at top and bottom for secondary swing panel.

C. Sliding/Folding Hardware: Provide manufacturer’s standard combination sliding and folding hardware with top, bottom tracks and threshold. Running carriages shall be sealed, self-lubrication, ball bearing multi-rollers.

1. Surface mounted hinges and running carriages are not allowed. Panels shall not be supported by bottom of guide channel in sill.

2. Carriage: Provide upper guide carriage and lower running carriage with four vertical stainless steel wheels and two horizontal polyamide wheels. Vertical wheels shall ride on stainless steel guide track covers full length of the sill track above water run-off level.

3. Hinges: Zinc die cast with finish closest match to finish of frame and panels. Provide stainless steel security hinge pins with set screws.

4. Adjustment: Provide folding/sliding hardware capable of specified amount of compensation and adjustments without removing panels from tracks.

D. Other Components:

1. Weather Stripping: Provide manufacturer’s standard double layer EPDM, Q-lon gasket or brush seals with a two layer fiber glass reinforced polyamide fin at inner and outer edge of door panels or on frame sealing between panels and between panel and frame.

2.6 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Provide glass of types and thicknesses indicated. Fabricate glass to sizes required for openings indicated with edge clearances and tolerances complying with manufacturer's recommendations. Comply with Division 08 Section "Glazing".

1. Comply with safety glazing requirements of ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR 1201.

B. Glazing Gaskets, Spacers, Setting Blocks, Sealant Backings, and Bond Breakers: Manufacturer's standard permanent, non-migrating types compatible with sealants and suitable for joint movement and assembly performance requirements. Comply with Division 08 Section "Glazing".



084420 - 9

C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer for joint type.

1. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, neutral-curing silicone formulation compatible with system components with which it comes in contact; and recommended by weatherseal-sealant and folding panel system manufacturers for this use.

a. Joint Movement Capability: Accommodates a 50 percent increase or decrease in joint width at time of application when measured according to ASTM C 719.

b. Color: Black, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard tetrafluoroethylene-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion.

2.7 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of glazed systems, as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants".

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12

requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30 mils (0.762 mm) thickness per coat.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Welds shall be of adequate strength and durability, with jointing tight, flush, smooth and clean. Weld behind finished surfaces so as to cause no distortion and/or discoloration on the finished side. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that is sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing. Provide minimum clearances and depth of

glazing pockets as recommended by glass manufacturer for thickness and type of glass indicated.

6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view. 7. Internal guttering systems or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation

occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within folding panel systems to exterior.

D. For Factory-Assembled and Glazed Frame Units:

1. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. 2. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. 3. Factory-install glazing to comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing".



084420 - 10

E. Hardware Installation: Factory-install hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes.

2.9 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. General Finish Quality Standard: NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Finish fabrications after assembly. 2. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend

into surrounding surface.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of accepted Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of accepted Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

1. Selections: As indicated in Division 01 “Design Selections”.

B. High-Performance Organic Finish (Two-Coat): Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

2.11 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES

A. General: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.

B. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.

C. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.



084420 - 11

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to receive products and systems and associated work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions.

1. Verify header live and dead load deflection is limited to the lesser of L/720 of the span and ¼” (6 mm).

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified:

1. Respective manufacturer’s written installation instructions. 2. Accepted submittals. 3. Contract Documents.

B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by isolating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer, applying sealant or tape, or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations, and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work.

1. Furnish inserts for setting in concrete forming, and similar work required to support folding panel system.

2. Field measure and verify governing dimensions, including floor elevations, floor-to-floor heights, minimum clearance between folding panel system and structural frames and other permissible dimensional tolerances in building frame.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF FOLDING PANEL SYSTEMS

A. General:

1. Do not install damaged components. 2. Fit joints between aluminum components to produce hairline joints free of burrs and

distortion. 3. Rigidly secure non-movement joints.



084420 - 12

4. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent impediments to movement of joints.

5. Do not cut, trim, weld or braze component parts during erection, in any manner which would damage finish, decrease strength or result in visual imperfection or failure in performance of construction.

6. Weld components in concealed locations to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding.

7. Seal joints within folding panel system according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

B. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within folding panel systems to exterior.

C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed and install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack. Secure to structure with non-staining and non-corrosive shims, anchors, fasteners, spacers and fillers.

E. Install folding panel system to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

F. Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Manufacturer's qualified technical representative shall periodically inspect Work to ensure installation is proceeding in accordance with manufacturer's designs, recommendations, instructions, and warranty requirements. Representative shall submit written reports of each visit indicating observations, findings, and conclusions of inspection.

1. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: Direct employee of technical services department of manufacturer with experience in providing recommendations, observations, evaluations, and problem diagnostics.

B. Testing Agency: The Owner may employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality control. Materials and installation failing to meet specified requirements shall be replaced at Contractor's expense. Retesting of materials and installations failing to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor’s expense.

1. Structural Requirements: Field inspections and testing.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 ADJUSTING FOLDING PANEL SYSTEM

A. Adjust folding panel system hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer.



084420 - 13

3.7 TOUCH-UP AND FINAL CLEANING

A. Touch-up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of any field welds and abraded areas of shop paint or stainless parts shall be completed to blend with the adjacent surfaces of the product. Such touch-up work shall be done in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions

END OF SECTION


D+HC 120011DOOR HARDWAREASI-6.0 2016-06-13

087100 - 1

SECTION 087100

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Items commercially known as finish or door hardware required for operation of doors, and accessories necessary to complete installation.

B. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under this Section: Coordinating, purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section.

1. Permanent cores to be installed by Owner.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature for each item of door hardware indicated, specified, or required.

1. Including material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes, and installation instructions.

2. Index product data sheets according to hardware schedule by use of numbers or letters, or combination.

B. Shop Drawings for Electrified Hardware:

1. Wiring Diagrams: Indicate power, signal, and control wiring detailed in following forms distinguishing between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring:

a. System schematic.b. Point-to-point wiring diagrams.c. Riser diagrams.d. Door elevations.

2. Interface: Details between electrified hardware and fire alarm, access control and security.

3. Sequence of Operation: Narrative operation description of doors controlled by electrified hardware.

C. Hardware Set Schedules: Prepared by suppliers AHC detailing fabrications and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate hardware sets with doors, frames, and related Work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of item.

1. Format: Use same numbering shown on Drawings and Schedules.

a. Content: Organize into hardware sets indicating designations of each item required for each door or opening. Include following information:

1) Type, style, function, size, and finish of each item.



087100 - 2

2) Manufacturer and product number of each item.3) Fastenings and other pertinent attachment information.4) Location of each set cross referenced to room name and number in which

door serves.5) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.6) Mounting locations for hardware.7) Door and frame sizes and materials.

b. Additional Specific Information: Include type of strike plates; length of spindle, hand, backset and bevel of locks; hand and degree opening for closers; length of kickplates; length of rods for flush bolts; type of door stop; and other functions of mechanisms.

2. Keying Schedule: Submit indicating Owner's instructions for keying of locks.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Certification for Electrified Hardware: Written data from product manufacturer certifying electrified hardware is approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire rated doors comply with listed fire rated door assemblies.

B. Product Test Reports: Written reports for extended cycle testing based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer or other qualified testing facility and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for locksets, exit devices and closers.

C. Manufacturers Project Acceptance Document: Certification that products are approved, acceptable, or suitable for use in specific locations, for specific details, and for applications indicated, specified, or required, and that warranty will be issued.

1.4 CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For inclusion in operation and maintenance manual required by Division 01, submit manufacturer’s instructions for operation and maintenance of installed Work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated use. Include precautions against cleaning materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and performance.

B. Operational and Maintenance Training: Training materials, including instructor qualifications, required by Close-Out Activities Article.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Extra Stock Materials: Furnish full-size units of door hardware described below that match products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Locksets: 2. Closers:3. Exit Devices: 4. Electrical Parts:

B. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.



087100 - 3


A. Supplier Qualifications:

1. Experience: Architectural door hardware supplier that has record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project.

2. Staff Hardware Expertise: Experienced professional currently certified by DHI as AHC, CDC, and EHC, and experienced in door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to this Project that will be responsible for following activities:

a. Preparation of submittals, including hardware set schedules.b. Available for consultation to Owner, Architect, and Contractor during course of

Work.c. Finalizing keying requirements with Owner.

3. Electro-Mechanical or Electronic Hardware: When supplied, technician, with minimum of 5 years experience in low voltage installation, shall be available for assistance to Owner, Architect, Contractor, and Installer.


1. Experience: Company with not less than 10 years experience in performing specified Work similar to scope of this Project; with a record of successful in-service performance; and sufficient capability, facilities and personnel, to produce required Work.

2. Supervision: Installer shall maintain a competent supervisor who is at Project during times specified Work is in progress, and, who is experienced in installing systems similar to type and scope required for Project.

3. Manufacturer Training: Technical representatives of manufacturer of locksets, exit devices and closers shall train Installer’s installation personnel (supervisor and installers), either at Project or at manufacturers facility, on following:

a. Proper installation of products.b. Proper sequence of installation of Work.c. Situations that require special attention or care during installation. d. Situations and conditions that should be avoided.e. Other topics relevant to installation.

C. Pre-Construction Extended Performance Testing: Manufacturer shall, through its own laboratory testing facilities witnessed and verified by Intertek, Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., or other testing laboratory agency acceptable to Architect, perform pre-construction testing to establish compliance of proposed Work with specified requirements.

1. General Requirements: Test hardware items identified in PART 2 for extended cycle performance.

2. Test Method: ANSI/BHMA Grade 1.3. Reports: Prepare certified reports tabulating test results and indicating if hardware items

meet or exceed requirements. 4. Equivalent Option to Testing: Testing not required if manufacturers has tested hardware

items within previous 5 years.

D. Keying Conference: Before beginning Work of this Section, conduct conference at Project to comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule.



087100 - 4

1. Required Attendees:

a. Owner.b. Architect.c. Contractor, including supervisor.d. Supplier’s architectural hardware consultant.e. Hardware installer, including supervisor.f. Security installer, including supervisor.g. Manufacturer’s technical representative.

2. Minimum Agenda:

a. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion.

b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram.c. Requirements for key control system.d. Address for delivery of keys.

3. Reports: Record discussions, including decisions and agreements reached, and furnish copy of record to each party attending.

E. Pre-Installation Conference: Before beginning Work of this Section, conduct conference at Project to comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections.

1. Required Attendees:

a. Architect.b. Contractor, including supervisor.c. Supplier’s architectural hardware consultant.d. Hardware installer, including supervisor.e. Security installer, including supervisor.f. Manufacturer’s technical representative.

2. Minimum Agenda: Installer shall demonstrate understanding of Work required by reviewing and discussing procedures for, but not limited to, following:

a. Tour representative areas of required Work, discuss and evaluate for compliance with Contract Documents, including substrate conditions, surface preparations, sequence of installation and other preparatory Work performed by other installers.

b. Review Contract Document requirements.c. Review approved submittals.d. Review installation procedures, including, but not limited to, following:

1) Installation requirements for each hardware item.2) Sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware3) Relationships between electrified hardware and [fire alarm] [access control]

[security] [building control system].

e. Review required inspection, testing, certifying, and material usage accounting procedures.

f. Review forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions.



087100 - 5

3. Reports: Record discussions, including decisions and agreements reached, and furnish copy of record to each party attending.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Special Warranty: Furnish labor and material warranty for following time periods from date of substantial completion agreeing to repair or replace defects, faulty Work and failures, signed by authorized representative using manufacturer’s standard form.

1. Mortise Locksets: 5 years on mechanical components with 2 years on electrical components.

2. Cylindrical Locksets: 5 years on mechanical components with 2 years on electrical components.

3. Exit Devices: 5 years on mechanical components with 2 years on electrical components.4. Overhead Manual Closers: 10 years.5. Floor Closers: 5 years.6. Electrified Hardware: 2 years7. Electromagnetic Hardware: 5 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: Contract Documents are based on products specified in PART 3 “Door Hardware Sets” Article below to establish a standard of quality. Other manufacturers with products having equivalent characteristics may be considered, provided deviations are minor and does not change intent of Contract Documents as judged by Architect.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents, provide product by one of manufacturers listed alphabetically below. If not listed, submit as substitution according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Sections.

C. Available Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those listed alphabetically below.

2.2 HARDWARE, GENERAL

A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish each type of hardware unit from single manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Hardware units shall not have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire rated labels; manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.

C. Base Metals: Hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard.



087100 - 6

D. Fasteners: Hardware units manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Concealed Fasteners: Hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is only means of securely attaching hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.

2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For following fire rated applications:

a. Mortise hinges to doors.b. Strike plates to frames.c. Closers to doors and frames.

3. Steel Through Bolts: For following fire rated applications unless door blocking is provided:

a. Surface hinges to doors.b. Closers to doors and frames.c. Surface mounted exit devices.

4. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors.5. Fasteners for Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.2.

E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Fire Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

2. Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 inches or less above sill.

F. Accessibility Requirements: Hardware units and installation shall comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), ANSI A 117.1, and state and local accessibility standards.

G. Electrical Requirements: Furnish electrical products that are listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.

1. Electrified Functions: Concealed PTFE-jacketed wires, secured at each leaf and continuous through hinge knuckle.

2. Concealed Plug Connectors: Termination of multi-wire bundles up to 8 conductors shall be by 8 position concealed plug connector or by 8 position and 4 position connector for 12 wire applications.

2.3 BUTT HINGES

A. Product Quality Standard: ANSI/BHMA A 156.1, Grade 1, 2 or 3.

B. Description:

1. Generic Type: Full-mortise, concealed bearings.



087100 - 7

2. Weight:

a. Doors with Closers: Heavy anti-friction bearing.b. Doors without Closers: Standard plain bearing.

3. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, hinge pins as follows:

a. Out-Swing Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins (NRP) or safety stud.b. Out-Swing Corridor Doors with Locks: Non-removable pins (NRP) or safety stud.c. Interior Doors: Non-rising pins.d. Top Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves, except where

hospital tip (HT) indicated.e. Bottom Tips: Hole in bottom for easy pin removal.

C. Templates: Except for hinges to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and wood frames, provide only template-produced units.

D. Screws: Phillips flat-head screws with heads to match surface of hinges.

1. Metal Doors and Metal Frames: Machine screws installed into drilled and tapped holes.2. Wood Doors and Wood Frames: Wood screws.3. Fire Rated Wood Doors: No. 12 by 1-1/4 in, threaded-to-head steel wood screws.

E. Basis of Design, Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Hager Companies (HAG).2. Ives Hardware; an Allegion Company (IVE)3. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (MCK).4. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Division of Stanley Black & Decker (STA).

2.4 CONTINUOUS BARREL-TYPE HINGES

A. Product Quality Standard: ANSI/BHMA A 156.26, Grade 1, 2 or 3.

B. Description: Continuous hinge with knuckles formed around a pin that extending entire length of hinge.

C. Screws: Phillips flat-head screws with heads to match surface of hinges.

1. Metal Doors and Metal Frames: Machine screws installed into drilled and tapped holes.2. Wood Doors and Wood Frames: Wood screws.3. Fire Rated Wood Doors: No. 12 by 1-1/4 in, threaded-to-head steel wood screws.

D. Basis of Design, Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.

E. Available Manufacturers:

1. Hager Companies (HAG).2. Ives, an Allegion Company (IVE).



087100 - 8

3. Markar Architectural Products, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (MAR).4. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (MCK).5. Select Products Limited (SEL).6. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Division of Stanley Black & Decker (STA).7. Zero International, Allegion Company (ZER).

2.5 SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE

A. Product Quality Standard: ANSI/BHMA A 156.14.

B. Description: Sets including rails, hangers, supports, bumpers, guides, trim, and accessories indicated.

C. Basis of Design: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.

D. Available Manufacturers:

1. Hafele (HAF).2. Hawa (HAW).3. K.N. Crowder (KNC).4. Pemko, an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (PEM)

2.6 FLUSH BOLTS

A. Manual Flush Bolts:

1. Product Quality Standards:

a. ANSI/BHMA A 156.16.b. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed for fire doors.

2. Description:

a. Minimum 1/2 in round rods, forged brass or bronze, furnished in pairs, (top and bottom of door); lengths of rod 12 in; where door is higher than 84 in, top bolt shall be of sufficient length to locate flush bolt operator 72 in above finish floor.

b. Standard top strike and dustproof bottom strike.

3. Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.4. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:

a. Door Controls International (DCI). b. Hager Companies (HAG).c. Ives Hardware; an Allegion Company (IVE).d. Rockwood, an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (ROC).e. Trimco (TRI).

B. Automatic Flush Bolts:


a. ANSI/BHMA A156.16.b. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed for fire doors.



087100 - 9

2. Description:

a. Minimum 1/2 in round rods, forged brass or bronze, furnished in pairs, (top and bottom of door); lengths of rod 12 in; where door is higher than 84 in, top bolt shall be of sufficient length to locate flush bolt operator 72 in above finish floor.

b. Standard top strike and dustproof bottom strike.


a. Door Controls International (DCI).b. Hager Companies (HAG).c. Ives Hardware; an Allegion Company (IVE).d. Rockwood; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (ROC).e. Trimco (TRI).

C. Constant Latching Flush Bolts:


a. ANSI/BHMA A 156.16.b. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed for fire doors.

2. Description:

a. Constant latching flush bolt at top remaining engaged when active door is opened, retracting only when plunger on face of bolt is depressed.

b. Automatic flush bolt at bottom.c. Standard top strike and dustproof bottom strike.


a. Door Controls International (DCI).b. Hager Companies (HAG).c. Ives Hardware; an Allegion Company (IVE).d. Rockwood, an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (ROC).e. Trimco (TRI).

2.7 KEY CONTROL PROTECTION

A. Level of Key Control Protection: Restricted patented.

2.8 CYLINDERS

A. Conventional and Restricted Lock Cylinders: ANSI/BHMA A 156.5, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated.

B. Description: Tumbler type, not less than 6 pins.

C. Permanent Cores:



087100 - 10

1. Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with other manufacturers' cylinders.

D. Temporary Cores – Construction Cores: Cores that are replaceable by permanent cores; provide 10 construction master keys. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.


F. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:

1. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (ARR); Choice HS.2. ASSA, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (ASA); Twin V10 & Exclusive.3. Best Access Systems; Division of Stanley Black & Decker (BES), Kaba Peaks.4. Corbin Russwin; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (COR); Pyramid.5. Medeco Security Locks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (MED); Keymark.6. Sargent Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (SAR); XC.7. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Allegion Company (SCH); Everest.8. Yale Commercial Locks; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (YAL); Keymark.

2.9 KEYING

A. Keying System: Factory registered incorporating decisions made in keying conference.

1. Product Quality Standard: ANSI/BHMA A 156.28, Appendix A.2. Grand Master Key System: Cylinders operated by a change key, a master key, and a

grand master key.

B. Keys:1. Metal: Nickel silver.2. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include

notation “DO NOT DUPLICATE”.3. Key Egress Identification: All keys necessary for unlocking doors installed in a means of

egress shall be individually identified by both touch and sight in accordance with NFPA 101.

4. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide following:

a. Cylinder Change Keys: 3.b. Master Keys: 5.c. Grand Master Keys: 5.

2.10 MORTISE LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Product Quality Standards: 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Grade 1 Operational and Security, except extended cycle

performance testing shall be 4 million cycles minimum.

B. Description:

1. Mortise Box Construction:

a. Heavy duty construction with minimum wrought case thickness of not less than 0.093 in thickness.



087100 - 11

b. 8 in by 1-1/4 in front adjustable to 1/8 in 2 in.c. 2-3/4 in backset. d. Minimum 3/4 in latchbolt throw, or as required for fire rated doors. e. Minimum 1 in deadbolt throw. f. Split hubs for split spindles.g. Lever handles supported by internal spring.h. Square, split spindles (with all-thread connector), set-screw receiver/retainer notch.

2. Strikes: Metal strike plate with extended lip to protect frame, and with metal or plastic strike box.

a. Single Swing Doors: Minimum lip projection necessary to project from trim.b. Pairs of Doors: With or without astragal, lip projection not beyond face of lock style

of inactive leaf.

C. Basis of Design, Function, Accessories, Lever Base Metal, Face Plate, Rose, and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:

1. Best Access Systems; Division of Stanley Black & Decker (BES); 45H Series.2. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (COR);

ML2200 Series.3. Sargent Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (SAR); 8200

Series.4. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Allegion Company (SCH); L9000 Series.5. Falcon Lock; an Allegion Ingersoll-Rand Company (FAL); LM500 Series.6. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (YAL); 8800

Series.

2.11 BORED LOCKSETS AND LATCHES

A. Product Quality Standards: ANSI/BHMA A 156.2, Grade 1, except cycle testing shall be 2 million cycles minimum.

1. NFPA 101 in means of egress.2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed for fire rated doors.

B. Product Quality Standards: ANSI/BHMA A 156.2, Grade 1, except cycle testing shall be 1 million cycles minimum. Grade 2 may be used for certain applications as scheduled.

1. NFPA 101 in means of egress.2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed for fire rated doors.

C. Description:

1. Bored Box Construction:

a. Interlocking construction between lock body and latch bolt tube.b. 2-3/4 in backset. c. 2-1/4 in by 1 in front. d. Minimum 1/2 in latchbolt throw, or as required for fire rated doors. e. Provision to prevent lever from sagging.



087100 - 12

2. Strikes: Metal strike plate with metal or plastic strike box with extended lip to protect frame.

a. Single Swing Doors: Minimum lip projection necessary to project from trim.b. Pairs of Doors: With or without astragal, lip projection not beyond face of lock style

of inactive leaf.

D. Basis of Design, Function, Accessories, Lever Base Metal, Face Plate, Rose, and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:

1. Best Access Systems; Division of Stanley Black & Decker (BES); 9K Series.2. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (COR);

CL3300 TL3700 Series.3. Sargent Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (SAR); DL, 10 Line

Series.4. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Allegion Company (SCH); LT ND Series.5. Falcon Lock; an Allegion Company (FAL); T Series.6. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (YAL); RL

4700LN Series.

2.12 AUXILIARY LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Product Quality Standard: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated.

B. Description: Locks having latchbolt or deadbolt operated by key, turn or both and may be used in addition to another lock operated by levers.

C. Available Manufacturers:1. Adams Rite Manufacturing, an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (ADR).2. Best Access Systems; Division of Stanley Black & Decker (BES).3. Falcon Lock; an Allegion Company (FAL).4. Medeco Security Locks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (MED).5. Sargent Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (SAR).6. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Allegion Company (SCH).7. Yale Lock; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (YAL).

2.13 EXIT DEVICES

A. Product Quality Standards:

B. Product Quality Standards: ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, except extended cycle performance testing shall be 8 million cycles minimum.

1. NFPA 101 in means of egress.2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed for fire rated doors.3. Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.4. NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252.



087100 - 13

C. Product Quality Standards: ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, except extended cycle performance testing shall be 4 million cycles minimum.

1. NFPA 101 in means of egress.2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed for fire rated doors.3. Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.4. NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252.

D. Description:

1. Touch bar type, unless scheduled otherwise.2. Concealed vertical rods on pairs of doors, unless surface mounted vertical rods required

for fire rated doors.3. Mortise lock or rim type devices on single doors only.4. Outside trim as scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.5. Except on fire rated doors where closers are provided on doors equipped with exit

devices, equip units with keyed dogging device to keep latch bolt retracted, when engaged.

6. Except at doors with thresholds, provide vertical rod devices which hold rods in retracted position when door is open.

E. Basis of Design, Function, Accessories, Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:

1. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (COR); ED5000 Series / ED4000 Series Narrow Stile.

2. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of the DORMA Group North America (DOR); 9000 Series.

3. Sargent Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (SAR); 30/80 Series.

4. Von Duprin; an Allegion Company (VON); 22/33/35/98/99 Series. 5. Yale Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (YAL); 2100/7100 Series.

2.14 SELF-CONTAINED ELECTRONIC LOCKS

A. Description: Internal, battery-powered, self-contained electronic locks; consisting of complete lockset, motor-driven lock mechanism, and actuating device; enclosed in zinc-dichromate-plated, wrought-steel case. Provide key override, low-battery detection and warning, LED status indicators, and ability to program at lock; type and function indicated.

1. Type: Mortise.2. Actuating Device: Proximity card reader, with card encoder and software.3. Faceplate Material: Wrought brass4. Trim: Match trim specified for mechanical locks.

B. Basis of Design, Function, Accessories, Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.

C. Available Manufacturers:



087100 - 14

1. Saflok (SAF).2. VingCard; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (VIN).

2.15 PUSH/PULL TRIM


B. Description:

1. Flat Push Plates: 0.050 in thick, 4 in wide by 16 in high wide by high); with square corners and beveled edges, secured with exposed screws.

2. Pull-Plate Door Pulls: 0.050 in thick plate, 4 in wide by 16 in high wide by high, with square corners and beveled edges; 3/4 in constant-diameter pull, with minimum clearance of 1-1/2 in from face of door; fastened at 8 in o.c., secured with exposed screws.

C. Basis of Design, Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.

D. Available Manufacturers:

1. Ives Hardware; an Allegion Company (IVE).2. Richelieu (RIC).3. Rockwood Manufacturing, an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (ROC).4. Rocky Mountain Hardware (RMH).5. Trimco (TRI).

2.16 CLOSERS

A. Product Quality Standard: ANSI/BHMA A156.4. Grade 1. except cycle testing shall be 6 million cycles minimum.

B. Product Quality Standard: ANSI/BHMA A156.4. Grade 1. except cycle testing shall be 4 million cycles minimum.

C. Description: Manual overhead surface and concealed closers.

D. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use.

E. Access-Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible, provide adjustable units complying with accessibility requirements for door opening force and delayed action closing.

F. Basis of Design, Function, Accessories, Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.

G. Surface Closers Acceptable Manufacturer and Model Series:

1. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (COR); DC 8000 Series.

2. LCN Closers; an Allegion Company (LCN); 4040XP Series.



087100 - 15

3. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America (DOR); 8900 Series.

4. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (NOR); 7500 Series.5. Sargent Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (SGT); 281/351

Series.

H. Guestroom Surface Closers Acceptable Manufacturer and Model:

1. LCN Closers; an Allegion Company (LCN); 1461 Series.2. Sargent Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (SGT); 1331

Series.3. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America (DOR);

8600 Series.4. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (NOR); 8300 Series.

2.17 STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Product Quality Standard for Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.

B. Product Quality Standard for Overhead Stays: ANSI/BHMA A 56.16, Grade 1.

C. Product Quality Standard for Electromagnetic Door Holders: BHMA A156.15; coordinate with fire detectors and interface with fire alarm system for fire rated doors.

D. Product Quality Standard for Door Silencers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16.


F. Available Manufacturers and Products:

1. Ives, an Allegion Companies (IVE).2. Rockwood Manufacturing, an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (ROC);3. Trimco (TRI).

2.18 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS


B. Description: Minimum 0.050 in thick metal plates with beveled top and 2 sides fabricated in following configurations:

1. Armor Plates: 36 in high by door width, with allowance for frame stops.2. Kick Plates: 12 in high by door width, with allowance for frame stops.3. Mop Plates: 6 in high by 1 in less than door width.

C. Fasteners: Exposed fasteners consisting of either machine screws or self-tapping screws.

D. Width and Thickness: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.




087100 - 16

F. Available Manufacturers and Products:

1. IVES Hardware; an Allegion Company (IVE).2. Rockwood Manufacturing, an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (ROC).3. Trimco (TRI).

2.19 DOOR GASKETING

A. Product Quality Standards: ANSI/BHMA A156.22, and according to following when required:

1. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm/ft. of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control according to ASTM E 283.

2. Smoke Leakage: Comply with NFPA 105 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated according to UL 1784.

3. Fire Rating: Comply with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction according to NFPA 252. After 5 minutes into test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 in or less above sill.

4. Sound Rating: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency according to ASTM E 1408.

B. Basis of Design: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.


1. K.N. Crowder (KNC).2. National Guard Products (NGP).3. Pemko Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (PEM).4. Reese Enterprises (REE).5. Zero International, an Allegion Company (ZER).

2.20 THRESHOLDS

A. Product Quality Standard: ANSI/BHMA A156.21.

B. Basis of Design: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.


1. K.N. Crowder (KNC).2. National Guard Products (NGP).3. Pemko Manufacturing, an ASSA ABLOY Group Company (PEM).4. Reese Enterprises (REE).5. Zero International, an Allegion Company (ZER).

2.21 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Key Control Cabinet:

1. Product Quality Standard: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.



087100 - 17

2. Description: Metal cabinet with baked-enamel finish; containing key-holding hooks, labels, 2 sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of 150 percent of number of locks.

3. Multiple-Drawer Cabinet: Cabinet with drawers equipped with key-holding panels and key envelope storage, and progressive-type ball-bearing suspension slides. Include single cylinder lock to lock all drawers.

4. Wall-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet with hinged-panel door equipped with key-holding panels and pin-tumbler cylinder door lock.

5. Portable Cabinet: Tray for mounting in file cabinet, equipped with key-holding panels, envelopes, and cross-index system.

B. Available Manufacturers:

1. Key Control Systems, Inc. (KCS).2. Lund Equipment Co., Inc. (LUN).3. MMF Industries (MMF).

C. Key Control System Software:

1. Product Quality Standard: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.2. Description: Multiple-index system for recording and reporting key-holder listings,

tracking keys and lock and key history, and printing receipts for transactions. Include instruction manual.

2.22 MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE

A. Boxed Power Supplies:

1. Description: Modular unit in NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure; filtered and regulated; voltage rating and type matching requirements of door hardware served; and listed and labeled for use with fire alarm systems.

2. Basis of Design, Function, Accessories, Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.

B. Auxiliary Hardware:

1. Product Quality Standard: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.2. Basis of Design, Function, Accessories, Base Metal and Finish: As scheduled in PART 3

"Door Hardware Sets" Article.3. Available Manufacturers:

a. IVES Hardware; an Allegion Company (IVE).b. Rockwood Manufacturing, an ASSA ABOY Group Company (ROC).c. Trimco (TRI).

C. Silicone Sealant: Exterior non-sag silicone sealant as specified in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants.”

2.23 FINISHES

A. Product Quality Standard: ANSI/BHMA A 156.18, as scheduled in PART 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.



087100 - 18

B. Protection: Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within range of approved samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine doors and frames to receive door hardware and associated Work for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting Work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Installation Quality Standards: In addition to standards listed elsewhere, perform Work according to following, unless otherwise specified:

1. Respective manufacturer written installation instructions.2. Accepted submittals.3. Contract Documents.4. ANSI/DHI A115.IG.

B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by isolating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions, recommendations, and specifications for cleaning and surface preparation. Surfaces shall have no defects, contaminants, or errors which would result in poor or potentially defective installation or would cause latent defects in Work.

B. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series.

C. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI A 250.6.

D. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W Series.

E. Electrical: Verify raceway system and other provisions for electrical power are adequate for electrified door hardware installation.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.



087100 - 19

1. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames."

2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."

B. Hardware Installation:

1. Set hardware items level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

3. Do not install surface-mounted hardware items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

C. Key Control System: Tag keys and place on markers and hooks in cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.

D. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings or in equipment room. Verify location with Architect. [Provide one power supply for each door opening.] [Provide least number of power supplies required to adequately serve doors with electrified door hardware.]

E. Control Wiring:

1. Raceways: As specified and provided under appropriate Division 26 Section.2. Connections: Coordinate with appropriate Division 28 Section.

F. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of silicone sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." Extend full width of opening and notch at door stops.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Manufacturer's qualified technical representative shall periodically inspect Work to ensure installation is proceeding in accordance with manufacturer's designs, recommendations, instructions, and warranty requirements. Representative shall submit written reports of each visit indicating observations, findings, and conclusions of inspection.

1. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: Direct employee of technical services department of manufacturer with experience in providing recommendations, observations, evaluations, and problem diagnostics.

3.6 ADJUSTMENTS

A. Post-Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately 6 months after date of substantial completion, qualified technicians of supplier or installer, accompanied by manufacturers technical representatives of locksets, exit devices, closers, and other hardware manufacturers as required, shall perform following Work:

1. Examine and adjust each item of hardware as necessary to restore proper function of doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements.

2. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faculty design, materials, or installation.



087100 - 20

B. Maintenance Service:

1. First Year Maintenance Service: Beginning at date of substantial completion, supplier or installer shall provide 12 months maintenance service by qualified technicians.

a. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper hardware operation.

b. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in manufacture and installation of original products.

2. Proposal for Continuing Maintenance Service: Before expiration of first year maintenance service term, supplier shall furnish Owner with continuing maintenance service agreement, renewable yearly, proposing services, obligations, conditions, and terms for continuing maintenance service.

3.7 CLOSE-OUT ACTIVITIES

A. Operational and Maintenance Training: Train Owner's personnel on maintenance, operation, and adjustment of door hardware at Project using factory-trained and certified technicians. Provide attendees with bound copies of training materials.

3.8 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

--- Balance of page intentionally left blank ---



087100 - 21

B01 BOH STAIR

Hinges TA2714 652 MCK1 Ea. Exit Device 2100F-626F 630 YAL1 Ea. Exit Device 12-3828 689 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Floor Stop 481 626 ROC1 Ea. Adjustable Door Sweep 18100CNB (mount on stair side) 628 PEM1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM

B02 BOH MECHANICAL STAIR

Hinges TA2714 652 MCK1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8805FL 630 YAL1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8204 630 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Floor Stop 481 626 ROC1 Ea. Adjustable Door Sweep 18100CNB 628 PEM1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM

B03 BOH STOREROOM W/O CLOSER

Hinges TA2714 652 MCK1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8805FL 630 YAL1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8204 630 SAR1 Ea. Floor Stop 481 626 ROC3 Ea. Silencer 608/609 --- ROC

B04 BOH STOREROOM W/CLOSER

Hinges TA2714 652 MCK1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8805FL 630 YAL1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8204 630 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Floor Stop 481 626 ROC3 Ea. Silencer 608/609 --- ROC



087100 - 22

B05 BOH STOREROOM PANIC

Hinges TA2714 652 MCK1 Ea. Exit Device 2100F-627F 630 YAL1 Ea. Exit Device 12-3828 28-K-LL 689 SAR1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specification --- ---1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Floor Stop 481 626 ROC1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM

B06 BOH CLASSROOM

Hinges TA2714 652 MCK1 Ea. Classroom Lockset 8808FL 630 YAL1 Ea. Classroom Lockset 8237 630 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Floor Stop 481 626 ROC3 Ea. Silencer 608/609 --- ROC

B07 BOH STOREROOM RATED

Hinges TA2714 652 MCK1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8805FL 630 YAL1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8204 630 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Floor Stop 481 626 ROC1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM

B08

Hinges TA2714 652 MCK1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8805FL 630 YAL1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8204 630 SAR2 Ea. Closer w/Hold-Open 7500-H/PR7500-H 689 NOR2 Ea. Flush Bolt 555/557 626 ROC1 Ea. DP Strike 570 626 ROC2 Ea. OH Concealed Stop 1ADJ Series 626 RIX1 Ea. Overlapping Astragal (HM Door) 306-AST 600 ROC2 Ea. Silencer 608/609 --- ROC



087100 - 23

B09

Hinges TA2714 652 MCK1 Ea. Classroom Lockset 8808FL 630 YAL1 Ea. Classroom Lockset 8237 630 SAR2 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Set Auto Flush Bolts 1842/1942 626 ROC1 Ea. DP Strike 570 626 ROC1 Ea. Coordinator x Filler Bar x Brackets 1600 Series 600 ROC2 Ea. Floor Stop 481 626 ROC1 Ea. Overlapping Astragal (HM Door) 306-AST 600 ROC2 Ea. Silencer 608/609 --- ROC

B10 BOH OFFICE

Hinges TA2714 652 MCK1 Ea. Office Lockset- ADA Turn 8807FL 630 YAL1 Ea. Office Lockset- ADA Turn LB-8205 630 SAR1 Ea. Floor Stop 481 626 ROC3 Ea. Silencer 608/609 --- ROC

B11

1 Ea. Continuous Hinge FM-300-MB 630 MAR1 Ea. Classroom Lockset 8808FL 630 YAL1 Ea. Classroom Lockset 8237 630 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Floor Stop 481 626 ROC1 Ea. Armor Plate K1050F 34" x 2" LDW 630 ROC1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM

B12 BOH LAUNDRY

2 Ea. Continuous Hinge FM-300-MB 630 MAR1 Ea. Classroom Lockset 8808FL 630 YAL1 Ea. Classroom Lockset 8237 630 SAR2 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Set Auto Flush Bolts 1842/1942 626 ROC1 Ea. DP Strike 570 626 ROC1 Ea. Coordinator x Filler Bar x Brackets 1600 Series 600 ROC2 Ea. Floor Stop 481 626 ROC2 Ea. Armor Plate K1050F 34" x 2" LDW 630 ROC1 Ea. Overlapping Astragal (HM Door) 306-AST 600 ROC1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM



087100 - 24

B13 BOH RESTROOM ENTRY

Hinges TA2714 652 MCK1 Ea. Classroom Deadlock- ADA Turn 357 626 YAL1 Ea. Classroom Deadlock- ADA Turn LB-4877 626 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Floor Stop 481 626 ROC1 Ea. Push Plate 70C 630 ROC1 Ea. Pull Plate 110 x 70C 630 ROC1 Ea. Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW 630 ROC1 Ea. Mop Plate K1050 6" x 2" LDW 630 TRI3 Ea. Silencer 608/609 --- ROC

B14 BOH ELEVATOR PIT

Hinges TA2714 652 MCK1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8805FL 630 YAL1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8204 630 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Floor Stop 481 626 ROC1 Ea. Adjustable Door Sweep 18100CNB 628 PEM1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM1 Ea. Door Position Switch DPS-M/W --- SEC

B15 BOH FIRE SERVICE ELEVATOR LOBBY

1 Ea. Continuous Hinge FM-300-MB 630 MAR1 Ea. Exit Device 2100F-Less Trim (By Others) 630 YAL1 Ea. Exit Device 12-19-8843-Less Trim (By Others) 630 SAR1 Ea. Guest Card Entry Lever Trim MT RFID Series Troy 626 SAF1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Armor Plate K1050F 34" x 2" LDW 630 ROC1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM1 Ea. Electromagnetic Holder 900 Series 689 RIX

Note: Electromagnetic holder(s) require 120VAC/24VAC or DC/12VDC power / connection to Fire Alarm.

B16 BOH W/AUDIT TRAIL

Hinges TA2714 652 MCK1 Ea. Guest Card Entry Lock MT RFID Series 626 SAF1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Floor Stop 481 626 ROC3 Ea. Silencer 1229 --- TRI



087100 - 25

B17

Hinges TA2714 652 MCK1 Ea. Passage Latchset 8801FL 626 YAL1 Ea. Passage Latchset 8215 630 SAR2 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Set Auto Flush Bolts 1842/1942 626 ROC1 Ea. DP Strike 570 626 ROC1 Ea. Coordinator x Filler Bar x Brackets 1600 Series 600 ROC2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification --- ---1 Ea. Overlapping Astragal (HM Door) FMA 600 ANE1 Ea. Meeting Stile Gasket S772 --- PEM1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM

B18 BOH STOREROOM DOUBLE RATED

Hinges TA2714 652 MCK1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8805FL 630 YAL1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8204 630 SAR2 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Set Auto Flush Bolts 1842/1942 626 ROC1 Ea. DP Strike 570 626 ROC1 Ea. Coordinator x Filler Bar x Brackets 1600 Series 600 ROC2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification --- ---1 Ea. Overlapping Astragal (HM Door) FMA 600 ANE1 Ea. Meeting Stile Gasket S772 --- PEM1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM

B19

2 Ea. Continuous Hinge FM-300-MB 630 MAR1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8805FL 630 YAL1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8204 630 SAR2 Ea. Closer 7500H/PR7500H 689 NOR1 Set Auto Flush Bolts 1842/1942 626 ROC1 Ea. DP Strike 570 626 ROC1 Ea. Coordinator x Filler Bar x Brackets 1600 Series 600 ROC2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification --- ---2 Ea. Armor Plate K1050 34" x 1" LDW 630 TRI1 Ea. Overlapping Astragal 355CS 628 PEM1 Ea. Overhead Rain Drip 346C 628 PEM1 Ea. Threshold To Suit Sill Condition 719 PEM2 Ea. Door Sweep 3452CNB 628 PEM1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM



087100 - 26

B20

Hinges TA386 630 MCK1 Ea. Classroom Lockset 8808FL 630 YAL1 Ea. Classroom Lockset 8237 630 SAR1 Ea. Closer CPS7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification --- ---1 Ea. Lock Astragal (at outswing doors) 5001 626 TRI1 Ea. Overhead Rain Drip 346C 628 PEM1 Ea. Threshold To Suit Sill Condition 719 PEM1 Ea. Door Sweep 3452CNB 628 PEM1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM

B21

Hinges TA2714 652 MCK1 Ea. Exit Device 2100F Exit Only 630 YAL1 Ea. Exit Device 2100F-627F 630 YAL1 Ea. Exit Device 12-3828 Exit Only 689 SAR1 Ea. Exit Device 12-3828 28-K-LL 689 SAR1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specification --- ---1 Ea. Key Removable Mullion KRM200 600 YAL1 Ea. Key Removable Mullion 12-L980 600 SAR1 Ea. Cylinder To Suit Mullion Per Specification --- ---2 Ea. Closer PR7500 689 NOR2 Ea. Floor Stop 481 626 ROC1 Ea. Mullion Seal 5110 --- PEM1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM

AC-G01

Hinges (HW-02) TA2714 651 MCK1 Ea. Guest Card Entry Lock (HW-01) MT RFID Series 625 SAF1 Ea. Guest Card Entry Lock (HW-01) Signature RFID Less Lever Trim 625 VIN1 Pr. Lever Trim E2-MD 625 SAR1 Ea. Closer (HW-03) 8600 S-IS Series 689 DOR1 Ea. Floor Stop 446 626 ROC1 Ea. Door Viewer (HW-06) 627 625 ROC1 Ea. Privacy Door Latch (HW-04) PDL 681 PEM1 Ea. Door Bottom 2343AV 719 PEM1 Set Gasketing (HW-07/HW-08) S773 --- PEM

Note: Stone threshold. Provide 2 viewers at accessible rooms - 1 at 60" AFF and 1 at 43" AFF.



087100 - 27

AC-G02

1 Set Sliding Door Hardware Hawa Junior 80/120 GS/GP Series 719 HAF1 Ea. Door Pull - Single Mount By Door Manufacturer --- ---

Note: Provide floor guide, soft-close at both open and closed position.

Note: Balance of hardware by door manufacturer.

AC-G03

1 Set Sliding Door Hardware Hawa Junior 80/120 GS/GP Series 719 HAF2 Ea. Door Pull - BTB Mount By Door Manufacturer --- ---

Note: Provide floor guide, soft-close and track stopper at both open and closed position.

Note: Balance of hardware by door manufacturer.

LM-G01

Hinges TA2714 640 MCK1 Ea. Guest Card Entry Lock MT RFID Series 626 SAF1 Ea. Guest Card Entry Lock (HW-01) Signature RFID Less Lever Trim 613 VIN1 Pr. Lever Trim E2-MB 624 SAR1 Ea. Track-Arm Closer 8616 JT 695 DOR1 Ea. Floor Stop 446 613 ROC1 Ea. Door Viewer 627 613 ROC1 Ea. Privacy Door Latch PDL 704 PEM1 Ea. Door Bottom 2343DV 710 PEM1 Set Gasketing S773 --- PEM

Note: Stone threshold. Provide 2 viewers at accessible rooms - 1 at 60" AFF and 1 at 43" AFF.

LM-G02

1 Set Sliding Door Hardware Hawa Junior 80/120 Series 719 HAF1 Ea. Door Pull - Single Mount 89IN1630035170 630 RIC

Note: Provide floor guide and soft-close at both open and closed position.



087100 - 28

LM-G03

1 Set Sliding Door Hardware Hawa Junior 80/120 Series 719 HAF2 Ea. Door Pull - BTB Mount 89IN1630035170 630 RIC

Note: Provide floor guide, soft-close and track stopper at both open and closed position.

LM-G04

Hinges TA2714 640 MCK2 Ea. Exit Lockset 8835FL 626 YAL2 Ea. Exit Latchset 12-DLU15-3 E2-MB 624 SAR2 Ea. Thumb-Turn Deadbolt 479 624 SAR2 Ea. Floor Stop 446 613 ROC2 Ea. Auto Door Bottom PDB411AE 719 PEM2 Ea. Acoustic Corner Pad ACP112 --- PEM2 Set Gasketing S773 --- PEM

Note: Stone threshold

AC-P01 Door(s): 1-ST1

Hinges TA2714 651 MCK1 Ea. Exit Device 7100-628F 630 YAL1 Ea. Exit Device 12-19-8815 ET 629 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Floor Stop 481 625 ROC1 Ea. Adjustable Door Sweep 18100CNB (mount on stair side) 628 PEM1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM

LM-P01 Door(s): 2-ST01A, 2-ST01B, 2-ST02

Hinges TA2714 640 MCK1 Ea. Exit Device 12-19-8815 ET 624 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 695 NOR1 Ea. Floor Stop 481 613 ROC1 Ea. Adjustable Door Sweep 18100DNB (mount on stair side) 710 PEM1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM



087100 - 29

AC-P02 PUBLIC ELEVATOR LOBBY

Hinges TA2714 651 MCK1 Ea. Passage Latchset 8801FL 626 YAL1 Ea. Passage Latchset 8215 E2-MD 626 SAR2 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Set Auto Flush Bolts 2942 629 ROC1 Ea. DP Strike 570 625 ROC1 Ea. Coordinator x Filler Bar x Brackets 2600 Series 693 ROC2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification --- ---1 Ea. Overlapping Astragal (WD Door) 355CS 628 PEM1 Ea. Meeting Stile Gasket S772 --- PEM1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM2 Ea. Electromagnetic Holder 900 Series 689 RIX



Hinges TA2714 652 MCK1 Ea. Passage Latchset 8801FL 626 YAL2 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Auto Flush Bolt x Fire Bolt 1848/1948 626 ROC1 Ea. Coordinator x Filler Bar x Brackets 1600 Series 600 ROC2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification --- ---1 Ea. Overlapping Astragal (WD Door) 355CS 628 PEM1 Ea. Meeting Stile Gasket S772 --- PEM1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM2 Ea. Electromagnetic Holder 900 Series 689 RIX


Note: Integrated Door Opening Assembly - All hardware by manufacturer under Section 081700



087100 - 30

LM-P03 Door(s): 2-04A, 2-04B

Hinges TA2714 640 MCK1 Ea. Latch Hold-Back Lockset 8824FL Less O/S Lever Trim 630 YAL1 Ea. Door Pull - Single Mount Flute Passage Set, 3"x10" SBL RMH1 Ea. Classroom Lockset 8237 E2-H001 624 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 695 NOR1 Ea. Door Viewer 619/620/621 613 ROC1 Set Gasketing S773 --- PEM1 Ea. Auto Door Bottom PDB411AE 719 PEM1 Ea. Acoustic Corner Pad ACP112 --- PEM1 Ea. Electromagnetic Holder 900 Series 695 RIX


LM-P04 Door(s): 2-31A, 2-31B, 2-31C, 2-31D, 2-33A, 2-34A

Hinges TA2714 640 MCK1 Ea. Exit Device 7160 630 YAL1 Ea. Exit Device 7160-121NL 630 YAL2 Ea. Exit Device 19-8646 ET-H001 624 SAR2 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specification --- ---2 Ea. Door Pull - Single Mount Flute Passage Set, 3"x10" SBL RMH2 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 695 NOR1 Ea. Door Viewer 619/620/621 613 ROC1 Set Split Astragal 29324DNB 710 PEM1 Set Gasketing S773 --- PEM2 Ea. Auto Door Bottom PDB411AE 719 PEM2 Ea. Acoustic Corner Pad ACP112 --- PEM2 Ea. Electromagnetic Holder 900 Series 689 RIX


LM-P05 Door(s): 2-31E, 2-31F, 2-31G

Hinges TA2714 640 MCK1 Ea. Exit Device 7100-628F 630 YAL1 Ea. Exit Device 19-8843 ET 624 SAR1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specification --- ---1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 695 NOR1 Ea. Floor Stop 446 613 ROC1 Ea. Door Viewer (Looking into room) 622 613 ROC1 Ea. Auto Door Bottom PDB411AE 719 PEM1 Ea. Acoustic Corner Pad ACP112 --- PEM1 Set Gasketing S773 --- PEM



087100 - 31

AC-P06 Door(s): B1-53B, 1-12, 1-13

Hinges TA2714 651 MCK1 Ea. Classroom Deadlock- ADA Turn 357 626 YAL1 Ea. Classroom Deadlock- ADA Turn LB-4877 629 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Floor Stop 446 625 ROC1 Ea. Push Plate As selected by Interior Designer --- ---1 Ea. Pull Plate As selected by Interior Designer --- ---3 Ea. Silencer 608/609 --- ROC

LM-P06 Door(s): 2-08A, 2-09A

Hinges TA2714 640 MCK1 Ea. Classroom Deadlock- ADA Turn 357 624 YAL1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 695 NOR1 Ea. Floor Stop 446 613 ROC1 Ea. Push Plate As selected by Interior Designer --- ---1 Ea. Pull Plate As selected by Interior Designer --- ---3 Ea. Silencer 608/609 --- ROC

AC-P07 PUBLIC TOILET STALL

Hinges TA714 651 MCK1 Ea. Spring Hinge @ only 1502 640 MCK1 Ea. Privacy Lockset AU4702LN 626 YAL1 Ea. Privacy Lockset DLU65 E2-MD 629 SAR1 Ea. Coat Hook & Bumper 7010 625 TRI3 Ea. Silencer 608/609 --- ROC

LM-P07 Door(s): 2-08B, 2-08C, 2-08D, 2-08E, 2-08F, 2-09B, 2-09C

Hinges TA714 640 MCK1 Ea. Spring Hinge @ 2-08F, 2-09C only 1502 640 MCK1 Ea. Privacy Lockset DLU65 E2-H001 624 SAR1 Ea. Coat Hook & Bumper 7010 613 TRI3 Ea. Silencer 608/609 --- ROC



087100 - 32

P08 Door(s): 20-ST02

Hinges TA386 629 MCK1 Ea. Exit Device 7100F-626F 630 YAL1 Ea. Exit Device 12-19-8843 ET-H001 629 SAR1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specification --- ---1 Ea. Closer CPS7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Lock Astragal (at outswing doors) 325 625 ROC1 Ea. Overhead Rain Drip 346C 628 PEM1 Ea. Threshold To Suit Sill Condition 719 PEM1 Ea. Door Sweep 3452CNB 628 PEM1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM

P09 Door(s): 20-10, 20-11

Hinges TA2714 651 MCK1 Ea. Privacy Lockset- ADA Turn 8862FL 630 YAL1 Ea. Privacy Lockset- ADA Turn LB-8265 E2-H001 629 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500DA/PR7500DA 689 NOR1 Ea. Wall Bumper 400 Series 629 ROC3 Ea. Silencer 608/609 --- ROC


Hinges TA2714 640 MCK1 Ea. Privacy Lockset- ADA Turn LB-8265 E2-H001 624 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500DA/PR7500DA 695 NOR1 Ea. Wall Bumper 400 Series 613 ROC3 Ea. Silencer 608/609 --- ROC

P10 Door(s): 20-12

Hinges TA2714 651 MCK1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8805FL 630 YAL1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8204 E4-H001 629 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Wall Bumper 400 Series 629 ROC3 Ea. Silencer 608/609 --- ROC

AC-P10 Door(s): 1-25A

Hinges TA2714 651 MCK1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8204 E4-MD 629 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Wall Bumper 400 Series 629 ROC3 Ea. Silencer 608/609 --- ROC



087100 - 33

LM-P10 Door(s): 1-25B, 2-32

Hinges TA2714 640 MCK1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8805FL 630 YAL1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8204 E4-H001 624 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 695 NOR1 Ea. Wall Bumper 400 Series 613 ROC3 Ea. Silencer 608/609 --- ROC

P10A NOT USED

Concealed Hinges Tectus TE340 3D 124 SIM1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8805FL 630 YAL1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Wall Bumper 400 Series 630 ROC3 Ea. Silencer 608/609 --- ROC

P10B NOT USED

Hinges TA2714 652 MCK1 Ea. Exit Device 2100F-627F 630 YAL1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specification --- ---1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Wall Bumper 400 Series 630 ROC3 Ea. Silencer 608/609 --- ROC

LM-P11

Hinges TA2714 640 MCK1 Ea. Exit Device 7100-628F 630 YAL1 Ea. Exit Device 19-8815 ET-H001 630 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 695 NOR1 Ea. Floor Stop 446 613 ROC1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM

AC-P12 PUBLIC NON-RATED STOREROOM W/CLOSER

Hinges TA2714 651 MCK1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8805FL 630 YAL1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8204 E4-H001 624 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Wall Bumper 400 Series 629 ROC1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM



087100 - 34


Hinges TA2714 640 MCK1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8204 E4-H001 624 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 695 NOR1 Ea. Wall Bumper 400 Series 613 ROC1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM

LM-P13 Door(s): 2-33B, 2-34B

Hinges TA2714 640 MCK1 Ea. Exit Device 7100 628F 630 YAL1 Ea. Exit Device 19-8843 ET-H001 630 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 695 NOR1 Ea. Floor Stop 446 613 ROC1 Ea. Door Viewer (Looking into room) 622 613 ROC1 Ea. Auto Door Bottom PDB411AE 719 PEM1 Ea. Acoustic Corner Pad ACP112 --- PEM1 Set Gasketing S773 --- PEM


Hinges TA2714 640 MCK1 Ea. Latch Hold-Back Lockset 8824FL Less O/S Lever Trim 630 YAL1 Ea. Door Pull - Single Mount Flute Passage Set, 3"x10" SBL RMH1 Ea. Classroom Lockset 8237 E2-H001 624 SAR1 Ea. Dummy Trim @ pullside inactive leaf 8295 E2-H001 624 SAR2 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 695 NOR1 Ea. Flush Bolt @ Top only 555/557 626 ROC1 Ea. Coordinator x Filler Bar x Brackets 2600 Series 693 ROC1 Ea. Auto Flush Bolt (Top Inactive Leaf) 2960 613 ROC1 Ea. Door Viewer (Looking into room) 622 613 ROC1 Set Gasketing S773 --- PEM2 Ea. Auto Door Bottom PDB411AE 719 PEM2 Ea. Acoustic Corner Pad ACP112 --- PEM2 Ea. Electromagnetic Holder 900 Series 695 RIX


AC-P15 PUBLIC PRIVATE DINING

Hinges TA2714 651 MCK2 Ea. Roller Latch (Top of Each Leaf) 1559B 625 TRI2 Ea. Pull As Selected By Interior Designer --- ---2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification --- ---2 Ea. Silencer 608/609 --- ROC



087100 - 35

LM-P15 Door(s): 1-28C

Hinges TA2714 640 MCK2 Ea. Roller Latch (Top of Each Leaf) 1559B 613 TRI2 Ea. Pull As Selected By Interior Designer --- ---2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification --- ---2 Ea. Silencer 608/609 --- ROC

AC-P16 Door(s): 1-11

Hinges TA2714 651 MCK1 Ea. Passage Latchset 8215 E2-MD 629 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification --- ---1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM

LM-P16 Door(s): 1-21, Ice Machine (2-01)

Hinges TA2714 640 MCK1 Ea. Passage Latchset 8215 E2-H001 624 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 695 NOR1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification --- ---1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM

P17 Not Used

P18 Not Used

P19 Not Used

P20 Not Used

P21 Door(s): 20-15A, 20-15B

2 Ea. Continuous Hinge SL11HD --- SEL1 Ea. Guest Card Entry Lock MT RFID Series 625 SAF2 Ea. OH Concealed Closer 2030 Series 689 LCN2 Ea. Flush Bolt 555/557 625 ROC1 Ea. DP Strike 570 625 ROC2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification --- ---1 Ea. Overlapping Astragal 355CS 628 PEM1 Ea. Threshold To Suit Sill Condition 719 PEM

Note: Alum/ Glass Door - Perimeter and door bottom seals by door manufacturer.



087100 - 36

P22 Door(s): 20-09

2 Ea. Continuous Hinge SL11HD --- SEL1 Ea. Exit Device 7220 630 YAL1 Ea. Exit Device 7220 121NL 630 YAL1 Ea. Exit Device 8410 629 SAR1 Ea. Exit Device 8410 x 106 629 SAR1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specifications --- ---2 Ea. OH Concealed Closer 2030 Series 689 LCN2 Ea. Door Pull BF157 629 ROC2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification --- ---1 Ea. Threshold To Suit Sill Condition 719 PEM

Note: Alum/ Glass Doors - Perimeter, meeting stile and door bottom seals by door manufacturer.

P23 Door(s): 20-02

Hinges TA2714 651 MCK1 Ea. Passage Latchset 8801FL 630 YAL1 Ea. Passage Latchset 8215 E2-H001 629 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification --- ---3 Ea. Silencer 608/609 --- ROC

P24

Note: All hardware by Revolving Door manufacturer.

AC-P25 Door(s): 1-06C

1 Ea. Floor Closer /Pivot Set SCPH27N Series 625 RIXIntermediate Pivot(s) M19 625 RIX

1 Ea. Exit Device 7100 121NL 613 YAL1 Ea. Exit Device AD8504 629 SAR1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specifications --- ---1 Ea. Door Pull BF157 629 ROC1 Ea. OH Concealed Stop 1000SL ADJ Series 629 ABH1 Ea. Threshold To Suit Sill Condition 719 PEM




087100 - 37

LM-P25


1 Ea. Exit Device AD8504 624 SAR1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specifications --- ---1 Ea. Door Pull BF157 613 ROC1 Ea. OH Concealed Stop 1000SL ADJ Series 613 ABH1 Ea. Bronze Threshold To Suit Sill Condition 722 PEM


AC-P26 Door(s): 1-06B

1 Ea. Floor Closer /Pivot Set PH27N Series 625 RIXIntermediate Pivot(s) M19 625 RIX

1 Ea. Exit Device 7100 121NL 613 YAL1 Ea. Exit Device AD8504 629 SAR1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specifications --- ---1 Ea. Door Pull BF157 629 ROC1 Ea. OH Concealed Stop 1000SL ADJ Series 629 ABH


LM-P26


1 Ea. Exit Device AD8504 624 SAR1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specifications --- ---1 Ea. Door Pull BF157 613 ROC1 Ea. OH Concealed Stop 1000SL ADJ Series 613 ABH


P27 NOT USED


1 Ea. Exit Device 7100 121NL 630 YAL1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specifications --- ---1 Ea. Door Pull BF157 630 ROC1 Ea. OH Concealed Stop 1000SL ADJ Series 630 ABH1 Ea. Threshold To Suit Sill Condition 719 PEM




087100 - 38

AC-P28


1 Ea. Exit Device 7100 121NL 630 YAL1 Ea. Exit Device AD8504 629 SAR1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specifications --- ---1 Ea. Door Pull BF157 629 ROC1 Ea. OH Concealed Stop 1000SL ADJ Series 629 ABH


LM-P28 Door(s): 1-24B, 1-24C, 1-24D, 1-24E


1 Ea. Exit Device AD8504 624 SAR1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specifications --- ---1 Ea. Door Pull BF157 613 ROC1 Ea. OH Concealed Stop 1000SL ADJ Series 613 ABH


AC-P29 Door(s): 1-03


1 Ea. Exit Device 7100 Exit Only 630 YAL1 Ea. Exit Device AD8504 629 SAR1 Ea. OH Concealed Stop 1000SL ADJ Series 629 ABH1 Ea. Threshold To Suit Sill Condition 719 PEM


P30 Door(s): 1-ST02

Hinges TA386 630 MCK2 Ea. Exit Device 7100 Exit Only 630 YAL2 Ea. Exit Device 12-19-MD8410 630 SAR1 Ea. Key Removable Mullion KRM200 600 YAL1 Ea. Cylinder To Suit Mullion Per Specification --- ---2 Ea. Closer PR7500 689 NOR2 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification --- ---1 Set Mullion Seal 5110 --- PEM1 Ea. Overhead Rain Drip 346C 628 PEM1 Ea. Threshold To Suit Sill Condition 719 PEM2 Ea. Door Sweep 90100CNB or 90137CNB, as req. 719 PEM1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM



087100 - 39

P31 Door(s): 1-ST3B

Hinges TA386 630 MCK1 Ea. Electrified Exit Device 7100-B 691F 630 YAL1 Ea. Electrified Exit Device 12-19-55-8876 ET 24VDC 630 SAR1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specification --- ---1 Ea. Closer PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Door Stop Per Specification --- ---1 Ea. Overhead Rain Drip 346C 628 PEM1 Ea. Threshold To Suit Sill Condition 719 PEM1 Ea. Door Sweep 3452CNB 628 PEM1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM1 Ea. Power Supply BPS-12/24 --- SEC1 Ea. Electric Power Transfer CEPT 630 SEC1 Ea. Door Position Switch 180-12 --- GRI

Note: Controlled Opening - Card Reader, Wiring, and Controls by Security. Free egress at all times. Power supply requires 120VAC.

AC-T01 TYPICAL AC GUEST LEVEL STAIR

Hinges TA2714 651 MCK1 Ea. Classroom Lockset 8808FL 629 YAL1 Ea. Classroom Lockset 8237 E2-MD 630 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Floor Stop 446 625 ROC1 Ea. Adjustable Door Sweep 18100CNB (mount on stair side) 628 PEM1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM

Note: Finishes: AC=Bright Chrome Finish; LM=Dull Chrome Dark Bronze Finish

LM-T01 TYPICAL LM GUEST LEVEL STAIR

Hinges TA2714 640 MCK1 Ea. Classroom Lockset 8237 E2-MB 624 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 695 NOR1 Ea. Floor Stop 446 613 ROC1 Ea. Adjustable Door Sweep 18100DNB (mount on stair side) 710 PEM1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM




087100 - 40

T02 Door(s): T-02

Hinges TA2714 651 MCKHinges TA2714 640 MCK

1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 695 NOR1 Ea. Push Plate 70C 629 ROC1 Ea. Push Plate 70C 613 ROC1 Ea. Pull Plate 110 x 70C 629 ROC1 Ea. Pull Plate 110 x 70C 613 ROC1 Ea. Floor Stop 446 625 ROC1 Ea. Floor Stop 446 613 ROC2 Ea. Silencer 608/609 --- ROC


AC-T03 TYPICAL GUEST LEVEL AC ELEVATOR LOBBY

Hinges TA2714 651 MCK1 Ea. Passage Latchset 8801FL 629 YAL1 Ea. Passage Latchset 8215 E2-MD 629 SAR2 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Auto Flush Bolt x Fire Bolt 2848 625 ROC1 Ea. DP Strike 570 625 ROC1 Ea. Coordinator x Filler Bar x Brackets 2600 Series 689 ROC1 Ea. Overlapping Astragal (WD Door) 355CS 628 PEM1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM2 Ea. Electromagnetic Holder 900 Series 689 RIX


AC-T04 TYPICAL GUEST AC LEVEL HOUSEKEEPING

Hinges TA2714 651 MCK1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8805FL 629 YAL1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8204 E2-MD 629 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Wall Bumper 400 Series 629 ROC3 Ea. Silencer 608/609 --- ROC



087100 - 41

AC-T05 TYPICAL GUEST LEVEL ELECTRICAL W/PANIC

Hinges TA2714 652 MCK1 Ea. Exit Device 2100F-627F 629 YAL1 Ea. Exit Device 12-3828 28-K-LL 689 SAR1 Ea. Cylinder to Suit Device Per Specification --- ---1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Wall Bumper 400 Series 630 ROC1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM

AC-T06 TYPICAL GUEST LEVEL IDF

Hinges TA2714 652 MCK1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8805FL 629 YAL1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8204 630 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Wall Bumper 400 Series 630 ROC3 Ea. Silencer 608/609 --- ROC

AC-T07 TYPICAL 20 GUEST LEVEL EGRESS

Hinges TA2714 651 MCK1 Ea. Exit Device 7100-628F 629 YAL1 Ea. Exit Device 12-19-8815 ET 629 SAR1 Ea. Closer 7500/PR7500 689 NOR1 Ea. Wall Bumper 400 Series 629 ROC1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM

AC-T08

Hinges TA2714 652 MCK2 Ea. Spring Hinges 1502 652 MCK1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8805FL 630 YAL1 Ea. Storeroom Lockset 8204 630 SAR1 Ea. Wall Bumper 400 Series 630 ROC1 Ea. Kick Plate K1050 10" x 2" LDW B4E CSK 630 ROC1 Set Gasketing S88 --- PEM

END OF SECTION



087100 - 42

--- This page intentionally left blank ---

LE MERIDIEN l AC HOTEL DENVER, COLORADO

MCLA, Inc. CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS – PUBLIC SPACES 2016-06-13

260933 - 1

SECTION 260933

CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS – PUBLIC SPACES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1. SUMMARY

A. Provide, install and test the architectural lighting control system as specified herein for the ar-eas indicated on the drawings, specifications and load schedule(s)

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. The architectural lighting control system consists of factory pre-assembled dimming panels, centralized preset lighting control(s), low voltage wall stations and/or control interfaces and solid-state high frequency fluorescent dimming ballasts (where applicable). System shall pro-vide interface with audio visual equipment and building energy management system. The entry controls shall have conditional logic, allowing a single station on a specific floor to activate dif-ferent scenes depending on the day of the week and time of day.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide a written line-by-line review of the specification B. Shall include a load schedule which indicates the actual connected load and load types per cir-

cuit, circuits and their respective control zones, circuits that are on emergency and the capacity, phase and corresponding circuit numbers (per electrical drawings).

C. Shall include a complete schematic of the system. D. Shall include catalogue cut sheets with performance specifications including historical testing

data demonstrating complete compliance to all of the specifications herein.

1.4 APPROVALS

A. Deviation from this specification must be documented in writing to the Lighting Designer, Archi-tect and Electrical Engineer at least ten business days in advance to bid date. Complete cata-logue data, specifications and technical information on alternate equipment must be provided including all associated cost savings or additions, including but not limited to equipment, pro-gramming, documentation and project management.


A. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 20 years continuous experience in the manufacturing of lighting controls.

B. Architectural lighting control system shall be UL, CSA, NOM or CE listed (where appropriate)

specifically for the required loads (i.e.: incandescent, magnetic and electronic low voltage, fluo-rescent, etc.). Manufacturer shall provide evidence of compliance on request.



260933 - 2

C. Architectural lighting control system shall meet IEC801-2, tested to withstand a 15kV electro-static discharge without damage or loss of memory.

D. Architectural lighting control system shall be bid separately from all other lighting equipment.

Packages of lighting equipment and architectural lighting control systems are not acceptable. 1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. The architectural lighting controls must operate in an ambient temperature range of 0ºC (32ºF) to 40ºC (104ºF) and 90% non-condensing relative humidity without the requirement of a regu-larly scheduled maintenance program for air filtration components.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. The manufacturer shall provide a full two-year limited warranty on all equipment supplied. The warranty shall cover 100% of the parts and manufacturers labor costs required over the first two-years, which are directly attributable to the manufacturer. Warranty coverage shall begin on the date that the equipment is energized.

1.8 COMMISSIONING

A. A factory-employed engineer shall make a minimum of two site visits to ensure proper system installation and operation.

1.9 MAINTENANCE

A. The manufacturer shall make available to the end user a method of ordering new equipment for expansions, replacement or parts to be used as spares.

B. The manufacturer must make available new replacement parts for a minimum period of ten

years from the final date of commissioning.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 DIMMING PANEL

A. Panels shall be UL listed, CSA certified, NOM approved or CE marked (as appropriate). B. Panels shall be wall or recess mountable. Enclosure shall be NEMA type 1 and IP-20 rate as

specified by IEC 60529. Panel shall be constructed of steel with steel gauge of type required by UL508. Contractor shall reinforce wall as required.

C. Panels shall be completely pre-assembled and factory tested by the manufacturer prior to ship-

ment. The contractor shall be required to provide input feed wiring, load wiring and control wir-ing. No other wiring or assembly by the contractor shall be permitted. Panels requiring field assembly are not acceptable.

D. All input feed, load and control terminals shall be front accessible without the need to remove

dimmer assemblies or other components. E. Panels shall be cooled passively by free-convection or with fan assistance. Systems that re-

quire or recommend regularly scheduled maintenance for air filtration components are not ac-ceptable.



260933 - 3

F. Each dimmer may be controlled independently or in combination with any other dimmer within

the panel or with dimmers from other panels within the system. Each dimmer shall be rated for 16A.

G. Unless the panel is a dedicated feed-through-type panel or otherwise indicated, panels shall

contain branch circuit protection for each dimmer. H. Branch Circuit Breakers in 120 volt panels shall have the following performance characteristics:

1. Be UL 489 listed as molded case circuit breaker for use on lighting circuits. 2. Contain a visual trip indicator and shall be rated at 10,000 AIC unless otherwise noted.

Panel shall accept breakers rated up to 22,000 AIC. 3. Be thermal-magnetic in construction for overload, short-circuit and over temperature pro-

tection. The use of fully magnetic breakers is not acceptable. 4. Be replaceable without moving or replacing dimmer assemblies or other components of

the panel 5. Be switching duty (SWD) rated so that loads can be switched off via the breakers.

I. Branch Circuit Breakers in 277 volt panels shall have the following performance characteristics:

1. Be UL 489 listed as molded case circuit breaker for use on lighting circuits. 2. Contain a visual trip indicator and shall be rated at 14,000 AIC unless otherwise noted.

Panel shall accept breakers rated up to 42,000 AIC. 3. Be thermal-magnetic in construction for overload, short-circuit and over temperature pro-

tection. The use of fully magnetic breakers is not acceptable. 4. Be replaceable without moving or replacing dimmer assemblies or other components of

the panel 5. Be switching duty (SWD) rated so that loads can be switched off via the breakers.

J. Panels shall have a minimum UL listed short circuit current rating (SCCR) of 42,000A. Panels

not providing this level of short circuit current (SCCR) protection are not acceptable. K. Panels shall be equipped with an electronic bypass dimmer which electronically switches the

lighting loads to full light output form any level by toggling the individual branch circuit breakers (for individual circuits) or main breaker (for all circuits) when there is no intensity data available from the control system.

L. Panels shall be shipped with each dimmer in mechanical bypass position via a jumper bar in-

serted between the input and load terminals to allow dimming panel to use as a temporary light-ing panel with no possibility of dimmer failure due to short-circuit condition. These jumpers shall carry the full-rated load current and shall be reusable at any time. Mechanical bypass de-vice must allow for switching operation of connected load with the dimmer removed via a circuit breaker. Bypass devices that are integral to the dimmer are not acceptable.

M. Panel shall be capable of operation from a normal feed, emergency feed or a normal/emer-

gency feed. Panels requiring additional devices to make them capable of accepting nor-mal/emergency or emergency feeds are not acceptable.

N. Under fully loaded operating conditions, all semiconductor devices shall operate at a minimum

20ºC (36ºF) safety margin below the component manufacturer’s maximum component temper-ature rating at a 40ºC (104ºF) ambient room temperature.

O. A positive air gap switch shall be employed by each dimmer in the panel to ensure that the load



260933 - 4

circuits are open when the “off” function is selected from the control system.

P. Dimmer shall be capable of withstanding inrush current of 50 times operating current typically generated by a full circuit of switching electronic non-dim ballasts.

Q. Each dimmer shall compensate for incoming line voltage variation such as changes in RMS

voltage, frequency shifts, harmonics and line noise. Dimmer shall be capable of maintaining constant light level with no visible flicker.

R. Dimmer output voltage shall be a minimum of 95% of input voltage at maximum intensity setting

under full load conditions.

S. Each dimmer shall incorporate an electronic “soft-start” default at initial turn-on that smoothly ramps the lights up to the appropriate levels within 0.5 seconds.

T. Each dimmer shall be designed and tested to withstand surges, without impairment to perfor-

mance, of 6000V, 3000A (equivalent to a near lighting strike) as specified by ANSI/IEEE std. C62.41.

U. One type of dimmer shall be used for all sources, line voltages and frequencies. Systems re-

quiring different types of modules are not acceptable. Dimmers shall be capable of electronic assignment to any source and any zone. Upon replacement of a dimmer, only that dimmer shall require replacement, and no re-programming shall be required.

V. Filtering shall be provided for each dimmer such that the current rise shall be at least 350usec

as measured from 10% to 90% of the load current waveform and at least 525usec as measured from 0% - 100% of the load current waveform at 50% rated dimmer capacity at a 90º conduc-tion angle. Current rise shall be at least 400usec as measured form 10%-90% of the load cur-rent waveform and at least 600 used as measured from 0%-100% of the load current waveform at 100% rated dimmer capacity at a 90º conduction angle.

W. Dimmers shall operate the sources/load types listed below in sections with a smooth continu-

ous Square Law dimming curve or a non-dim basis. Dimmers shall be electronically assigned to the appropriate load type/dimming curve and can be reassigned at any time. Universal type dimmers that do not adjust the dimming curve based on load type are not acceptable.

1. Incandescent, Tungsten and Magnetic low voltage transformer: Dimmer shall contain

circuitry specifically designed to control and provide a symmetrical AC waveform to the input of magnetic low voltage transformers. It shall not cause the transformer to operate above the transformer’s rated operating current and temperature.

2. Electronic Low Voltage Transformer: Dimming shall not adversely affect sound rating of the electronic transformers. In addition, no flicker or interaction shall occur at any point in the dimming range.

3. Fluorescent Electronic Dimming Ballasts: Dimming ballasts and controls shall be fully compatible and not limit each other’s performance.

4. Neon & Cold Cathode: Dimmer shall provide the ability to dim lamps down to 10% of full light output when used with normal power factor transformers. Lamp performance over the range specified shall be continuous and free of flicker or striations.

X. Manufacturer: Lutron (GP dimming panel series, sizes per electrical drawings)



260933 - 5



260933 - 6

2.2 CENTRAL LIGHTING CONTROL PROCESSOR

A. Central lighting control processor shall provide power failure memory. Should power be inter-rupted and subsequently returned, the lights must come back on to the same levels set prior to the power interruption without requiring any actions on the part of the user. Restoration to some other default level is not acceptable.

B. Wiring from dimming and switching panel(s) to central lighting processor, wall stations, preset

local controls and control interfaces shall be low voltage type Class 2 wiring (PELV). C. Central lighting control processor shall provide preset lighting scenes for up to 512 zones. D. Central lighting control processor shall be expandable to 16,384 zones when using multiple

processors. E. Central lighting control processor shall allow design of system off site and downloading upon

installation or modifications after installation. F. Central lighting control processor shall be capable of interfacing to other equipment via integral

RS232 interface and/or modem and/or RS232 wall stations. G. Central lighting control processor shall be capable of operating up to 192 wall stations, preset

local lighting controls and control interfaces-expandable to 6,144 when using multiple proces-sors.

H. Central lighting control processor shall have integral astronomical time clock. I. Central lighting control processor shall have a full internal battery backup that can store all sys-

tem memory for 1 year without power. It shall not be necessary to re-boot the central lighting control processor manually nor use any tape or floppy disc/hard drive to restore the system af-ter power outage. System shall automatically return to its previous state.

J. Manufacturer: Lutron (Quantum 1.5 Light Management Hub) – 2 required



260933 - 7

2.3 WIRELESS PROGRAMMING WALLSTATION (WS2)

A. LCD wall station must be capable of accepting software enhancements without the need for hardware modifications.

B. LCD screen must provide 320x240 pixels of resolution. Contrast and backlight brightness must

be adjustable. C. LCD wall station must automatically configure itself upon installation with all building zone

names, scene names, area names, scene intensities, fade times, delay times and time clock status from preprogrammed information from the system processor.

D. LCD wall station should be able to display zone names, scene names and area names in Eng-

lish, French, Spanish, Dutch, German, Italian or Portuguese if user enters this information into the processor.

E. LCD wall station must be capable of accessing every area, scene and zone within the associ-

ated architectural lighting control processor. LCD wall station must allow the user to: view and modify the scene status of an area, modify the zone intensities, view timeclock status for all ar-eas, enable/disable timeclock for an area, permanently modify zone intensities, zone delay times and zone fade times in an area via online or offline programming.

F. If power to lighting control system is lost, LCD wall station control must automatically update

when power is restored. Light levels in area where power to system processor is lost shall not change or turn off as a result.

G. LCD wall station shall have several configuration options for each area. Each option limits user

access to the system. Each area shall be configurable to any of the following access levels: Hidden, Monitor Only, Change scenes or Programmable.

H. Manufacturer: Lutron (LUT-iPAD-WALL-WH) Provide (1) for AC lobby, (1) for Le Meridien

Lobby & (1) 2nd floor ballroom

2.4 WALLSTATION – 8 SCENE (WS1)



260933 - 8

A. Faceplate shall attach using no visible means of attachment. B. Wall stations shall be engraved with appropriate zone and/or scene descriptions, furnished to

the manufacturer prior to fabrication. Size and style of engraving type shall be determined by the Architect or his consultant. Any silkscreened borders, logos, graduations, etc. shall use a graphic process that chemically bonds the graphics to the faceplate.

C. Wall stations shall provide an immediate local LED response upon button activation to indicate

that a system command has been requested. LED will remain lit contingent upon receiving sys-tem confirmation of the successful completion of the command.

D. Wall stations shall have removable button assemblies that can be replaced in the field to

change colors, button configurations and engraving. E. Wall stations shall have a backlighting option. F. Eight scene wall stations shall be capable of recalling 8 individual lighting scenes, as pro-

grammed, master raise/lower and off. G. Manufacturer: Lutron (#SO-4SN-WH-EGN & SO-4BN-WH-EGN) - Provide (1) at each service

entrance to the ballroom salons and (1) for each restaurant



260933 - 9



the manufacturer prior to fabrication. Size and style of engraving type shall be determined by the Architect or his consultant. Any silk-screened borders, logos, graduations, etc. shall use a graphic process that chemically bonds the graphics to the faceplate.




change colors, button configurations and engraving. E. Wall stations shall have a backlighting option. F. Four scene wall stations shall be capable of recalling 4 individual lighting scenes, as pro-

grammed, master raise/lower and off. G. Manufacturer: Lutron (#SO-4SN-WH-EGN) Provide (1) per meeting room



260933 - 10



the manufacturer prior to fabrication. Size and style of engraving type shall be determined by the Architect or his consultant. Any silkscreened borders, logos, graduations, etc. shall use a graphic process that chemically bonds the graphics to the faceplate.




change colors, button configurations and engraving. E. Wall stations shall have a backlighting option. F. Two scene wall stations shall have condition logic allowing each station to recall various preset

scenes, depending upon day of week and time of day, plus off. G. Manufacturer: Lutron (#SO-2BN-WH-EGN)



260933 - 11

2.7 ROOM ASSIGNMENT

A. For Ballroom and Partitioned meeting rooms with operable partitions, the A/V system shall be programmed with a page that shows the room configuration.

B. The A/V touchscreen shall show a room map with each partition indicated. The partitions shall

each be assigned a letter or number. The A/V page shall show the corresponding letter/num-ber as a button on the page. By touching the button, the A/V system shall communicate to the dimming system that the wall is closed. There shall be some graphic confirmation that informs the user whether the wall is open or closed – either the word ‘open’ or ‘closed’ appear at the respective wall or the wall changes a different color on the touchscreen – green for open, red for closed.

C. The dimming system in turn will operate the room lighting collectively or individually. D. The communication shall occur through the Network A/V interface – see 2.10

Le Meridien Ballroom Partition Plan



260933 - 12

2.8 DMX INTERFACE

A. Allows portable theatric board to have control of architectural lighting in each ballroom. B. Provide (2) input jacks for the grand ballroom plus a DMX signal combiner. C. The jacks shall be located at the front and rear of each room as indicated on the electrical

drawings. D. The combiner shall be mounted in a back of house location – network/telecom closet. Provide

120v power supply for operation. E. Manufacturer: Lutron #421 DMX combiner



260933 - 13

2.09 HALF DIMMED DUPLEX OUTLET (DP)

A. Faceplate shall attach using no visible means of attachment. B. The device shall provide user a means of automatically adjusting the illumination level of deco-

rative floor or table lamps in the public spaces. C. Top outlet shall have projecting hubs to prevent standard plugs from being connected. This

outlet shall be wired back to the central dimming panel. The other outlet will be standard and connected to unswitched/controlled power supply.

D. Decorative fixtures will require a special plug (Lutron #RP-FDU-10). Interior designer shall

specify this plug as part of the FF&E package E. Duplex outlets shall be mounted at the same height as other wall outlets and have the same

finish. Some outlets will be mounted in floors. An appropriate concrete pour box shall be sup-plied by others.

Manufacturer: Lutron (#CAR-20-HFDU-color) Allocate 20 for the project



260933 - 14

2.10 NETWORK AUDIO VISUAL INTERFACE

A. Integrates dimming system with digital A/V equipment using either RS232 communication or TCP/IP over Ethernet.

B. Enables A/V touch screen devices digital control of scene selection, scene lock, sequencing,

zone lock and zone raise/lower. Provides status monitoring through button feedback and scene-status updates

C. Power provided thru Quantum network link – 24vdc D. Device may be wall mounted or rack mounted in Telecom or Data closet – refer to electrical

plans for location. Provide LUT 5x10-ENC wall mount enclosure or LUT-19AV-1U for rack mount with A/V equipment.

E. Manufacturer: Lutron (#QSE-CI-NWK-E) Provide (2) for 2nd floor function spaces. Mount with

A/V equipment.



260933 - 15

2.11 EMERGENCY LIGHTING INTERFACE

A. Senses the normal (non-essential) line voltage on all three phases of normal power. When one or more phases are lost, the interface will send a signal to the Quantum bus supply causing it to enter the emergency lighting mode. Any lights controlled by the Quantum system will go to the emergency light level setting.

B. Provide separate - 24vdc power supply C. Device may be wall mounted to a standard 4”x4” junction box. Provide (1) device per 8 Quan-

tum network hubs. D. Manufacturer: Lutron (#LUT-ELI-3PH) Provide (1) device per Quantum network hub.



260933 - 16

2.12 DIMMING CONTROL ZONES:

Control

Zone Control

Type Lamp Type Lamp Watts Qty Total

Load Description Location

A1 DIM LEDMR16 ELV 100 1 100 Recessed adjustable Type RR3 AC Entry 1-06

A2 DIM LEDMR16 ELV 100 13 1300 Recessed adjustable Type RR3 AC Entry 1-06 & AC Lobby 1-03

A3 DIM LEDMR16 ELV 50 2 100 Recessed adjustable Type RR2 AC Lobby 1-03

A4 DIM Decorative 100 2 200 Decorative pendant LF-201 AC Registration 1-04

A5 DIM Decorative 300 2 600 Decorative pendants LF-204 AC Lounge 1-07

A6 DIM LEDMR16 ELV 100 3 300 Recessed adjustable Type RR3 AC Lobby 1-03

A7 DIM LEDMR16 ELV 100 2 200 Recessed adjustable Type RR3 Market 1-02

A8 DIM LEDMR16 ELV 50 10 500 Recessed adjustable Type RR5a AC Elevator Lobby 1-01

A9 DIM LEDMR16 ELV 100 8 800 Recessed adjustable Type RR3 FOH Corridor 1-14

A10 DIM LEDMR16 ELV 50 4 200 Recessed adjustable Type RR5 Restrooms 1-12 & 1-13

A11 DIM MLV LED 3w/lf 52 156 Mirror Lights – SL6a Restrooms 1-12 & 1-13

A12 DIM LEDMR16 ELV 50 18 900 Recessed adjustable Type RR5 Restrooms 1-12 & 1-13

A13 DIM LEDMR16 ELV 100 10 1000 Recessed adjustable Type RR3 AC Library 1-11

A14 DIM LEDMR16 ELV 100 7 700 Recessed adjustable Type RR3 AC Buffet 1-11

A15 DIM LED MLV 3 /lf 25 75 Linear tapelight Type SL6 AC Buffet 1-11

A16 DIM Decorative 200 1 200 Decorative pendant LF-203 AC Library 1-11

A17 DIM LED 1-10V 5.5 /lf 20 110 Recessed linear grazer Type SL5 1-06, 1-07, 1-09, 1-11

A18 DIM LEDMR16 ELV 100 2 200 Recessed adjustable Type RR3a AC Entry 1-06

A19 DIM LEDMR16 ELV 50 5 250 Recessed adjustable Type RR2 AC Entry 1-06

A20 DIM LEDMR16 LV 100 6 600 Recessed adjustable Type RR8 AC Entry 1-06

A21 DIM Decorative 300 2 600 Decorative pendants LF-200 AC Entry 1-06

A22 DIM LEDMR16 ELV 50 4 200 Recessed adjustable Type RR2 AC Lounge 1-07


A24 DIM Decorative 100 2 200 Decorative pendant AC Lounge 1-07



A27 DIM Decorative 100 1 200 Decorative pendant AC Lounge 1-07

A28 DIM LEDMR16 ELV 100 5 500 Recessed adjustable Type RR3a AC Lounge 1-07

A29 DIM LEDMR16 ELV 100 9 900 Recessed adjustable Type RR3 AC Breakfast 1-09

A30 DIM LEDMR16 ELV 50 2 100 Recessed adjustable Type RR2 AC Breakfast 1-09

A31 DIM Decorative 60 5 300 Decorative pendant AC Breakfast 1-09

A32 DIM LED ELV 4.95 /lf 72 357 Linear tapelight Type SL3 1-03, 1-07, 1-08, 1-09



260933 - 17

Control Zone

Control Type Lamp Type Lamp

Watts Qty Total Load Description Location

A33 DIM LED MLV 3 /lf 14 42 Linear tapelight Type SL6 AC Breakfast 1-09

A34 DIM LED MLV 3 /lf 28 84 Linear tapelight Type SL6 AC Bar 1-08

A35 DIM LED MLV 3 /lf 14 42 Linear tapelight Type SL6 AC Entry 1-06

A36 DIM LED MLV 3 /lf 51 153 Linear tapelight Type SL6 Market 1-02

A37 DIM LED ELV 3 /lf 14 42 Linear tapelight Type SL3 AC Bar 1-08

A38 DIM LED 0-10V 24/33 11/3 363 Ext adj Type OL1/OL1a AC Canopy & 1-ST02

A39 DIM LED 0-10v 31 12 372 Entry Accent – AC Canopy AC Canopy

A40 DIM LED ELV 100 2 200 Art Accent – RR2 AC Entry 1-06

A41 DIM LED 0-10v 3 /lf 22 66 Shelf Accent AC Entry/Library

B1 DIM LED ELV 9 5 45 Recessed adjustable Type RR6 LM Hub 1-23

B2 DIM LED 0-10V 36 8 288 Recessed adjustable Type RL3 LM Hub 1-23

B3 DIM Decorative 300 2 600 Decorative Pendant LF-100 LM Registration 1-22

B4 DIM LED 0-10V 9 /lf 20 180 Recessed linear Type RF1 LM Registration 1-22


B6 DIM Not Used LM Hub 1-23

B7 DIM LED 0-10V 36 2 72 Recessed adjustable Type RL3 LM Staircase

B8 DIM LED 1-10V 5.5 /lf 13 72 Curtain Accent Type SL4 LM Hub 1-23

B9 DIM LED 0-10V 36 11 396 Recessed adjustable Type RL3c LM Elevator Lobby 1-21

B10 DIM LED MLV 3 /lf 18 54 Linear tapelight Type SL6 LM Hub 1-23

B11 DIM LED 0-10V 9 /lf 20 180 Recessed linear Type RF1 LM Elevator Lobby 1-21

B12 DIM LEDMR16 MLV 18 2 36 Recessed adjustable Type RR3 FOH Corridor 1-14

B13 DIM LED 0-10V 36 3 108 Recessed adjustable Type RL3c LM Hub 1-23

B14 DIM Incandescent 100 4 400 Decorative Sconce LF-103 LM Hub 1-23

B15 DIM Decorative 300 1 300 Decorative pendant – LF-101 LM Hub 1-23

B16 DIM LED 0-10V 36 8 288 Recessed adjustable Type RL3c LM Hub 1-23

B17 DIM LED 1-10V 5.5 /lf 45 248 Recessed linear Type SL4 LM Hub 1-23


B19 DIM Decorative 300 1 600 Decorative pendant – LF-102 LM Hub 1-23

B20 DIM Decorative 60 10 600 Decorative pendant LM Latitude Bar 1-27

B21 DIM LED 0-10V 36 8 288 Recessed adjustable Type RL3a LM Latitude Bar 1-27

B22 DIM LED ELV 3 /lf 19 67 Linear tapelight Type SL3 LM Latitude Bar 1-27

B23 DIM LED MLV 3 /lf 11 33 Linear tapelight Type SL3 LM Latitude Bar 1-27

B24 DIM LED MLV 3 /lf 168 504 Linear tapelight Type SL6 LM Latitude Bar 1-27



260933 - 18

Control Zone



B25 DIM LED MLV 3 /lf 18 66 Linear tapelight Type SL6 LM Hub 1-23

B26 DIM LED 0-10V 9 17 153 In-grade uplight Type GL1 South Facade

B27 DIM LED 0-10V 12.2 /lf 42 513 Exterior pendant Type OL2a South Canopy

B28 DIM LED 0-10V 12.2 /lf 50 610 Exterior pendant Type OL2 South Canopy

B29 DIM Decorative - 3 - Decorative pendant – LF303 LM Staircase

B30 DIM LED 0-10V 33 2 66 Recessed adjustable Type RL5 LM Staircase

B31 DIM Decorative 100 4 400 Decorative Sconces South Facade

C1 DIM LED 0-10V 36 12 432 Recessed adjustable Type RL3 Prefunction 2-02



C4 DIM LED 0-10V 24 32 768 Surface linear cove Type SL1 Prefunction 2-02

DIM LED 0-10V 6 40 240 Surface linear cove Type SL1a Prefunction 2-02

C5 DIM LED 0-10V 33 10 330 Recessed downlight Type RL1 Prefunction 2-03

DIM LED 0-10V 33 16 528 Recessed downlight Type RL1a Prefunction 2-03, 2-36

C6 DIM Decorative - 3 - Decorative pendant Prefunction 2-03, 2-36

C7 DIM 12 38 456 Surface linear cove Type SL2 Prefunction 2-03, 2-36

DIM 3 18 54 Surface linear cove Type SL2a Prefunction 2-03, 2-36

C8 DIM LED MLV 3 /lf 21.5 65 Linear tapelight Type SL6 Prefunction 2-03, 2-36


C10 DIM LED 0-10V 24 25 600 Surface linear cove Type SL1 Prefunction 2-03

DIM LED 0-10V 6 3 18 Surface linear cove Type SL1a Prefunction 2-03

C11 DIM LED 0-10V 36 6 216 Downlights Type RL3/RL1 Prefunction 2-03

C12 DIM LED 0-10V 36 5 180 Recessed adjustable Type RL3 AC/FS Elev Lobby 2-01

C13 DIM LED 0-10V 24 11 264 Surface linear cove Type SL1 AC/FS Elev Lobby 2-01

DIM LED 0-10V 6 8 48 Surface linear cove Type SL1a AC/FS Elev Lobby 2-01



DIM LED 0-10V 33 1 33 Recessed adjustable Type RL1 Prefunction 2-03


DIM LED 0-10V 33 1 33 Recessed adjustable Type RL1 Prefunction 2-03



260933 - 19

Control Zone



D1 DIM LED 0-10V 40 7 280 Recessed wall wash Type RL2a LM Ballroom 2-31

D2 DIM LED 0-10V 40 2 80 Recessed downlight Type RL1b LM Ballroom 2-31

D3 DIM LED 0-10V 40 3 120 Recessed DL Type RL1b/RL3b LM Ballroom 2-31

D4 DIM LED 0-10V 40 6 240 Recessed Adj Type RL3b LM Ballroom 2-31


D6 DIM LED 0-10V 40 7 280 Recessed adjustable Type RL1b LM Ballroom 2-31


D8 DIM LED ELV 1200 1 1200 Decorative Pendant LM Ballroom 2-31


D9 DIM ELV 35 4 140 Decorative Ceiling at Entry LM Ballroom 2-31


D11 DIM ELV 30 3 90 Decorative Sconces LM Ballroom 2-31

D12 DIM ELV 30 1 30 Decorative Sconce LM Ballroom 2-31

D13 DIM LED 0-10v 12/3 32/4 396 Indirect Cove LM Ballroom 2-31




D17 DIM LED 0-10V 40 13 520 Recessed DL Type RL1b LM Ballroom 2-31

D18 DIM LED 0-10V 1200 1 1200 Decorative Pendant LM Ballroom 2-31

D19 DIM LED 0-10v 40 12 480 Recessed adjustable Type RL3b LM Ballroom 2-31





D24 DIM LED 0-10V 40 2 80 Recessed DL Type RL1b/RL3b LM Ballroom 2-31




D28 DIM LED 0-10V 40 6 240 Recessed DL Type RL3b LM Ballroom 2-31


D30 DIM LED 0-10V 1200 1 1200 Decorative Pendant LM Ballroom 2-31



D33 DIM ELV 30 3 90 Decorative Sconces LM Ballroom 2-31



260933 - 20

Control Zone





D36 SPARE LM Ballroom 2-31

E1 DIM LED 0-10V 33 14 462 Recessed adjustable Type RL1a LM Meeting Room 2-33

E2 DIM LED 0-10V 12/3 20/6 258 Surface linear cove Type SL2 LM Meeting Room 2-33

E3 DIM LED 0-10V 33 4 132 Recessed adjustable Type RL2 LM Meeting Room 2-33

E4 DIM LED 0-10V 33 4 132 Recessed adjustable Type RL2 LM Meeting Room 2-33

E5 DIM LED ELV 9 8 72 Recessed adjustable Type RR1 LM Meeting Room 2-33

E6 DIM LED 0-10V 33 6 198 Recessed downlights Type RL1 LM Meeting Room 2-33

F1 DIM LED 0-10V 33 14 462 Recessed adjustable Type RL1a LM Meeting Room 2-34

F2 DIM LED 0-10V 12/3 20/6 258 Surface linear cove Type SL2 LM Meeting Room 2-34

F3 DIM LED 0-10V 33 4 132 Recessed adjustable Type RL2 LM Meeting Room 2-34

F4 DIM LED 0-10V 33 4 132 Recessed adjustable Type RL2 LM Meeting Room 2-34

F5 DIM LED ELV 9 4 36 Recessed adjustable Type RR1 LM Meeting Room 2-34

F6 DIM LED 0-10V 33 6 198 Recessed downlights Type RL1 LM Meeting Room 2-34

G1 DIM LED 0-10V 33 8 264 Recessed adjustable Type RL1a LM Boardroom 2-07

G2 DIM LED 0-10V 12/3 10/2 126 Surface cove Type SL2/SL2a LM Boardroom 2-07

G3 DIM LED 0-10V 36 4 144 Recessed adjustable Type RL3 LM Boardroom 2-07

H1 DIM LED 0-10V 33 8 264 Recessed adjustable Type RL1a LM Meeting Room 2-04

H2 DIM LED 0-10V 12/3 8/8 120 Surface linear cove Type SL1 LM Meeting Room 2-04

H3 DIM LED 0-10V 36 2 72 Recessed adjustable Type RL3 LM Meeting Room 2-04



J1 DIM LED 0-10V 33 8 264 Recessed adjustable Type RL1a LM Meeting Room 2-04

J2 DIM LED 0-10V 8/10 8/8 144 Surface linear cove Type SL1 LM Meeting Room 2-04

J3 DIM LED 0-10V 36 2 72 Recessed adjustable Type RL3 LM Meeting Room 2-04

J4 DIM LED 0-10V 36 2 72 Recessed adjustable Type RL3 LM Meeting Room 2-04



260933 - 21

Control Zone



K1 DIM LED MR16 MLV 9 3 27 Recessed downlight Type GR4 LM Elevator Lobby 20-02

K2 DIM LED 0-10V 36 4 144 Recessed adjustable Type RL3 LM Elevator Lobby 20-02

K3 DIM LED 0-10V 33 8 264 Recessed adjustable Type RL1 Common Foyer 20-09

K4 DIM LED 0-10V 8 /lf 56 448 Recessed linear Type OL5 Terrace Canopy

K5 DIM LED MR16 MLV 9 8 72 Planter adjustable Type OL6 Terrace Planter

K6 DIM LED MLV 3 15 45 Ingrade bollard Type OL7 Terrace Planter bed

K7 DIM LED MLV 9 6 54 Wall mounted steplight Type WL1 Terrace Stair

K8 DIM LED 0-10V 25.3 5 127 Exterior Sconce Type OL4 Terrace Canopy

K9 DIM LED 0-10V 3 40 120 Ingrade paver light Type OM1 Terrace Pavers

K10 DIM LED MR16 MLV 9 5 45 Planter adjustable Type OL6 Terrace Planter

K11 DIM LED 0-10V 3 Lf 23 99 Bar Die Wall Accent Roof Bar

K12 DIM LED 0-10v 3 Lf 35 105 Bar Task Light Roof Bar

K13 DIM LED 0-10V 3 Lf 20 60 Bar Shelving Roof Bar

K14 DIM Incandescent 40 15 600 Decorative Pendants Roof Bar

L1 DIM Incandescent 100 3 300 Decorative Ext Sconce Restaurant Patio

L2 DIM LED 0-10V 20 3 60 Recessed Downlights RL9 Restaurant Entry

L3 DIM LED 0-10V 20 4 80 Recessed Downlights RL6a Bar Seating – Window

L4 DIM LED 0-10V 20 5 100 Recessed Adj Accent RL6a Restaurant Bar

L5 DIM Incandescent 200 1 200 Decorative Pendant – LF701 Restaurant Bar

L6 DIM LED 0-10V 20 5 100 Recessed Downlight RL6a Restaurant Bar

L7 DIM LED 0-10V 20 8 160 Wall Accent – booths Restaurant

L8 DIM LED ELV 30 Lf 32 960 Track Lights Restaurant Bar

L9 DIM LED ELV 30 Lf 37 1110 Track Lights Restaurant

L10 DIM LED 0-10V 20 4 80 Recessed Downlights RL6a Bar Seating – Lobby

L11 DIM LED 0-10V 5.5 Lf 51 281 Curtain Accents Restaurant

L12 DIM LED 0-10V 5.5 Lf 12 66 Curtain Accents - center Restaurant

L13 DIM Incandescent 60 3 180 Decorative Sconce LF-705 Restaurant

L14 DIM Incandescent 150 2 300 Decorative Pendant LF-702 Restaurant

L15 DIM LED 0-10V 20 4 80 Recessed Downlights RL6a Restaurant

L16 DIM Incandescent 150 2 300 Decorative Pendant LF-703 Restaurant

L17 DIM LED 0-10V 20 4 80 Wall Accent – RL6a Restaurant

L18 DIM LED 0-10v 20 6 120 Wall Wash – Kitchen Restaurant



260933 - 22

Control Zone



L19 DIM LED 0-10V 20 5 100 Counter Accent – Kitchen Restaurant

L20 DIM Incandescent 60 5 300 Decorative Sconce LF-704 Semi Private Dining

L21 DIM LED ELV 30 Lf 61 1830 Track Semi Private Dining

L22 DIM LED MLV 20 Lf 15 300 Wine Wall Accent Semi Private Dining

L23 DIM LED 0-10v 20 3 60 Recessed Accents RL6a Semi Private Dining

L24 DIM LED 0-10v 36 9 324 Recessed Downlights Kitchen - Right

L25 DIM LED 0-10v 36 5 180 Recessed Downlights Kitchen – Front

L26 DIM LED 0-10v 36 17 612 Recessed Downlights Kitchen - Center

L27 DIM LED 0-10v 36 5 180 Recessed Downlights Kitchen - Left

L28 DIM LED 0-10v 3w Lf 19 57 Bar Die Wall Accent Restaurant Bar

L29 DIM LED 0-10v 3w Lf 9 27 Task Accent Restaurant Bar

L30 DIM LED 0-10v 3w Lf 18 54 Liquor Shelves Restaurant Bar



260933 - 23

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment shall be installed utilizing manufacturer’s catalogue cut sheets and installation in-structions and in accordance with these specifications.

B. Contractor shall furnish all equipment, labor, system setup and other services necessary for the

proper installation of the products/system as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. System setup shall include defining each dimmer’s load type, assigning each load to a zone and setting the control functions.

3.2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

A. Normal / Emergency Panels

1. Upon the loss of normal input power, a panel operating from a normal/emergency feed shall immediately turn on all circuits within that panel to full-on condition when emergency input power is present.

2. During the presence of normal power, circuits designated as emergency circuits shall be controlled via the same controls as circuits designated as normal. If both normal and emergency circuits are on the same zone of control, all circuits shall react identically to a control intensity change.

3. Emergency power feed may be provided by an emergency generator, a UPS system or an IPS system with true sine wave output and a maximum of 10% THD when driving dimmed loads. The generator, UPS system, or IPS system must be capable of operating under no load conditions. Alternatively, the generator can be turned on only under emer-gency conditions.

4. Normal/Emergency panels shall be fed by a single Normal/emergency feed through the use of a line side (upstream) normal/emergency power transfer switch supplied by others.

5. Under emergency input power feed, unless otherwise indicated all dimmers shall operate at 100% of dimmer output voltage. Under these conditions, semiconductor device will be in the full-on state.

6. Under emergency input power feed, if required, dimmer shall be capable of operating lighting load at an emergency level lower than 100% dimmer output voltage. Panels shall provide means to modify this emergency output level via panel processor without requir-ing external programming devices.

7. Under emergency input power feed, all local control stations shall be inoperable. Once normal power is restored, all lighting zones shall revert back to their status prior to the emergency condition without requiring any action on the part of the user. Restoration to OFF, ON or a default level is not acceptable.

B. Emergency Panels

1. Upon the loss of normal input power, a panel operating from an emergency feed shall im-

mediately turn all circuits within the panel to full-on condition when emergency input power is present.

2. Emergency power feed may be provided by an emergency generator, a UPS system or an IPS system with true sine wave output and a maximum of 10% THD when driving dimmed loads. The generator, UPS system, or IPS system must be capable of operating under no load conditions. Alternatively, the generator can be turned on only under emer-gency conditions.

3. Under emergency input power feed, unless otherwise indicated all dimmers shall operate at 100% of dimmer output voltage. Under these conditions, semiconductor device will be



260933 - 24

in the full-on state. 4. Under emergency input power feed, if required, dimmer shall be capable of operating

lighting load at an emergency level lower than 100% dimmer output voltage. Panels shall provide means to modify this emergency output level via panel processor without requir-ing external programming devices.

5. Under emergency input power feed, all local control stations shall be inoperable. Once normal power is restored, all lighting zones shall revert back to their status prior to the emergency condition without requiring any action on the part of the user. Restoration to OFF, ON or a default level is not acceptable.

6. Illumination levels shall be field programmable to meet local code requirements for Emer-gency power conditions. Such options include, but are not limited to, providing a con-stant minimal light level for emergency circuits during normal operation or providing full function dimming under emergency power.

END OF SECTION


MCLA, Inc. INTERIOR LIGHTING – PUBLIC AREAS 2016-06-13

265100 - 1

SECTION 265100

INTERIOR LIGHTING – PUBLIC AREAS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide and install lighting fixtures as shown on drawings and as specified in this and all related Sections.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. 265600.00 Exterior Luminaries, Lamps, Ballasts, Standards. 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. “Alternate Manufacturers” are defined as those manufacturers whose products equal to the specified product as to design intent of performance.

1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide all lighting fixtures as shown complete with all lamps, completely wired, controlled and securely attached to supports.

B. Where a catalog number and a narrative or pictorial descriptions are provided, the written

description shall take precedence and prevail.

C. General Contractor shall provide electrical subcontractor with entire lighting specification (including fixture illustrations and sketches); electrical subcontractor shall provide each specified Manufacturer with complete information about the fixtures they will supply.

D. Type of fixtures shall be as indicated alphanumerically and as specified.

E. Fixture details shown may be modified by the Manufacturer provided all of the following

conditions have been met:

1. Fixture performance is equal or improved; 2. Structural, mechanical, electrical, safety and maintenance characteristics are equal or

improved; 3. Cost to the Owner is reduced or equal. 4. Modifications have been reviewed by the Architect and have been approved by the

Architect in writing.

1.5 STANDARDS

A. The standards and regulating committees referred in this specification and to which compliance with is required are: 1. UL Underwriters Laboratories 2. NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory



265100 - 2

3. NEC National Electric Code 4. ANSI American National Standards Institute 5. ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials 6. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 7. IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

B. All fixtures and assembled components shall be new, of good quality, and be approved by and

bear the label of UL for the applicable location and conditions (wet, damp, dry, etc.) or other approved testing agencies, i.e., CSA, ETL, unless otherwise specified in writing.

C. All fixtures shall meet all required local, state and/or national building, electrical and energy

codes and regulations. 1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. For standard catalog items with no modification, submit catalog cut sheets prepared by the Manufacturer which clearly show all elements to be supplied and all corresponding product data (including lamping; ballast Manufacturer and model number; voltage; accessories or option and any miscellaneous items detailed in the written description of the specification.) If cut sheet show more than one (1) fixture type, all non-applicable information shall be crossed out.

B. For standard cataloged fixtures:

1. Submit one sample cone for each fixture type for review. Submit a certificate of

compliance with Alzak finish requirements with all requests for approval. 2. When more than one louver panel occurs in a fixture, submit as a part of shop drawings

the dimensional layout of individual louver panels and supporting “tee” members.

C. For custom fixtures, modified fixtures or linear fluorescent fixtures mounted in continuous rows, submit a sepia drawing prepared by the Manufacturer showing all details of construction, lengths of runs, lamping layout, pendant locations, power locations, finishes and list of materials. Drawing must be to scale. Contractor shall provide Manufacturer with field dimensions where required. If scallop shields, wallwash reflectors or baffles are required, drawings shall indicate relative position to wall or adjacent vertical surface.

D. For all submittals under paragraphs A through C above, Manufacturer shall provide submittals

with fixture installation instruction sheets.

E. For all submittals under paragraphs A through C above, Manufacturer shall provide submittals within two weeks of receipt of order. All submittals shall have project name and fixture type clearly shown.

F. Fixture cuts and shop drawings shall be submitted in quantities and format as described in the

general conditions section in the specification.

G. The Architect shall make the final determination as to whether or not the submittal contains sufficient information and reserves the right to request a shop drawing if the fixture cut is insufficient.

H. Cold Cathode and Neon: Shop drawings shall be submitted for approval and maintenance.

Shop drawings shall include scale plans and details showing method of installation of lampholders, lamps, reflectors, transformer housings and secondary feeds, as well as a complete bill of materials. Contractor shall furnish field dimensions to Manufacturers so that



265100 - 3

they may properly fabricate lamps to fit. Field dimensions required shall be shown on shop drawings. Shop drawings shall be revised after receipt of field dimensions to show exact locations or lampholders and lamps. A copy of these revised shop drawings shall be given to the Owner for his use in lamp replacements and maintenance. Full-size cartoons of lamp configuration shall be submitted, when required.

I. Mock-ups

1. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide a mock-up of the lighting fixture

or lighting systems as indicated in the fixture description. The mock-up shall be erected within a time period and in a location that is acceptable to the Architect.

2. The mock-up installation shall closely conform to the conditions of the actual installation as to: height, distance from ceiling, number and type of lamps, material, color and etc. The Contractor shall submit a written description of each proposed mock-up with drawing in order to obtain the Architect’s approval prior to commencement of each mock-up.

3. The purpose of the mock-up will be to study the general appearance and performance of the intended lighting systems. At that time, certain minimal test variations may be requested as to lamp location, lamp type, reflector shape, color and etc. Final modifications, if any, shall be considered a part of these Specifications and shall be accomplished with no additional cost to the Owner.

J. Samples

1. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide a sample(s) fixture as indicated in

the Lighting Fixture Schedule. When samples are called for the Manufacturer shall provide two working samples complete with lamp, ballast (rated for 120 Volt operation) and 1800mm pig-tail with 3-prong Edison plug.

2. The sample(s) shall be shipped to a location that is determined by the Architect. Shipping and return shipping costs shall be provided as part of the contract.

3. The purpose of the sample is to review manufacturing techniques, detailing, lamping and scale. Sample fixtures must be approved prior to fabrication of fixtures for the project. Minor modifications, if any, shall be considered part of these Specifications and shall be accomplished with no additional cost to the Owner.

4. Sample fixtures may not be used on the project. 1.9 EXTRA STOCK

A. Furnish to the owner an store at the site where directed, extra stock of each lamp – 5% minimum, ballast – 1% minimum and globes, lenses or lamp guards – 1% or 2 minimum.

1.10 WARRANTIES

A. All fixtures and workmanship shall be guaranteed free of defects and fully operational for a minimum of one year after the acceptance of the project by the Owner. Any fixtures or workmanship found to be defective during the warranty period will be either fixed or replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.

B. Ballasts for fluorescent fixtures shall be covered by a five year warranty and high intensity

discharge fixtures shall be covered by a two year warranty against defects in workmanship or material. Warranty shall include in-warranty service program providing for payment of authorized labor charges incurred in replacement of inoperative, in-warranty ballasts.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS



265100 - 4

2.1 GENERAL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Ferrous mounting hardware and accessories shall be finished using either a galvanic or

phosphate primer/baked paint processes to prevent corrosion and discoloration of adjacent materials.

B. For weatherproof and vapor tight installation, painted finishes of fixtures and accessories shall

be weatherproof enamel using proper primers or hot dipped galvanized and bonderized epoxy, in accordance with Manufacturer’s requirements. Unless otherwise specified all painted surfaces shall have a life expectancy of not less than twenty years.

1. Hangers shall be conduit with chemically resistant, weatherproof, baked enamel finish. 2. Where dissimilar metal parts come in contact with each other, apply to both surfaces a

coating material to prevent corrosion. 3. Colors shall be as specified in the Lighting Fixture Schedule.

C. Fasteners shall be manufactured of non-magnetic stainless steel or anodized aluminum, except

in indoor applications where galvanized steel shall be acceptable.

D. Fixtures shall be free of light leaks and shall be designed to provide sufficient ventilation of lamps and ballasts including vent holes where required.

E. Outdoor fixtures shall have wire mesh corrosion resistant screens in the vent holes properly

sized to prevent incursion of insects, small animals, and/or other small rodents.

F. All sheet metal work shall be free from tool marks and dents and shall have accurate angles bent as sharp as compatible with the gauges of the required metal. All intersections and joints shall be formed true and of adequate strength and structural rigidity to prevent any distortion after assembly. All sheet metal shall be free of light leaks. All edges shall be finished so there are no sharp edges exposed. All miters shall be in accurate alignment with abutting intersecting members. Piecing of plates in individual runs in single plans and the used of spliced pieces or filler material to cover defective workmanship shall not be acceptable. Sheet metal work shall be properly fabricated so that planes will not deform (i.e. become concave or convex, due to normal expected ambient and operating conditions).

G. Lampholders shall hold lamps securely against normal vibrations and maintenance handling.

Provide solid nickel or nickel-and-silver-plated contacts in lampholders for following types of lamps:

1. Mogul screw base incandescent, metal halide, and high pressure sodium. 2. Lamps in outdoor fixtures. 3. Tungsten-halogen lamps.

H. Wiring channels and lampholder mountings shall be rigid and accurately made.

I. Reflector Cones:

1. Provide 45° lamp and lamp image cut-off unless otherwise specified. In fixtures where

upper reflector is separate from cone, cut-off shall be 45° unless otherwise specified. 2. Plastic materials shall not be used for reflector cones or aperture plates. 3. Fixtures in which reflector cones are riveted or welded to housing or where removal of

cone requires pressure to be applied to finished surface of reflector shall not be acceptable.



265100 - 5

4. Cone flange shall be formed as an integral part of the cone and shall have identical color and finish as the cone, except as shown. The flange major surface shall be perpendicular to the cone axis. The width of the flange shall adequately cover the ceiling opening without light leaks. No fixture parts (housing, mounting frames, etc.) shall be visible between the ceiling surface and the edge of the cone flange. The same requirement shall be applicable to fixtures where main reflector extends down to the bottom edge of the fixture without a separate cone. In such case, the flange shall be formed as an integral part of the main reflector.

5. Reflector cones shall be manufactured of uniform gauge, not less than 0.032” thick, high purity aluminum Alcoa 3002 alloy free for spin marks or other defects or blemishes caused during manufacturing.

6. The finish of the inner surface of the reflector shall be highly specular as produced under the Alzak process. The reflector shall have an anodic coating of not less than four mils thick. The reflector inner surface shall be free of water spotting and shall maintain a reflectivity ratio or not less than 83% on clear specular finish. The reflector shall have a low iridescence finish free from multiple colors seen from normal viewing angles. Colors shall be derived from dyes supplied by Sandoz Company or approved equal.

7. The reflecting surface of the cone shall be tested for proper sealing. Test per ASTM B136-63T.

8. Fixtures with Alzak reflector cones, unless otherwise specified, must be furnished by the same Manufacturer.

9. Reflector cone retention devices shall not deform cone in any manner whatsoever. 10. Submit a certificate of compliance with Alzak finish requirements with all requests for

approval.

J. Lenses: 1. Fresnel:

a. Lenses shall have uniform brightness throughout the entire visible area at angles

from 45° to 90° from vertical, without bright spots or striations. b. Lens shall have opaque risers; color shall be as specified in Lighting Fixture

Schedule. c. Finish of visible regress surface of door shall be matte baked enamel paint, special

color as selected by Architect. d. All fixtures with fresnel lenses, unless otherwise specified, must be furnished by the

same Manufacturer. 2. Glass:

a. Flat glass lenses shall be heat tempered low iron glass unless otherwise noted. b. Glass finishes, i.e. sandblasting, etching, polishing shall be performed as described

in the fixture description.

3. Acrylic a. Lenses shall be of injection molded crystal clear material 100% virgin acrylic. For

lenses with male pattern of pyramids or cones, specified minimum thickness refers to distance from flat surface to base of pyramids (cones), or thickness of undisturbed material. For lenses with female pattern, specified minimum thickness refers to overall thickness of material.

b. Lenses shall fully eliminate lamp images when viewed from all directions within the 45° to 90° angle from vertical when the ratio of lamp spacing to the distance from lamp underside to top of lenses does not exceed 1.50. Within the viewing angle



265100 - 6

from 0° to 45° the ratio of maximum brightness (under a lamp) to minimum brightness (between lamps) shall not exceed 3 to 1.

K. Louvers:

1. Parabolic:

a. Louvers shall be continuously bound in channel formed frame, finish and color as

specified or as selected. b. Louver shall provide a minimum visual cut-off to the lamp of 45°. c. The finish of the inner surface of the reflector shall be highly specular as produced

under the Alzak process. The reflector shall have an anodic coating of not less than four mils thick. The reflector inner surface shall be free of water spotting and shall maintain a reflectivity ratio of not less than 83% on clear specular finish. The reflector shall have a low iridescence finish free from multiple colors seen from normal viewing angles.

2. Flat Blade: a. Provide flat blade louvers within formed frame, finish and color as specified. b. Louvers to provide minimum of 45° degree cut-off from lamp image. c. Blade thickness to minimum 3.125mm flat steel.

L. In adjustable fixtures, aiming and positive locking devices shall be provided.

M. Fixtures with an adjustable lamp and using a lamp with an asymmetrical light pattern shall have

an aiming stop which can be permanently set so that the lamp shall remain correctly positioned after service or relamping.

N. Fluorescent Fixtures:

1. Hot Cathode:

a. Housing

1. No. 22 minimum gauge steel, bonderized or equal rust protected, or No. 16

gauge aluminum rigid construction, suitable for continuous row mounting where indicated.

2. Finish: Baked enamel paint finish unless otherwise specified, color as specified or as selected.

3. Exterior Fixture Finishes:

a) Unless otherwise specified, all painted surfaces shall have an outdoor life expectancy of not less than 20 years. Surfaces shall be prepared, primed, and material applied in accordance with the Manufacturer’s requirements.

b) Color: Colors shall be as specified in the Lighting Fixture Schedule.

b. Reflector: Minimum 85% reflectance. c. Lightshields:

1. Frames: Provide extruded aluminum frames with mitered corners filled and

ground smooth. Provide fixture with concealed hinges and invisible latching. 2. No cross bars shall be permitted over lightshields.



265100 - 7

d. Lampholders:

1. Lampholders shall be UL listed, and meet IEC-60400, “International

Standard: Lampholders for tubular fluorescent lamps and startholders.”

e. For rapid start lamps on single ballasts, provide one (1) grounding lampholder per lamp. Lampholders operating with open circuit voltage in excess of 300 volts shall be safety type and shall open supply circuit when lamp is removed from lampholder. 1. Mount lamps used in rapid start circuits 430MA and below: within 12.5mm of

grounded metal as long as the lamp. 2. 800mA and 1500mA lamps: mount within 25mm of grounded metal as long

as the lamp.

f. Fluorescent fixtures shall conform to NEMA Standards, including references to fixture dimensions and temperature ratings.

g. Ballasts shall be electronic high power factor (greater than 90%), ballast factor (greater than 87%) and approved by UL (UL 935 listed). Ballasts shall be certified for voltage and number of lamps specified and equipped with internal thermal protectors unless otherwise specified. 1. Ballasts shall have a Crest Factor of less than one and seven tenths. 2. Ballasts for indoor applications shall be “Class P.” 3. Provide multi-lamp ballasts where possible including continuous rows of one-

lamp fixtures, and one-lamp ballasts only where the fixture layout does not permit the use of multi-lamp ballasts.

4. Ballast shall be a dedicated ballast to operate a specific lamp, i.e., T8 ballasts specifically for a T8 lamp.

5. All ballasts shall operate at the voltage as described in the Lighting Fixture Schedule and confirmed on electrical drawings. Ballasts shall operate lamps properly through the following supply voltage ranges:

a) Rated voltage +/- 10% b) Universal voltage of 108 to 305V on 50 or 60Hz supply

6. Ballast shall tolerate sustained open circuit and short circuit output conditions without damage.

7. Frequency shall be 20 Khz or greater except as noted without any discernable flicker (<3% flicker index).

8. Ballast shall have input current total harmonic distortion not to exceed 10% of the fundamental harmonic (60 Hz).

9. Ballast shall not contain PCB materials. 10. Ballast shall provide transient immunity as recommended by ANSI C62.41-

1991 location Category A2. 11. Ballast shall be encapsulated to ensure maximum thermal and structural

integrity. 12. Ballast minimum sound ratings:

a) 265 mA: Class ‘A’ b) 430 mA: Class ‘A’ c) 800 mA: Class ‘B’ d) 1500 mA: Class ‘C’



265100 - 8

13. All fixtures installed in exterior or unheated interior spaces shall be supplied with ballasts which start lamps down to 0°F unless noted otherwise.

14. Ballasts fro T5, T5HO,and CFL lamps shall incorporate auto resetting lamp shutdown circuitry for end of lamp life protection thereby allowing fro re-lamping without the need to cycle power.

15. Program Rapid start ballasts shall be used when the lamps are to be frequently turned on/off (with cycles of less than 3 hours). Otherwise ballast shall provide instant starting sequence consistent with ANSI standard C82.11-1993.

16. Ballast shall be Manufactured in an ISO 9002 certified facility. 17. Manufacturer shall have minimum 15 years of manufacturing experience. 18. Ballast, unless specified otherwise, shall be same Manufacturer and model in

each fixture of the same type. Acceptable ballast Manufacturers unless otherwise noted are:

a. Philips/Advance b. Universal Lighting Technologies c. Osram/Sylvania d. Lutron

h. Lighting fixtures recessed in a hung ceiling where the space above the hung ceiling is used as a plenum chamber for either supply or return air for the air conditioning system shall be designed, Manufactured and wired to conform to NEC Article 300-22.

2. Cold Cathode/Neon: In the following description, “cold cathode” refers to lamps with an 18-25mm diameter; “neon” refers to lamps with an 8-15mm diameter. a. Lamp color, size, and shape shall be as specified, fully evacuated before filling with

high purity gas. b. Lampholders shall be UL listed 7500 volts minimum. Cold cathode and neon

lampholders shall be dry-process or wet-process glazed porcelain or Pyrex glass. All lampholders shall be supplied with spring bronze clip contacts which shall provide electrical contact and support by lamp supports at a minimum of 450mm apart. When adjacent lampholders are of opposite polarity, lampholders shall be located at a minimum of 50mm apart. Lamp holders shall be recessed unless otherwise specified.

c. Maximum nominal lamp length shall be 2400mm or 8’-0”. d. For continuous lamp runs, the space between lighted lamp ends shall not exceed

2.5”. e. For all neon tube bend backs, lamp shall be painted with black or gray block-out

paint as Manufactured by Stazon or approved equal. If paint color is required to match adjacent surfaces, it shall be applied only over block-out paint.

f. Transformers for non-dimming installations shall be high power factor type, voltage as specified in the Lighting Fixture Schedule. Transformers for dimming installations shall be 115-120 volt, 60 hertz, low (normal) power factor type. Fixture Manufacturer shall confirm compatibility of transformer with dimming system Manufacturer. Secondary voltage shall be as required by lamp footage, cold weather usage and dimming. Transformers shall be UL listed, self-contained in a 1.61mm steel housing, with separate secondary and primary wiring compartments and equipped with a disconnect switch which shall automatically disconnect the primary when the wiring compartment cover is removed. Transformers shall have a remote capacitor in a ventilated compartment so that the transformer does not have to be removed in case of capacitor failure. Transformers shall be installed in



265100 - 9

an accessible and ventilated area (37.78°C maximum ambient temperature) with air circulation on all sides to dissipate approximately 100 watts each. Each transformer shall be installed as close to the lamp as possible in order to keep the secondary feeds as short and equal in length as possible. Wiring compartments shall be accessible if mounted above ceilings, in partitions, or in any location other than electrical closets.

g. Operating current for cold cathode shall be 120 mA or 200 mA, as specified. Ballasts only shall be used for 200 mA operating current. Operating current for neon shall be 30 mA or 60 mA, as specified.

h. Secondary feeds shall be UL listed blue GT015 cable. Only one (1) cable shall be installed in 12.5mm PVC rigid plastic or metal conduit. Conduits shall be installed at a minimum of 50mm apart unless polarity is maintained. If plastic conduit is used, component parts shall be grounded. Cold cathode lighting not controlled by dimmers shall be mid-point grounded.

i. Adjustable snap-on reflectors for cold cathode lamps, when specified shall be of high reflectance white extruded plastic. Reflectors shall snap onto the lamps and be adjustable to direct the illumination.

j. Lamps, lampholders, secondary feeds and transformers shall be installed in strict accordance with shop drawings. Lamps and lampholders shall be kept at a minimum of 50mm from metal. Contractor shall make sure that all lamps make secure electrical contact in the lampholders. Switches or circuit breakers controlling cold cathode lighting transformers shall be capable of being locked in the open position.

k. All neon and cold cathode fixtures shall be supplied electrically through distribution transformers dedicated to lighting only, in order to prevent injection of “noise” into electrical system which may affect public address, radio, computer and other such systems. 1) Contractor shall take care to install secondary feed wiring in accordance with

Manufacturer’s recommendation when near public address, computer or other such system components, or associated wiring or any voltage.

3. When specified, fluorescent luminaries shall have radio frequency interference (RFI) or

electromagnetic interference filters. Filters shall either be integral or external to the ballast, but must be integral to the luminarie assembly with one filter per ballast and shall suppress electromagnetic interference in the AM radio band from 500 to 1700 kHz. Filters shall also be in the circuit serving the lightening fixture.

O. Incandescent Fixtures

1. Incandescent fixtures, unless otherwise specified, shall be operated at 90% of rated lamp

voltage by means a bucking transformer at the distribution panel for extended lamp life. Bucking transformers shall not be used on those circuits where dimmers are used. Refer to Electrical Engineers drawings and Specifications for Manufacturer, quantity and size of bucking transformers required. (Refer to the Lighting Fixture Schedule for lamp voltages.)

2. Housing: a. Steel, bonderized or equal rust protected or aluminum, rigid construction. Minimum

gauge thickness shall be as follows: b. Interior locations: 1.01mm steel, 1.29mm aluminum. c. Exterior locations: 1.31mm steel, 1.63mm aluminum. d. Finish: Baked enamel finish (except when otherwise specified).



265100 - 10

e. Concealed interior surfaces (this applies to interior hardware, lampholders, yokes, brackets, etc.): matte black.

f. Concealed exterior surfaces: matte black g. Visible surfaces: color and texture as specified below for each fixture type or as

selected. h. Exterior Fixture Finishes:

1) Unless otherwise specified, all painted surfaces shall have an outdoor life expectancy of not less than 20 years. Surfaces shall be prepared, primed, and material applied in accordance with the Manufacturer’s requirements.

2) Color: Colors shall be as specified in the Lighting Fixture Schedule.

3. Reflector Cones: refer to “Reflector Cones,” above. 4. Reflectors not visible within normal viewing angles shall be highly specular as produced

under the Alzak process, except when otherwise specified. Minimum reflectance shall be 83%.

5. Provide safety devices for removable fixture elements (cones, reflectors, lenses and fixture doors, etc.). Safety devices shall support removable elements when not in normal operating position, and be detachable if necessary. This device shellac not interfere with fixture performance, maintenance, or the seating of any fixture element, and shall not be visible during normal fixture operation.

6. Thermal protection device shall be provided as required by code.

P. High Intensity Discharge Fixtures 1. Housing, where applicable:

a. Steel bonderized or equal rust protected, or aluminum, rigid construction. Minimum

gauge thickness shall be as follows: 1) Interior locations: 1.01mm steel, 1.61mm aluminum 2) Exterior locations: 1.31mm steel, 1.63mm aluminum.

b. Finish: Baked enamel finish

1) Concealed surfaces: matte black 2) Visible surfaces: color and texture as specified below for each fixture type or

as specified in the Lighting Fixture Schedule. 3) Exterior Fixture Finishes:

a) Unless otherwise specified, all painted surfaces shall have an outdoor

life expectancy of not less than 20 years. Surfaces shall be prepared, primed, and material applied in accordance with the Manufacturer’s requirements.

b) Color: Colors shall be as specified in the Lighting Fixture Schedule.

c. Lampholder housing: cast aluminum with integral heat radiating fins to assure cool lamp base operation.

d. Fixture housing design shall provide for top and bottom relamping, unless otherwise specified.

2. Reflector: High purity (not less than 99.0%) aluminum. Specular finish shall be achieved

by mechanical- and electro-polishing. Reflector shall be anodized to prevent surface corrosion or deterioration. The reflectance shall not be less than 83%.



265100 - 11

3. Provide safety devices for removable fixture elements (cones, reflectors, lenses, fixture doors, etc.). Safety devices shall support removable element when not in normal operating position, and be detachable if necessary This device shall not interfere with fixture performance, maintenance, or the seating of any fixture element, and shall not be visible during normal fixture operation.

4. Magnetic Ballasts: High power factor, UL approved constant wattage auto-transformer type for voltage and lamp specified – 60 hertz. a. Ballasts shall be designed in accordance with all applicable ANSI specifications

including ANSI C82.4 and shall comply with UL 1029. b. Ballast shall have a normal ambient operating temperature of 40°C. c. The light output shall not vary more than 11% with a +/- 5% voltage variation in

high reactance circuit. d. The light output shall not vary more than 5% with +/- 10% voltage variation in CWA

circuit. e. Lamp drop out voltage shall not exceed minus 25% of the rated voltage for the high

reactance circuit and minus 30% for the CWA circuit. f. Ballasts for indoor applications shall be encased in a housing which provides

necessary wiring compartments and provision for required electrical connectors or devices.

g. Ballast components shall be surrounded with a thermosetting fill to assure adequate heat dissipation and quiet operation.

h. Ballasts shall be provided with necessary mounting hardware and vibration dampers.

i. Ballasts for outdoor use shall be encased in watertight enclosures with proper outdoor wiring devices. Ballasts shall be suitable for starting lamps at temperatures between -29°C, and 41°C.

5. Electronic Metal Halide ballasts: a. Unless specified otherwise, shall be same Manufacturer and model in each fixture

of the same type. b. Shall have an input voltage range with a variation of at least +/- 20% and +/- 1%

lamp regulation resulting in greater lamp stability in areas with poor power regulation.

c. Output shall be “square wave” with an operating frequency of less than 200 Hz. d. Shall incorporate a “Turn Off” shutdown safety feature not exceeding a response

time of 3 seconds to prevent excessive ignition, undue system stress and improved long term performance of the ballast under the following conditions: no lamp, failed lamp, end of life lamp, leaker lamps and other sustained abnormal conditions such as rectification and glow mode.

e. Shall comply with FCC Part 18 Class A. The Manufacturer shall provide documentation of compliance with non-consumer limits for EMI and RFI.

f. Shall have a Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) less than 10%. g. Shall have a lamp Crest Factor of less than 1.3. h. Shall have a Power Factor of not less than 96%. i. Shall be sound rated “A”. j. Shall be equipped with internal thermal protection to shut down the ballast when

operation temperatures reach unacceptable levels. k. Shall be UL and CUL “Listed or Recognized” for 120v and 277v applications and

CE “Listed” for 220 to 240 v 50 Hz applications. l. Shall incorporate a metal case and be suitable for recessed use. m. Shall be designated Type 1 – Outdoor. n. Shall be capable of remote mounting with a distance of not less than 10’-0”.



265100 - 12

o. Shall incorporate Electrolytic Capacitor(s) with minimum rating of 8,000 hours at 105°C and a minimum life expectancy exceeding 64,000 hours at 75°C.

p. Manufacturer shall offer a Five (5) year product warranty. q. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of fifteen (15) years experience in the

Manufacturer of electronic power lighting products, two (2) years experience in the Manufacturer of Electronic Metal Halide ballasts and no less than fifty thousand (50,000) units installed worldwide.

r. The specified lamps shall be approved and/or warranted by the lamp Manufacturer for use with the designated Electronic Metal Halide ballast.

s. Shall have built in circuit protection. t. Shall have a designated ballast factor of 1.0. u. Acceptable ballast Manufacturers unless otherwise noted are:

a) Aromat b) Hatch c) Metro-light

6. Lighting fixtures recessed in a hung ceiling where the space above the ceiling is used as

a plenum chamber for either supply or return air for the air conditioning system shall be designed, Manufactured, and wired to conform with NEC Article 300-22.

7. Provide clear glass safety lens in all Metal Halide fixtures unless otherwise noted.

Q. Wiring:

1. Voltage Rating a. For voltages up to 120 volts fixture wiring shall be rated for 300 volts minimum. b. For voltages above 120 volts fixture wring shall be rated for 600 volts minimum.

2. Temperature Rating – Internal to Fixture

a. All wiring shall be code-approved for fixture wiring, and shall comply with the

following temperature ratings unless fixture design or local codes require higher temperature wire.

b. Incandescent

1) Minimum rated between lampholder(s) and separately mounted junction box or internal transformer.

2) Minimum rated between ballast and separate junction box, or connection within integral wireway.

3) Tungsten-halogen lamp seal temperature shall not exceed 350°C at ambient of 25°C when tested per UL Bulletin 57, Par. 328-334. Submit certified heat test data by independent testing laboratory.

c. Fluorescent

1. Minimum rating between lampholders and internal ballast. 2. Minimum between ballast and separate junction box, or connection within

integral wireway.

d. High Intensity Discharge

1) Minimum rating between lampholder(s) and separate junction box or connections with ballast components.



265100 - 13

2) Minimum rating between core and coil ballast components and separate junction box.

3) Minimum rating between encased and potted ballast components and separate junction box.

3. Temperature Rating – External to Fixture a. All flexible cord wiring between fixture components or to electrical receptacle and

not in wireways shall have a minimum temperature rating of 105°C. b. Cord type shall be suitable for application and shall be fitted with proper strain relief

and watertight entries where required by application.

4. Splices a. Splices internal to fixture shall be made within separate splice compartments and

shall utilize nylon insulated crimped connections or insulated quick disconnects. b. Splices to branch circuit wiring in separate junction boxes shall utilize flame

retardant thermoplastic caps with fully seated helical metal spring and threaded entry.

5. No internal wiring shall be visible at normal viewing angles, i.e., above 45° from vertical. Use additional wire clamps if necessary. Anticipate increased visibility if fixtures are mounted on or recessed within a sloping surface.

6. Any fixture fed from more than one panel, i.e., for normal and night or emergency operation, shall have separate neutrals to each panel.

7. Furnish code-approved wiring in ceiling cavities forming air plenums.

R. Solid State Lighting (LED)

1. General:

a. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in the Manufacturer and design of LED products and systems and no less than one hundred (100) North American installations.

b. All LED fixtures and power/data supplies shall be provided by a single Manufacturer to ensure compatibility.

c. Include all components necessary for a complete installation. Provide all power supplies, synchronizers, data cables, and data terminators for a complete working system.

d. All peripheral devices and control software are to be provided by and shall be the responsibility of a single entity. All components shall perform successfully as a complete system and shall operate as described in control narrative documents.

e. All LED sources used in LED luminaire shall be of proven quality from established and reputable LED Manufacturers. Acceptable LED lamp Manufacturers unless otherwise noted are:

1. Cree, Inc. 2. Philips Lighting (Lumileds or Fortimo) 3. Nichia Corporation 4. Xicato

2. Replacement and Spares:



265100 - 14

a. Manufacturers shall keep record of original bin for each LED module and have replacement modules from the same bin available for three (3) years after the date of installation. System components shall not become obsolete for ten (10) years. Manufacturer shall keep an inventory of replacement parts (source assembly, power and control components) or provide replacement parts that fit into the original luminaire and provide equivalent distribution and lumen output to the original.

b. All parts of system shall be replaceable in field. Manufacturer shall accept returned product and/or components for recycling or re-use.

c. System shall carry a full warrantee for five (5) years. Manufacturer shall be responsible for cost of labor to replace any component of the system that fails within 2 years of installation.

3. Products and Components - Performance

a. LED luminaries and components shall be UL listed or UL classified. b. LED luminaries and components shall be CE certified. c. LED luminaries and components shall be PSE marked. d. All manufacturing processes and materials shall conform to the requirements of the

European Union’s Restriction on the Use of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronics Equipment (RoHS) Directive, 2002/95/EC.

e. LEDs shall comply with ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78-377-2008 – Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products.

f. RGB LEDs shall have a rated source life of 100,000 hours and white LEDs shall have a rated source life of 50,000 hours under normal operating conditions.

g. To ensure fixture quality, fixture shall have been tested under accelerated life test conditions including an operating temperature span of 160 degrees C, and cyclic loading up to 60G.

h. Fixture assembly shall include a method of dissipating heat so as to not degrade life of source, electronic equipment, or lenses. LED fixture housing shall be designed to transfer heat from the LED board to the outside environment. Fixture housing shall have no impact on life of components.

i. Manufacturer shall supply a range of permissible operating temperatures in which system will perform optimally.

j. High power LED fixture shall be thermally protected using one or more of the following thermal management techniques: metal core board, gap pad, and/or internal monitoring firmware.

k. All products included in system shall use Mil-Std 810F, Random Vibration 7.698g as a minimum standard. In installations subject to vibration, luminaries shall be installed with vibration isolation hardware to sufficiently dampen vibrations.

l. For wet and damp use, LED-based luminary itself shall be sealed, rated, and tested for appropriate environmental conditions, not accomplished by using an additional housing or enclosure.

m. All hardwired connections to LED fixtures shall be reverse polarity protected and provide high voltage protection in the event connections are reversed or shorted during the installation process.

n. The LED luminaire shall be operated at constant and carefully regulated current levels. LEDs shall not be overdriven beyond their specified nominal voltage and current.

o. RBG LED fixtures shall utilize an equal combination of high brightness red, blue and green LEDs, unless otherwise noted, to provide up to 16.7 million additive RGB colors and shall be capable of at least 8-bit control.

p. Manufacturer shall be able to provide supporting documentation of the product meeting third party regulatory compliance.



265100 - 15

q. Manufacturer shall ensure that products undergo and successfully meet appropriate design and manufacturability testing including Design FMEA, Process FMEA, Environmental Engineering Considerations and Laboratory Tests, IEC standards and UL/CE testing.

r. All LED fixtures (100% of each lot) shall undergo a minimum eight-hour burin-in test during manufacturing.

s. Manufacturer shall provide optical performance, polar diagrams, and relevant luminance and illuminance photometric data based on test results from an independent Nationally Recognized Testing Lab (NRTL).

t. Manufacturer shall provide photometric data in IES file format in accordance with IES LM-63-2002, based on test results from an independent NRTL.

u. Manufacturer shall provide mechanical, electrical, network communication and environmental specifications. 1) LED fixture shall be network controllable via digital control. 2) The LED system shall use integral and differential nonlinear control. 3) Constant data transmission rates shall be employed, resulting in the output

being independent of distance of cable between power supply and light source within the specified length.

4) Power/data supply outputs shall have current limiting protection. 5) Power/data supply shall provide mis-wiring protection. 6) Power/data supply shall have power factor correction. 7) Power/data supply shall provide connections that are conduit-ready or clamp-

style connections in the case of low-voltage wiring. 8) Power/data supply shall come with a housing that meets a minimum IP20

rating for dry location installation 9) Power/data supply shall be UL listed for Class 1 or Class 2 wiring 10) LED system shall have a selectable means of external control via a data

network.

4. Each LED fixture and /or node shall have the capability to be set to a unique and individual address. Address shall be selectable through on board switches or by an external hardware of software method.

5. The LED system shall be scalable, with every LED fixture/address in the system capable of being controlled by a single, centralized controller.

S. Lamps:

1. Hot cathode fluorescent lamps: shall be 3000° Kelvin, with 85 CRI or greater except as shown. Refer to the Lighting Fixture Schedule. All lamps, except as specified, shall be of the same Manufacturer: a. General Electric b. Philips c. Osram/Sylvania

2. Cold cathode lamps: Lamps shall produce 300 lumens per foot (warm white) when

operating at 120 mA, 440 lumens per foot (warm white) when operating at 200 mA, and shall not depreciate more than 20% after 10,000 hours of normal operation. Lamps shall be made from 5/8” or 1” diameter lead glass halo-phosphor coated and baked, with heavy-duty coated electrodes, and shall be fabricated to the shapes and sizes as shown on drawings. Lamps shall be processed with a high-speed mechanical pump at least 100 liters free air capacity, backed up by a three-stage oil diffusion pump able to produce a vacuum of 10-7 and accurate gauges and meters for measuring and controlling



265100 - 16

pressures, temperatures, carrier gas and mercury. Completed lamps shall be silicon coated and aged for 15 hours. Lamps showing end darkening, stains, discoloration, spiraling or sputtering shall be rejected.

3. Incandescent lamps: a. 120 volt, except as shown. Refer to the Lighting Fixture Schedule for details. b. All lamps, except as specified, shall be of the same Manufacturer:

1) General Electric 2) Philips 3) Osram/Sylvania 4) Ushio

c. Energy saving type lamps which use an electronic diode shall not be used unless

otherwise specified in the Lighting Fixture Schedule.

4. High intensity discharge lamps: Refer to the Lighting Fixture Schedule for details. All lamps, except as specified, shall be of the same Manufacturer: a. General Electric b. Philips c. Osram/Sylvania d. Venture

T. Air Handling Troffer Fixtures:

1. Refer to mechanical drawings and specifications for requirements, if any. 2. Air diffusers shall be supplied by others.

U. Pole/Luminaire Assemblies:

1. Supply luminaries, davit arms, brackets, poles, handhold covers, base components, and

all other accessories complete by specified Manufacturer who will be responsible for proper fitting of all elements.

2. Manufacturer will supply assembly to withstand 100 mph winds with a 1.3 gust factor without permanent deflection.

3. Manufacturer shall be responsible for design of and structural integrity of complete base (i.e., concrete dimensions, rebar requirements, grounding and conduit requirements, drainage and ground compaction requirements).



265100 - 17

2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURE DESCRIPTIONS TYPE-GC1

1. Description: Recessed fully adjustable accent light, with square finished trim and aiming ring for use with LED MR16 lamp.

2. Dimensions: Faceplate 8.83” x5.83”, overall 7.28” width, 14.69” length, 6-3/4” depth,. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling, use specified slush mounting accessory, to make install fixture

completely flush with ceiling surface.. 4. Lamping: 9W Soraa #SM16-09-36D-827-03 -2700K CCT, 80 CRI 9W 36º beam spread. 5. Electrical: 120/277 integral electronic driver. 6. Voltage: Voltage per engineer. 7. Optics: LED MR16 lamp with 36º beam spread. 8. Labels: UL/CUL Class 2 and non-Class 2 9. Features: Square trim with separate, fully adjustable aiming ring. Flush mounting accessory

allows the trim to be completely flush with the ceiling surface. Must be available in matched multiple lamp versions.

10. Finish: Metallic gray trim finish, metallic gray ring finish, black enclosure. Interior Designer shall verify finishes

11. Approved Manufacturers: a. Eureka #12540-1x1-169x-MR16LED16E-volt-MG-MG-BLK-19540-1x1 b. Equal by: Contrast or USAi Lighting



265100 - 18

TYPE-GC2

1. Description: Recessed fully adjustable double accent light, with rectangular finish trim and aiming ring for use with 2x LED MR16 lamp.

2. Dimensions: Faceplate 10.28” x 13.95”, overall 7.75” width, 18.62” length, 6-3/4” depth,. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling, use specified slush mounting accessory, to make install fixture

completely flush with ceiling surface. 4. Lamping: 2 x 9w Soraa #SM16-09-36D-827-03 -2700K CCT, 80 CRI 9W 36º beam spread. 5. Electrical: 120/277 integral electronic driver. 6. Voltage: Voltage per engineer. 7. Optics: LED MR16 lamp with 36º beam spread. 8. Labels: UL/CUL Class 2 and non-Class 2 9. Features: Rectangular trim with separate, fully adjustable aiming ring. Flush mounting accesspry

allows the trim to be completely flush with the ceiling surface. Must be available in matched multiple lamp versions.

10. Finish: Metallic gray trim finish, metallic gray ring finish, black enclosure. Interior Designer shall verify finishes

11. Approved Manufacturers: a. Eureka #12540-2x1-169x-MR16LED16E-volt-MG-MG-BLK-19540-2x1 b. Equal by: Contrast or USAi Lighting



265100 - 19

TYPE-GC3

1. Description: Linear lensed LED fixture designed for cove mounting. 2. Dimensions: 1-7/16” wide, 1-3/8” deep, lengths per plans. 3. Mounting: Fixtures mount in a cove - refer to architectural drawings for mounting detail. Top of

fixture shall be 1/2" below cove edge. Verify overall lengths with as built conditions - provide mounting end to end for continuous illumination.

4. Lamping: LED 2700K, CRI>80, 6W per foot, 505 lumens/foot delivered. 5. Electrical: Non –dimming. Powered directly from AC line voltage without need for separate LED

driver. 6. Voltage: Voltage per engineer. 7. Optics: Frosted polycarbonate lens, 120º beam spread. 8. Labels: UL/CUL dry/damp location. 9. Features: Polymer extruded housing, adjustable mounting brackets. Integral drive allows fixture to

be powered directly from AC line voltage without additional driver. 10. Finish: White. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Lumenpulse #LCN-HO-volt-length-27K-FR-WH-NO b. Equal by: Ecosense or Philips



265100 - 20

TYPE-GC4

1. Description: Small aperture recessed accent downlight with 1” regressed lamp mounting, for use with LED MR16 Lamp.

2. Dimensions: 1-78” aperture, faceplate 3-1/4” diameter 10-5/8” overall width, 12-1/2” overall length, 4-1/8” deep

3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling. 4. Lamping: 9W Soraa #SM16-09-36D-827-03 -2700K CCT, 80 CRI 9W 36º beam spread. 5. Electrical: Low voltage solid state transformer. 6. Voltage: Voltage per engineer. 7. Optics: Vertical groove black baffle and Solite lens. Lamp to have beam spread 36º. 8. Labels: UL/ cUL dry/damp location. 9. Features: Die cast aluminum and steel. Torsion spring mounting. Modify foe 20W Max label.

Furnish and install Solite accessory lens – remove clear glass lens 10. Finish: White, Interior Designer to confirm finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. USAi #7870-10-325NC-volt-9157B b. Equal by: Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 21

TYPE-GC5

1. Description: Recessed beveled, regressed trimless LED downlight. 2. Dimensions: 3-1/2” dia. Aperture, 4/1/2”, housing 5-3/4” x 19”, 4-2/4” depth. , 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling. 4. Lamping: 20 W LED, 2700K CCT, 80 CRI 9W 80º beam spread. 5. Electrical: Low voltage solid state transformer. 6. Voltage: Voltage per engineer. 7. Optics: Precision injection molded specular polycarbonate reflector optimized for 80º beam

distribution. Integral solite lens. 8. Labels: UL/ CUL dry/damp location. 9. Features: Die cast aluminum 1” bevel. Field replaceable light engine and field replaceable driver. 10. Finish: White, Interior Designer to confirm finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. USAi #1021-B1-10-LRLD4-9020-M2-27KS-80-NCSM1-volt b. Equal by: Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 22

TYPE GR1

1. Description: Recessed 3-3/4” square open adjustable downlight for use with LED MR16 lamp. 2. Dimensions: 9-1/2” long, (12-1/2” overall) 7” wide, 5-3/4” overall depth. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling. 4. Lamping: Soraa #SM16-09-36D-827-03 -2700K CCT, 80 CRI 9W 36º beam spread 5. Electrical: Electronic 60 VA calls 2 transformer, 120 volt primary, nominal 12V secondary Class H 6. Voltage: 120V 7. Optics: 36º beam spread, Furnish and install frosted glass lens accessory. 8. Labels: CSA, UL damp locations. 9. Features: 25 ga. Steel housing, die cast aluminum flange. Die cast aluminum adjustable

lampholder assembly, rotates 358º horizontally and 0 to 35º vertically. 10. Finish: Brushed steel, Interior Designer shall verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Lightolier #348STX-302MREX-AF2FR b. Equal by: Contrast Lighting or USAi Lighting



265100 - 23

TYPE GR2

1. Description: Recessed 3-3/4” square lensed adjustable showerlight for use with LED MR16 lamp. 2. Dimensions: 9-1/2” long, (12-1/2” overall) 7” wide, 5-3/4” overall depth. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling. 4. Lamping: Soraa #SM16-09-36D-827-03 -2700K CCT, 80 CRI 9W 36º beam spread 5. Electrical: Electronic 60 VA calls 2 transformer, 120 volt primary, nominal 12V secondary Class H 6. Voltage: 120V 7. Optics: 36º beam spread with fixed, tempered frosted glass lens. 8. Labels: CSA, UL certified for damp or wet locations. 9. Features: 25 ga. Steel housing, die cast aluminum flange. Die cast aluminum adjustable

lampholder assembly, rotates 358º horizontally and 0 to 35º vertically. 10. Finish: Brushed steel, Interior Designer shall verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Lightolier #347ASTX-302MREX b. Equal by: Contrast Lighting or USAi Lighting



265100 - 24

TYPE GR3

1. Description: Flexible LED linear strip light,that can be installed to run online voltage without additional power supply.

2. Dimensions: 7/8” wide x 1/4” deep lengths per plans. 3. Mounting: Provide 2' power cord for mounting to furniture Provide wall mounted outlet for power

connection coordinate outlet height with furniture dimensions .Provide continuous clear housing to prevent sagging and ensure a secure installation

4. Lamping: LEDs 2700K, CRI>80, 4.95 W/ft, 97 Lumen/watt. 5. Electrical: Runs directly off line voltage with no additional transformer or power supply needed.

Can be dimmed with ELV dimmer. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer 7. Optics: High efficiency LEDs provide 112 lm/W.Flexible, optically clear thermoplastic jacket, no

other lens needed. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp/ wet locations, 9. Features: Built in surge protection module. Snap-in clear plastic mounting channel. Fixtures install

under bench and desk at AC guestrooms. Confirm with owner whether fixtures should be furnished with the electrical package or with FF&E package.

10. Finish: Standard white. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Jesco #DL-AC-FLEX-27-PC2/DL-AC-FLEX-CH4 b. Equal by: LED Linear or Acolyte



265100 - 25

TYPE GR4

1. Description: Beveled, 3-1/4” diameter round, lensed trimless LED accent light with1” regressed bevel for use with LED MR16 lamp.

2. Dimensions: 12-3/4” long, 11-7/8” wide, 4-5/8” deep. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling. For drywall installation only. 4. Lamping: Soraa #SM16-09-36D-827-03 -2700K CCT, 80 CRI 9W 36º beam spread 5. Electrical: Low voltage magnetic toroidal HPF transformer. Provide 20W maximum label. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Solite lens. 8. Labels: Dry/damp/ wet under covered ceiling. 9. Features: Die cast aluminum with ball plunger mounting. Housing fabricated from 20 ga steel with

thru wire J-Box. Butterfly brackets and adjustable nail bars with integral nails provided. 10. Finish: White. Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. USAi #9900-10-S-RDL100NC-volt-MOD b. Equal by :Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 26

TYPE GR5

1. Description: Beveled, 3-1/4” diameter round, adjustable lensed trimless LED accent light with1”

regressed bevel for use with LED MR16 lamp. 2. Dimensions: 12-3/4” long, 11-7/8” wide, 4-5/8” deep. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling. For drywall installation only. 4. Lamping: Soraa #SM16-09-36D-827-03 -2700K CCT, 80 CRI 9W 36º beam spread 5. Electrical: Low voltage magnetic toroidal HPF transformer. Provide 20W maximum label. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Solite lens. 8. Labels: Dry/damp/ wet under covered ceiling. 9. Features: 362º lockable horizontal adjustment and 35º lockable vertical tilt. Die cast aluminum

with ball plunger mounting. Housing fabricated from 20 ga steel with thru wire J-Box. Butterfly brackets and adjustable nail bars with integral nails provided.

10. Finish: White. Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. USAi #9935-10-S-RDL101NC-volt-MOD b. Equal by: :Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 27

TYPE GR6

1. Description: Recessed, Linear, lensed LED channel, with LED ribbon. 2. Dimensions: 0.91” wide, 0.60” deep, nominal 5’ length. 3. Mounting: Fixture recesses into ceiling at guestroom shower. Provide IP65 rated tape.Verify

length with as built conditions 4. Lamping: LED ribbon, 0.66” oc, 30 LEDs per foot, 6.5 W per foot. 2700K, 708-80CRI 5. Electrical: Remote power supply required, location TBD.100 watt, 24 volt output, high efficiency

class 2 driver, for use in wet or dry locations. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Milky white 70% transmittance lens, 65º beam spread. 8. Labels: IP20/IP65. 9. Features: IP20 grade aluminum channel, UV resistant, field replaceable snap-in lens. 10. Finish: White. Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Acolyte #CHAR2M246.5275+DRVW24100-volt b. Equal by: Acclaim or LED Linear



265100 - 28

TYPE GR7

1. Description: Recessed, Linear, lensed LED channel, with LED ribbon. 2. Dimensions: 0.91” wide, 0.60” deep, nominal 6’ length. 3. Mounting: Fixture recesses into wall at LM guestroom deck Verify length with as built conditions. 4. Lamping: LED ribbon, 0.66” oc, 30 LEDs per foot, 6.5 W per foot. 2700K, 708-80CRI 5. Electrical: Remote power supply required, location TBD.100 watt, 24 volt output, high efficiency

class 2 driver, for use in wet or dry locations. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Milky white 70% transmittance lens, 65º bema spread. 8. Labels: IP20/IP65. 9. Features: IP20 grade aluminum channel, UV resistant, field replaceable snap-in lens. 10. Finish: White. Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Acolyte #CHAR2M246.5276+DRVW24100-volt b. Equal by: Acclaim or LED Linear



265100 - 29

TYPE PF1

1. Description: Linear, lensed, cable mounted direct fluorescent fixture. 2. Dimensions: 2-3/8” wide, 3-9/16” deep, 4’ length. 3. Mounting: Cable mounted. Fixture mounts in open slot of fitness center ceiling – refer to

architectural drawings for mounting detail. Coordinate installation with submitted ceiling system 4. Lamping: 1 x 54 W T5HO, 3000K, CRI>80 5. Electrical: Electronic, high power factor, class “P” ballast, type “A” sound rating. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Satine lens. 8. Labels: UL listed for damp conditions. 9. Features: Continuous extruded aluminum housing. 1/16” aircraft cable suspension supplied with

chrome gripper for easy adjustment. Die formed gear tray with factory preset sliding covers to fill extrusion with light. Fixture mounts in open area between wood ceiling in fitness center. Coordinate installation with ceiling installer.

10. Finish: Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Selux #M60-1T5HO-SD-C-004-SV-277-DM-DL b. Equal by: Focal Point Lighting or LiteControl



265100 - 30

TYPE PF1a

1. Description: Linear, lensed, cable mounted direct fluorescent fixture with staggered lamp

configuration. 2. Dimensions: 2-3/8” wide, 3-9/16” deep, 4’ length. 3. Mounting: Cable mounted. Fixture mounts in open slot of fitness center ceiling – refer to

architectural drawings for mounting detail. Coordinate installation with submitted ceiling system 4. Lamping: 3 x 39 W T5HO, 3000K, CRI>80 5. Electrical: Electronic, high power factor, class “P” ballast, type “A” sound rating. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Satine lens. 8. Labels: UL listed for damp conditions. 9. Features: Continuous extruded aluminum housing. 1/16” aircraft cable suspension supplied with

chrome gripper for easy adjustment. Die formed gear tray with factory preset sliding covers to fill extrusion with light.

10. Finish: Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Selux #M60S-1T5HO-SD-C-008-SV-277-DM-DL b. Equal by: Focal Point Lighting or LiteControl



265100 - 31

TYPE PL1

1. Description: Pendant mounted cylindrical LED downlight. 2. Dimensions: Cylinder 6.0” diameter 10” long. Pendant, 6” 3. Mounting: Pendant mounted. Fixture mounts in open slot of ballroom ceiling - refer to

architectural drawings for mounting detail. Verify stem length with as built conditions 4. Lamping: 36W LED, 2700K, 80+ CRI, 3125 delivered lumens. 5. Electrical: ELDO 0-10V DALI dimming driver intended for use with Lutron Grafik Eye QS system. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: 50º beam spread. 1” regressed solite clear lens 8. Labels: UL listed dry/damp/wet conditions. 9. Features: Extruded aluminum body with powder coat finish. Interchangeable precision optics for

precise beam spread. Field replaceable light engine, field replaceable driver. 10. Finish: Black. Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. USAI Lighting #LBPR6-9036-X2-21-21-10-27KS-50- SOC-P1-volt-DIML7+PMB-P1-6-21 b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 32

TYPE PR1

1. Description: Pendant mounted dual head adjustable fixture for use with LED MR16 lamps. 2. Dimensions: 8” overall width from head to head, 24” stem length.” 3. Mounting: Mounts to either a 4” square electrical box with round plaster ring, or octagonal junction

box. Fixture mounts in open slot of ballroom ceiling - refer to architectural drawings for mounting detail. Verify stem length with as built conditions

4. Lamping: 2 x Soraa #SM16-09-36D-827-03 -2700K CCT, 80 CRI 9W 36º beam spread 5. Electrical: Electronic transformer fits in junction box. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Provide with snout to prevent side glare. 8. Labels: Dry locations. 9. Features: Snout to prevent side glare. 4” square flush canopy mount to a standard 4” junction

box. Electronic transformer fits in junction box. 10. Finish: Black. Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Tech Lighting #700FJELT-24-Z/700SNOUTB Canopy: 700FJ4SQ-Z b. Equal by Steng or LBL



265100 - 33

TYPE RF1

1. Description: Linear, recessed, lensed LED fixture with asymmetric light distribution for wall washing.

2. Dimensions: 1-5/16”aperture, 2-7/16” overall width, 2-13/16” depth, 20’ length. 3. Mounting: Spackle flange for mounting in drywall. Fixtures required tape, skimcoat and sanding to

integrate with ceiling plane. Multi form mounting flange, with 1” ¼ 20 stud mounting. 4. Lamping: LED 9.0 W/ft, 407 lumens/ft. 2700K 80+CRI 5. Electrical: ELDO 0-10V logarithmic dimming driver intended for use with Lutron system.

Coordinate dimming with submitted dimming controls 6. Voltage: Universal 120 thru 277 capability. Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: 20º asymmetrical beam spread. Extruded impact resistant acrylic lens. 8. Labels: Damp listing. 9. Features: Continuous low copper extruded aluminum profile with end caps. 9/16’ flange runs full

length of both sides. Luminaire available in continuous runs of exact specified length. 10. Finish: White. Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Selux #L36-1A35-20-A2-SF1-TS-20-WH-UNV-DL-DML b. Equal by Winona or Zumtobel



265100 - 34

TYPE RF2

1. Description: Linear, recessed, lensed LED fixture with asymmetric light distribution for wall

washing. 2. Dimensions: 5-3/16”aperture, 5-13/16” overall width, 5” depth, 15’ length. 3. Mounting: Recessed for mounting in drywall. Fixtures have an overlap flange, with 1” ¼ 20 stud

support to structure above. 4. Lamping: LED 18.0 W/ft, 1120 lumens/ft. 2700K 80+CRI 5. Electrical: Remote magnetic transformer by QTran to be tested and found compatible with Soraa

LED lamps and Marlin Controls dimming system. Coordinate lamps & transformer with submitted dimming controls

6. Voltage: Universal 120 thru 277 capability. Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: 20º asymmetrical beam spread. Extruded impact resistant acrylic lens. 8. Labels: Damp listing. 9. Features: Continuous low copper extruded aluminum housing with die-formed end caps & socket

plate. 5/16’ flange runs full length of both sides. Regressed frosted supertex spread lens set on asymmetric angle to direct light toward wine wall. GU5.3 ceramic sockets are adjustable up to 30° for fine tune aiming on site. Luminaire available in continuous runs of exact specified length.

10. Finish: White. Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Specialty Lighting Industries #815-MR-FH-15’-6-RX-WHT-82A b. Transformer: QTran #W6500DT-volt/12-3x15+CK-L+BK c. Equal by Starfire or Nulux



265100 - 35

TYPE RL1

1. Description: Recessed, beveled, Round trimless lensed LED downlight. 2. Dimensions: 4-½” diameter aperture, Housing 13” wide, 18-5/8” long, 7-3/8” deep.. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling, Fixtures have a trimless detail and require tape, skimcoat and

sanding to be integrated with ceiling plane 4. Lamping: LED 33W, 2175 lumens. 2700K 80+CRI 5. Electrical: 15% 0-10V Dimming Driver. 6. Voltage: Universal 120 thru 277 capability. Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Injection molded polycarbonate reflector optimized for 80º beam spread. Solite lens. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: Field replaceable light engine and field replaceable driver. Die cast, 1” regressed bevel.

Trimless mounting allows fixture to be flush with ceiling plane. 10. Finish: White bevel. Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. USAi #3321-B1-S-10-LRLD4-9033-C2-27KS-80-NC-VOLT-DIML2 b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 36

TYPE RL1a

1. Description: Recessed, beveled, round, flanged lensed LED downlight. 2. Dimensions: 4-½” diameter aperture, Housing 13” wide, 18-5/8” long, 7-3/8” deep.. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling, flanged fixture mounts in ACT ceiling - coordinate installation with

ceiling installer 4. Lamping: LED 33W, 2175 lumens. 2700K 80+CRI 5. Electrical: 15% 0-10V Dimming Driver. 6. Voltage:. Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Injection molded polycarbonate reflector optimized for 80º beam spread. Solite lens. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: Field replaceable light engine and field replaceable driver. Die cast, 1” regressed bevel.

Integral flange allows for clean mounting. 10. Finish: White regress and white flange. Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. USAi #3021-B1-S-10-LRLD4-9033-C2-27KS-80-NC-VOLT-DIML2 b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 37

TYPE RL1b

1. Description: Recessed, round aperture lensed LED downlight. 2. Dimensions: 4-½” diameter aperture, Housing 9.5” wide, 13-5/8” long, 5-3/4” deep.. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling, 4. Lamping: LED 40W, 2722 lumens. 2700K 80+CRI 5. Electrical: ELDO 0-10V DALI dimming driver, 0.1%-100% dimming range. Coordinate dimming

with submitted dimming controls 6. Voltage: Universal 120 thru 277 capability. Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Injection molded polycarbonate reflector optimized for 50º beam spread. Solite lens. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: Field replaceable light engine and field replaceable driver. Die cast, 1” regressed lens. 10. Finish: Platinum Reflector finish with white flange - Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Spectrum Lighting #RDFO4LEDXT-40L-27K-XW-DE10-volt-EB/RD4F-PT-SOX b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 38

TYPE RL1c

1. Description: Recessed, round aperture lensed LED downlight. 2. Dimensions: 4-½” diameter aperture, Housing 9.5” wide, 13-5/8” long, 5-3/4” deep.. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling, 4. Lamping: LED 40W, 2722 lumens. 2700K 80+CRI 5. Electrical: ELDO 0-10V DALI dimming driver 0.1%-100% dimming range. Coordinate dimming

with submitted dimming controls 6. Voltage: Universal 120 thru 277 capability. Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Injection molded polycarbonate reflector optimized for 50º beam spread. Solite lens. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: Field replaceable light engine and field replaceable driver. Die cast, 1” regressed lens. 10. Finish: Platinum Reflector finish with same color flange - Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Spectrum Lighting #RDFO4LEDXT-40L-27K-XW-DE10-volt-EB/RD4F-PT-PF-SOX b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 39

TYPE RL1d

1. Description: Recessed, round aperture lensed LED downlight. 2. Dimensions: 2” diameter pinhole aperture, Housing 7-5/8” wide, 9-1/2” long, 4-1/4” deep.. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling, 4. Lamping: LED 40W, 2722 lumens. 2700K 80+CRI 5. Electrical: ELDO 0-10V DALI dimming driver, 0.1%-100% dimming range. Coordinate dimming


a. Spectrum Lighting #RDFO3LEDOC-30L-EL10-2-EB/RP3F-OC30L-27K-XW-PT-SO b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 40

TYPE RL2

1. Description: Recessed, round, trimless adjustable lensed LED downlight with asymmetrical light distribution for wall wash applications.

2. Dimensions: 4- ½” diameter aperture, Housing 13” wide, 18-5/8” long, 7-3/8” deep. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling, Fixtures have a trimless detail and require tape, skimcoat and

sanding to be integrated with ceiling plane. Fixtures shall be aimed at adjacent wall - refer to manufacturers installation instructions

4. Lamping: LED 33W, 2175 lumens. 2700K 80+CRI 5. Electrical: 15% 0-10V Dimming Driver. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Precision injected wall wash reflector, micro diffusion wall wash lens. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: 362º horizontal rotation, lockable. Field replaceable light engine and field replaceable

driver. Die cast, 1” regressed bevel. 10. Finish: White. Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. USAi #3351-B1-10-LRLW4-6033-C2-27KS-80-NC-VOLT-DIML2 b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 41

TYPE RL2a

1. Description: Recessed, round, adjustable lensed LED downlight. 2. Dimensions: 4-½” diameter aperture, Housing 9-1/2” wide, 13-1/4” long, 6” deep. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling, 4. Lamping: LED 40W, 2722 lumens. 2700K 80+CRI 5. Electrical: ELDO 0-10V DALI dimming driver 0.1%-100% dimming range. Coordinate dimming

with submitted dimming controls 6. Voltage: Universal 120 thru 277 capability. Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Injection molded polycarbonate reflector optimized for 50º beam spread. Frosted lens. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: Field replaceable light engine and field replaceable driver. Die cast, 1” regressed lens. 10. Finish: Platinum Reflector finish with same color flange - Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Spectrum Lighting #RAFO4LEDXT-40L-27K-XW-DE10-volt-EB/RA4F-PT-FGX b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 42

TYPE RL3

1. Description: Recessed, beveled, round, trimless, adjustable lensed LED downlight. 2. Dimensions: 4-½” diameter aperture, Housing 13” wide, 18-5/8” long, 7-3/8” deep. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling, Fixtures have a trimless detail and require tape, skimcoat and

sanding to be integrated with ceiling plane 4. Lamping: LED 36W, 2425 lumens. 2700K 80+CRI 5. Electrical: 15% 0-10V dimming driver intended for use Lutron system. Coordinate dimming with

submitted dimming controls 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Injection molded polycarbonate reflector optimized for 30º beam spread. Solite lens.

Furnish and install spread lens to provide a 40ºx60º light distribution. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: Field replaceable light engine and field replaceable driver. Die cast, 1” regressed bevel.

Tool-less lockable 40º vertical adjustment with 362º lockable horizontal rotation. 10. Finish: White. Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. USAi #3331MXA30-B1-S-10-LRLA4-8436-X2-27KS-30-NC-Volt-DIML2-AS61F b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 43

TYPE RL3a


sanding to be integrated with ceiling plane 4. Lamping: LED 36W, 2425 lumens. 2700K 80+CRI 5. Electrical: 15% 0-10V Dimming Driver. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Injection molded polycarbonate reflector optimized for 30º beam spread. Solite lens

Furnish and install lens to provide a 20ºx60° beam spread. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: Field replaceable light engine and field replaceable driver. Die cast, 1” regressed bevel.


a. USAi 3331MXA30-B1-S-10-LRLA4-8436-X2-27KS-30-NC-Volt-DIML6A-AL61E b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 44

TYPE RL3b



a. Spectrum Lighting #RAFO4LEDXT-40L-27K-XW-DE10-volt-EB/RA4F-PT-SOX b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 45

TYPE RL3c


with submitted dimming controls 6. Voltage: Universal 120 thru 277 capability. Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Injection molded polycarbonate reflector optimized for 50º beam spread. Solite lens. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: Field replaceable light engine and field replaceable driver. Die cast, 1” regressed lens. 10. Finish: Platinum Reflector finish with same color flange - Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Spectrum Lighting #RAFO4LEDXT-40L-27K-XW-DE10-volt-EB/RA4F-PT-PF-SOX b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 46

TYPE RL4


sanding to be integrated with ceiling plane 4. Lamping: LED 33W, 2250 lumens. 2700K 80+CRI 5. Electrical: 0-10V 15% dimming driver intended for use with Lutron system. Coordinate dimming

with submitted dimming controls 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Injection molded polycarbonate reflector optimized for 10º beam spread. Solite lens.

Furnish and install spread lens to provide a 20ºx60º light distribution. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: Field replaceable light engine and field replaceable driver. Die cast, 1” regressed bevel.


a. USAi #3331A30-B1-S-10-LRLA4-8433-C2-27KS-10-NC-Volt-DIML2-AS61E b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 47

TYPE RL5

1. Description: Recessed, beveled, round, flanged, adjustable lensed LED downlight. 2. Dimensions: 4-½” diameter aperture, Housing 13” wide, 18-5/8” long, 7-3/8” deep. 3. Mounting: : Recessed ceiling, flanged fixture mounts in ACT ceiling - coordinate installation with

ceiling installer 4. Lamping: LED 33W, 2250 lumens. 2700K 80+CRI 5. Electrical: 0-10V 15% dimming driver intended for use with Lutron system. Coordinate dimming

with submitted dimming controls 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Injection molded polycarbonate reflector optimized for 30º beam spread. Solite lens.

Furnish and install spread lens to provide a 35º light distribution. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: Field replaceable light engine and field replaceable driver. Die cast, 1” regressed bevel.


a. USAi #3331A30-B1-S-10-LRLA4-8433-C2-27KS-30-NC-Volt-DIML2-AL20F b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 48

TYPE RL5a



with submitted dimming controls s 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Injection molded polycarbonate reflector optimized for 10º beam spread. Solite lens.



a. USAi #3331A10-B1-S-10-LRLA4-8433-C2-27KS-10-NC-Volt-DIML2-AL30E b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 49

TYPE RL5b



with submitted dimming controls s 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Injection molded polycarbonate reflector optimized for 10º beam spread. Solite lens.



a. USAi #3331A10-B1-S-10-LRLA4-8433-C2-27KS-10-NC-Volt-DIML2-AL10E b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 50

TYPE RL5c



with submitted dimming controls s 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Injection molded polycarbonate reflector optimized for 10º beam spread. Solite lens. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: Field replaceable light engine and field replaceable driver. Die cast, 1” regressed bevel.


a. USAi #3331A10-B1-S-10-LRLA4-8433-C2-27KS-10-NC-Volt-DIML2 b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 51

TYPE RL6

1. Description: Recessed, beveled, round, flanged, adjustable lensed LED downlight. 2. Dimensions: 5” diameter aperture, Housing 9” wide, 12-3/4” long, 5-1/2” deep. 3. Mounting: : Recessed ceiling, flanged - coordinate installation with ceiling installer 4. Lamping: LED 20W, 1324 lumens. 2700K 80+CRI 5. Electrical: EldoLED power supply 0.1% to 100% dimming range. Coordinate dimming with

submitted dimming controls. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Injection molded polycarbonate reflector optimized for 15º beam spread. Solite lens over

aperture. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: Field replaceable light engine and field replaceable driver. Die cast, 1” regressed bevel.

Tool-less lockable 40º vertical adjustment with 362º lockable horizontal rotation. 10. Finish: White – field painted to match ceiling, Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Specialty Lighting #GR-NIC-CZ20-A-27-SP-E1-RD-FT-WHT-91A b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 52

TYPE RL6a


submitted dimming controls. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Injection molded polycarbonate reflector optimized for 60º beam spread. Frosted lens

over aperture. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: Field replaceable light engine and field replaceable driver. Die cast, 1” regressed bevel.


a. Specialty Lighting #GR-NIC-CZ20-A-27-WF-E1-RD-FT-WHT-79A b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 53

TYPE RL6b


submitted dimming controls. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Injection molded polycarbonate reflector optimized for 24º beam spread. Solite lens over

aperture. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: Field replaceable light engine and field replaceable driver. Die cast, 1” regressed bevel.


a. Specialty Lighting #GR-NIC-CZ20-A-27-NF-E1-RD-FT-WHT-91A b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 54

TYPE RL6c








265100 - 55

TYPE RL7

1. Description: Recessed, beveled, round, flanged, wall wash LED downlight. 2. Dimensions: 5” diameter aperture, Housing 9” wide, 12-3/4” long, 5-1/2” deep. 3. Mounting: : Recessed ceiling, flanged - coordinate installation with ceiling installer 4. Lamping: LED 20W, 1324 lumens. 2700K 80+CRI 5. Electrical: EldoLED power supply 0.1% to 100% dimming range. Coordinate dimming with

submitted dimming controls. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Injection molded polycarbonate reflector optimized for wide wall wash spread. Frosted

supertex lens over aperture. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: Field replaceable light engine and field replaceable driver. Die cast, 1” regressed bevel. 10. Finish: White – field painted to match ceiling, Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Specialty Lighting #GR-NIC-CZ20-A-27-SP-E1-RD-FT-WHT-91A b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 56

TYPE RL8

1. Description: Recessed, round aperture lensed LED downlight. 2. Dimensions: 4-½” diameter aperture, Housing 9.5” wide, 13-5/8” long, 5-3/4” deep.. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling, 4. Lamping: LED 36W, 2329 lumens. 2700K 80+CRI 5. Electrical: 0-10V dimming driver, 1%-100% dimming range. Coordinate dimming with submitted

dimming controls 6. Voltage: Universal 120 thru 277 capability. Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Injection molded polycarbonate reflector optimized for 80º beam spread. Solite lens. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: Field replaceable light engine and field replaceable driver. Die cast, 1” regressed lens. 10. Finish: White Reflector finish with white flange - Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Spectrum Lighting #SGE4LEDOS-30L-27K-XW-DO10-2-BH27-ARA2230PS-MW-SO-GS b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 57

TYPE RL9




Tool-less lockable 40º vertical adjustment with 362º lockable horizontal rotation. 10. Finish: White – field painted to match wood ceiling, Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:




265100 - 58

TYPE RR1

1. Description: Recessed, regressed, small aperture, round, flanged, adjustable accent fixture for use with LED MR16 lamp.

2. Dimensions: 1-7/8” diameter aperture, Housing 10-5/8” wide, 12-1/2” long, 4-1/8” deep. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling. 4. Lamping: 9W Soraa #SM16-09-25D-827-03 -2700K CCT, 80 CRI 9W 25º beam spread 5. Electrical: Low voltage solid state electronic transformer. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Vertical groove black baffle. Lamp to have 25º beam spread, Furnish and install Solite

Lens. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: Lockable 25º vertical adjustment, 360º horizontal rotation. 10. Finish: White. Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. USAi #7875-10-325NC-volt-9157A b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 59

TYPE RR1a


2. Dimensions: 1-7/8” diameter aperture, Housing 10-5/8” wide, 12-1/2” long, 4-1/8” deep. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling. 4. Lamping: 9W Soraa #SM16-09-36D-827-03 -2700K CCT, 80 CRI 9W 36º beam spread 5. Electrical: Low voltage solid state electronic transformer. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Vertical groove black baffle. Lamp to have 36º beam spread, Furnish and install frosted

borosilicate lens. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: Lockable 25º vertical adjustment, 360º horizontal rotation. 10. Finish: White. Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:




265100 - 60

TYPE RR2

1. Description: Recessed, regressed, small aperture, square, flanged, adjustable accent fixture for use with LED MR16 lamp.


lens. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: Lockable 25º vertical adjustment, 360º horizontal adjustment in 90º intervals. 10. Finish: White. Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:




265100 - 61

TYPE RR3

1. Description: Recessed, two-lamp regressed, rectangular, adjustable accent fixture for use with LED MR16 lamps.

2. Dimensions: 5-1/4”x1-3/4” aperture, Housing 10-3/4” wide, 19” long, 4-5/8” deep. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling. Fixtures have a trimless detail and require tape, skimcoat and

sanding to be integrated with gypsum ceiling 4. Lamping: 2 x 9W Soraa #SM16-09-36D-827-03 -2700K CCT, 80 CRI 9W 25º beam spread 5. Electrical: Low voltage magnetic toroidal HPF transformer. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Vertical groove black baffle. Lamp to have 25º beam spread, Furnish and install solite

lens. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: Lockable 35º vertical adjustment, 2 x 180º horizontal adjustment. 10. Finish: White. Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. USAi #9170-10-S-FL405A-volt b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 62

TYPE RR3a

1. Description: Recessed, two-lamp regressed, rectangular, trimless, adjustable accent fixture for use with LED MR16 lamps.

2. Dimensions: 5-1/4”x 3” aperture, Housing 10-3/4” wide, 19” long, 4-5/8” deep. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling. Fixtures have a trimless detail and require tape, skimcoat and

sanding to be integrated with gypsum ceiling 4. Lamping: 2 x 9W Soraa #SM16-09-36D-827-03 -2700K CCT, 80 CRI 9W 25º beam spread 5. Electrical: Low voltage magnetic toroidal HPF transformer. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Lamp to have 25º beam spread, Furnish and install linear spread lens. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: (2) 180º lockable horizontal rotation and 35º lockable vertical tilt. 10. Finish: White. Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. USAi #9170-10-L-FL405A-volt b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 63

TYPE RR4

1. Description: Recessed, regressed, small aperture, square, flanged, adjustable accent fixture for use with LED MR16 lamp.


lens. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: Lockable 25º vertical adjustment, 360º horizontal adjustment in 90º intervals. 10. Finish: Black. Interior Designer to verify finish with millwork ceiling. 11. Approved Manufacturers:




265100 - 64

TYPE RR5

1. Description: Recessed, regressed, small aperture, square, trimless, adjustable accent fixture for use with LED MR16 lamp.

2. Dimensions: 1-3/4” square aperture, Housing 11-7/8” wide, 12-3/4” long, 4-1/2” deep. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling. . Fixtures have a trimless detail and require tape, skimcoat and

sanding to be integrated with gypsum ceiling 4. Lamping: 9W Soraa #SM16-09-36D-827-03 -2700K CCT, 80 CRI 9W 25º beam spread 5. Electrical: Low voltage magnetic toroidal HPF transformer. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Lamp to have 25º beam spread, Furnish and install solite lens. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: 362º lockable horizontal rotation and 35º lockable vertical tilt. 10. Finish: White. Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. USAi #9006-10-S-FL101A-volt b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 65

TYPE RR5a

1. Description: Recessed, regressed, small aperture, square, trimless, adjustable accent fixture for use with LED MR16 lamp.

2. Dimensions: 1-3/4” square aperture, Housing 11-7/8” wide, 12-3/4” long, 4-1/2” deep. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling. . Fixtures have a trimless detail and require tape, skimcoat and

sanding to be integrated with gypsum ceiling 4. Lamping: 9W Soraa #SM16-09-36D-827-03 -2700K CCT, 80 CRI 9W 25º beam spread 5. Electrical: Low voltage magnetic toroidal HPF transformer. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Lamp to have 25º beam spread, Furnish and install linear spread lens. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: 362º lockable horizontal rotation and 35º lockable vertical tilt. 10. Finish: White. Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. USAi #9006-10-L-FL101A-volt b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 66

TYPE RR6

1. Description: Recessed, regressed, small aperture, round, trimless, adjustable accent fixture for use with LED MR16 lamp.

2. Dimensions: 3-1/4” diameter aperture, Housing 11-7/8” wide, 12-3/4” long, 4-1/2” deep. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling. . Fixtures have a trimless detail and require tape, skimcoat and

sanding to be integrated with gypsum ceiling 4. Lamping: 9W Soraa #SM16-09-36D-827-03 -2700K CCT, 80 CRI 9W 25º beam spread 5. Electrical: Low voltage magnetic toroidal HPF transformer. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Lamp to have 25º beam spread, Furnish and install solite lens. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: 362º lockable horizontal rotation and 35º lockable vertical tilt. 10. Finish: White. Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. USAi #9935-10-S-RDL101-NC-volt b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 67

TYPE RR7


2. Dimensions: 1-7/8” diameter aperture, Housing 10-5/8” wide, 12-1/2” long, 4-1/8” deep. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling. 4. Lamping: 9W Soraa #SM16-09-36D-827-03 -2700K CCT, 80 CRI 9W 36º beam spread 5. Electrical: Low voltage solid state electronic transformer. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Vertical groove black baffle. Lamp to have 36º beam spread, Furnish and install linear

spread lens. Linear lines of lens shall be perpendicular to adjacent wall. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: Lockable 25º vertical adjustment, 360º horizontal rotation. 10. Finish: White. Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:




265100 - 68

TYPE RR8

1. Description: Recessed, two-lamp regressed, rectangular, adjustable accent fixture for use with LED MR16 lamps.

2. Dimensions: 5-1/4”x1-3/4” aperture, Housing 10-3/4” wide, 19” long, 4-5/8” deep. 3. Mounting: Fixtures mount in ACT ceiling. 4. Lamping: 2 x 9W Soraa #SM16-09-25D-827-03 -2700K CCT, 80 CRI 9W 25º beam spread 5. Electrical: Low voltage magnetic toroidal HPF transformer. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Lamp to have 25º beam spread, Furnish and install solite lens. 8. Labels: Dry/ damp listing. 9. Features: Lockable 35º vertical adjustment, 2 x 180º horizontal adjustment. 10. Finish: White. Interior Designer to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. USAi #9366-10-S-BL405A-volt b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265100 - 69

TYPE-SL1

1. Description: Linear lensed LED fixture designed for cove mounting. 2. Dimensions: 1-7/16” wide, 1-3/8” deep, nominal 4’ length. 3. Mounting: Fixtures mount in a cove - refer to architectural drawings for mounting detail. Top of


4. Lamping: LED 2700K, CRI>80, High output, 6W per foot, 505 lumens/foot delivered. 5. Electrical: 0-10V source dimming driver. 10% minimum driving value. 6. Voltage: Voltage per engineer. 7. Optics: Frosted polycarbonate lens, 120º beam spread. 8. Labels: UL/ CUL dry/damp location. 9. Features: Polymer extruded housing, adjustable mounting brackets. Integral drive allows fixture to


a. Lumenpulse #LCN-HO-volt-48-27K-FR-WH-DIM b. Equal by: Ecosense or Philips



265100 - 70

TYPE-SL1a



4. Lamping: LED 2700K, CRI>80, High output, 6W per foot, 505 lumens/foot delivered. 5. Electrical: 0-10V source dimming driver. 10% minimum driving value. 6. Voltage: Voltage per engineer. 7. Optics: Frosted polycarbonate lens, 120º beam spread. 8. Labels: UL/ CUL dry/damp location. 9. Features: Polymer extruded housing, adjustable mounting brackets. Integral drive allows fixture to


a. Lumenpulse #LCN-HO-volt-12-27K-FR-WH-DIM b. Equal by: Ecosense or Philips



265100 - 71

TYPE-SL2



4. Lamping: LED 2700K, CRI>80, Normal output, 3W per foot, 297 lumens/foot delivered. 5. Electrical: 0-10V source dimming driver. 10% minimum driving value. 6. Voltage: Voltage per engineer. 7. Optics: Frosted polycarbonate lens, 120º beam spread. 8. Labels: UL/ CUL dry/damp location. 9. Features: Polymer extruded housing, adjustable mounting brackets. Integral drive allows fixture to


a. Lumenpulse #LCN-RO-volt-48-27K-FR-WH-DIM b. Equal by: Ecosense or Philips



265100 - 72

TYPE-SL2a



4. Lamping: LED 2700K, CRI>80, Normal output, 3W per foot, 297 lumens/foot delivered. 5. Electrical: 0-10V source dimming driver. 10% minimum driving value. 6. Voltage: Voltage per engineer. 7. Optics: Frosted polycarbonate lens, 120º beam spread. 8. Labels: UL/ CUL dry/damp location. 9. Features: Polymer extruded housing, adjustable mounting brackets. Integral drive allows fixture to


a. Lumenpulse #LCN-RO-volt-12-27K-FR-WH-DIM b. Equal by: Ecosense or Philips



265100 - 73

TYPE SL3

1. Description: Flexible LED linear strip light,that can be installed to run online voltage without additional power supply.

2. Dimensions: 7/8” wide x 1/4” deep lengths per plans. 3. Mounting: Fixtures mount under bar top and millwork banquettes. Provide 6' power cord for

mounting to furniture Provide continuous clear housing to prevent sagging and ensure a secure installation. Provide 6” connectors to address corner conditions. Conceal all wiring from view.


Can be dimmed with ELV dimmer. 6. Voltage: 120V 7. Optics: High efficiency LEDs provide 112 lm/W.Flexible, optically clear thermoplastic jacket, no

other lens needed. 8. Labels: ETL certified, indoors/ outdoors, damp, dry, wet locations 9. Features: Constant current IC’s provide uniform intensity over entire run. Built in surge protection

module. Snap-in clear plastic mounting channel. Fixtures mount under bar top and under benches. Provide continuous clear housing to prevent sagging. Provide 6” connectors to address corner conditions. All wiring shall be concealed from view.

10. Finish: White. 11. Approved Manufacturers:




265100 - 74

TYPE SL4

1. Description: Linear lensed LED channel for recess mounting. 2. Dimensions: 1.65” wide x 2.5” deep x varying lengths (45’ & 13’) as noted on plans. 3. Mounting: Recessed, curtain pocket. 4. Lamping: LEDs 2700K, CRI>80, 5.5 W/ft, 480 Lumens per foot. 5. Electrical: Dimmable, constant voltage driver, 100W 24V. 6. Voltage: Voltage per Electrical Engineer. 7. Optics: High brightness LEDs on 1.5” pitch 480 lumens/ft. Elliptical 50ºx 10º distribution. Provide

diffuse lens. 8. Labels: UL listed for damp locations. 9. Features: Extruded aluminum housings provided in custom lengths, recessed channel allows

elliptical beam dispersion and lens mounting. Fixtures recess into curtain pocket along curtain wall in the Le Meridien lobby

10. Finish: Interior Designer shall verify housing finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. LED Linear #XooLight Apollo 2-W827/L*-W-DI-O-BS-T-IP40 Power Supply: PSX24-100-DCX

b. Equal by: Winona or Optolum



265100 - 75

TYPE SL5

1. Description: Linear lensed LED channel for recess mounting. 2. Dimensions: 1.65” wide x 2.5” deep x 2’ length. 3. Mounting: Recessed, curtain pocket. 4. Lamping: LEDs 2700K, CRI>80, 5.5 W/ft, 480 Lumens per foot. 5. Electrical: Dimmable, constant voltage driver, 100W 24V. 6. Voltage: Voltage per Electrical Engineer. 7. Optics: High brightness LEDs on 1.5” pitch 480 lumens/ft. Elliptical 50ºx 10º distribution. Provide

diffuse lens. 8. Labels: UL listed for damp locations. 9. Features: Extruded aluminum housings provided in custom lengths, recessed channel allows

elliptical beam dispersion and lens mounting. Fixture recess mount in curtain pocket at AC lobby/Bar.

10. Finish: Interior Designer shall verify housing finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. LED Linear #XooLight Apollo 2-W827/L*-A-DI-O-BS-T-IP40 Power Supply: PSX24-100-DCX

b. Equal by: Winona or Optolum



265100 - 76

TYPE SL6

1. Description: Linear LED strip light with channel. 2. Dimensions: 0.31” wide x 0.088” deep, lengths per plans. Channel dimension: 0.68” wide x 0.34”

deep, lengths per plans. 3. Mounting: Fixtures recessed into routed channel located in shelving. Coordinate mounting and

Class II wireway w/ millwork shop drawings. 4. Lamping: LEDs 2700K, CRI>80, 3 W/ft, 234 Lumens per foot. 5. Electrical: Magnetic dimmable driver, 24V, 100W. Remote power supply required – mount in

millwork cabinet under shelves. 6. Voltage: Voltage per Electrical Engineer. 7. Optics: Milky Lens 70%. 8. Labels: IP20 & IP65 9. Features: Dry or wet location flexible LEDs. IP65 and IP68 are UV resistant. 3.0 watts per foot, 36

LEDs per foot. Cuttable every 0.98 inches. Fixtures mount into a channel routed into millwork shelving. Coordinate installation and wiring concealment with millwork contractor.

10. Finish: Architect shall verify stainless steel finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Acolyte LED #CHAS1M243.027-length b. Approved Equal by LED Linear or Jesco Lighting



265100 - 77

TYPE SL6a

1. Description: Linear LED strip light with channel. 2. Dimensions: 0.31” wide x 0.088” deep, lengths per plans. Channel dimension: 0.68” wide x 0.34”

deep, lengths per plans. 3. Mounting: Fixtures mount to back face of mirror in restrooms. Coordinate length and installation

with mirror installer. Fixture length should be 6” less than mirror. 4. Lamping: LEDs 2700K, CRI>80, 3 W/ft, 234 Lumens per foot. 5. Electrical: Magnetic dimmable driver, 24V, 100W. Remote power supply required – mount in

accessible location above ceiling. 6. Voltage: Voltage per Electrical Engineer. 7. Optics: Milky Lens 70%. 8. Labels: IP20 & IP65 9. Features: Dry or wet location flexible LEDs. IP65 and IP68 are UV resistant. 3.0 watts per foot, 36

LEDs per foot. Cuttable every 0.98 inches. 10. Finish: Architect shall verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Acolyte LED #CHAS1M243.027-length b. LED Linear or Jesco Lighting



265100 - 78

TYPE TL1

1. Description: Low profile adjustable LED track head with integral driver for use with GES one-circuit track.

2. Dimensions: 3-1/2” diameter, 6-1/4” overall height. 3. Mounting: Fixtures mount to suspended 1 -Circuit track, confirm which track connection in field. 4. Lamping: 19 W LED 1500 Lumens, 2700K 80CRI. 5. Electrical: Side mounted driver accepts all Spectrac dimming and control options. ELV MLV 1%

phase dimming 6. Voltage: 120 volts. 7. Optics: 24º beam spread. Snoot and Solite lens. 8. Labels: ETL Listed for dry or damp locations 9. Features: Die cast lamp holder and accessory cartridge. Passive cooled LED board with 3-step

Macadam ellipse binning. High tension, friction locking mechanism for aiming and rotation. Accepts two lens accessories. Rotates through 359º , tilts and locks through 90º..

10. Finish: Painted anodic bronze enamel. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Spectrum Lighting #SRDDLEDOC-19W-27K-MD-DS2W1-1-GES66-AZ-SO-SN34 b. Equal by: Edison Price or LSI



265100 - 79

TYPE TT1

1. Description: Suspended 1-circuit track. 2. Dimensions: 1.25 wide, 1.25 “deep Lengths vary per location - refer to architectural drawings for

lengths 3. Mounting: Suspended, from structure above ACT ceiling via allthread - track height shall such

that the bottom of TL1 with all accessories installed is 2” above finished face of wood beams – coordinate installation with millwork contractor. Provide all suspension hardware to ensure a secure, even mounting

4. Lamping: N/A 5. Electrical: 1 Circuit track with 1 neutral with Live middle or end feed. 6. Voltage: 120V 7. Optics: N/A 8. Labels: UL for Dry/ damp locations, 9. Features:.Formed aluminum minimum .070” thick. Molded thermoplastic connectors, power

feeds and end caps. Provide mini coupler to mechanically and electrically connect sections of track into one seamless run as noted on plans.

10. Finish: Matte black. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Spectrum Lighting #GES208+GES11 b. Equal by: Edison Price or LSI



265100 - 80

TYPE WL1

1. Description: Round louvered steplight for use with LED MR16 lamp. 2. Dimensions: Faceplate 5” diameter, depth 3-1/2”.Mounting: Surface wall. Fixture mounts over

recessed junction box in wall 3. Lamping: 9W Soraa #SM16-07-10D-827-03 + AC-GC-6060-00 -2700K CCT, 80 CRI 9W 35º

beam spread 4. Electrical: Remote transformer required & located in junction box. 5. Voltage: Voltage per Electrical Engineer. 6. Optics: 35º beam spread. 30º louver angle. Heat treated rectilinear lens provides wide lateral

distribution and long forward throw. 7. Labels: ETL listed to ANSI/UL standard 1838. Suitable for exterior mounting. 8. Features: Machined stainless steel faceplate. Louver pattern is machined into faceplate to

prevent direct view of the lamp. 9. Finish: Brushed stainless steel finish. Architect shall verify finish 10. Approved Manufacturers:

a. BK Lighting #S-SSL-MR-0-BRU-C Transformer #TRe20 b. Equal by: Winona Lighting or Bega



265100 - 81

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 SHIPPING AND STORAGE

A. All fixtures received at the site shall be stored in clean and dry space until fixtures are installed.

B. Manufacturer shall clearly mark each box with fixture designation prior to shipping. C. Reflector cones, baffles, louvers, aperture plates, and decorative elements of fixtures shall be

packed by the Manufacturer separate from the housing (body, stems, etc.) of the fixture.

3.02 LOCATION A. Locations of fixtures are shown diagrammatically. Verify exact location and spacing with

Reflected Ceiling Plans and other reference data before ordering of fixtures and during installation.

B. Notify Architect about field conditions at variance with Contract Documents before commencing installation.

C. Coordinate space conditions with other trades before ordering of fixtures. D. Pendant mount, as approved, surface type fixtures where required to meet space conditions. E. Coordinate length of continuous-run fluorescent fixtures with adjacent walls, partitions, coffers

and other architectural elements as required. 1. Continuous runs shall be defined as the optimal combination of 900mm and 1200mm lamp

length as necessary to complete runs with no more than 150mm of free space at either end of the run as provided by the contractor.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Provide accessories as required for ceiling construction type indicated on Finish Schedule.

Fixture catalog numbers do not necessarily denote specific mounting accessories for type of ceiling in which a fixture may be installed.

B. Provide adequate and sturdy support for each lighting fixture. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying weight and mounting method of all fixtures and furnish and install suitable supports. Fixture mounting assemblies shall comply with all local seismic codes and regulations.

C. Install rows of fixtures accurately on straight lines unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

Coordinate with mechanical work.

D. Install fixtures with vent holes free of air blocking obstacles. E. Where plaster ceilings occur, furnish plaster frames for setting under other applicable

sections. Direct the setting and be responsible for correct location; make sure the bottom of frame is flush with finished ceiling, forming screed edge for finished plaster. 1. Fixtures shall be supported by plaster frames utilizing yokes or leveling lugs.



265100 - 82

a. Fixtures and support elements shall not be mounted to or in contact with ducts or pipes.

b. Yoke shall have channel cross section of sufficient gauge, and shall support a fixture by means of not fewer than two (2) bolts each.

2. If air diffusers are located in common continuous rows with lighting fixtures in plaster ceilings, furnish plaster frames of proper length to accommodate diffusers.

3. Lighting fixtures recessed in ceilings which have a fire resistive rating of one hour or more shall be enclosed in a box which has a fire resistive rating equal to that of the ceiling.

F. Contractor shall be responsible for adjusting aperture rings on all ceiling recessed fixtures to

accommodate various ceiling material thickness. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the cut-out size in ceiling to ensure aperture covers cut-out entirely. The bottom of aperture rings shall be flush with finished ceiling or not more than 1.56mm above. Under no circumstances will the aperture ring extend below the finished ceiling surface.

G. For fixture with variable position lampholder assemblies Contractor shall confirm prior to installation proper lampholder (socket) position in field, and shall adjust, if necessary, after coordination with Manufacturer.

H. Surface Mounted Fixtures: Support surface mounted fixtures from structural members other

than ceiling tees. I. Pendant Mounted Fixtures:

i. Pendant mounted fixtures shall be supported from structural framework of ceiling or from inserts cast into slab.

ii. All Pendants shall have swivel aligners located at the top ends; pendants shall be 12.5mm rigid steel conduit unless specifically indicated otherwise on drawings or in specifications.

iii. All fluorescent pendant and surface mounted fixtures shall be supported with two (2) supports per 1200mm section or three (3) per 2400mm section.

J. Bracket Mounted Fixtures: For each bracket fixture, provide flanged metal stem attached to

outlet box, with threaded end suitable for supporting the fixture rigidly in design position. Flanged part of fixture stud shall be of broad base type, secured to outlet box at not fewer than three (3) points.

K. Top Relamping Fixtures: Top relamping fixtures shall have the necessary top-relamping screws loosened and moderately tightened, prior to installation, to assure ease of operation when relamping is required.

L. Fluorescent Fixtures: Replace noisy ballasts as directed, at no cost to the Owner. M. High Intensity Discharge Fixtures: Replace noisy blasts as directed, at no cost to the Owner. N. Mask the trims and bottoms of all lighting fixtures if necessary to protect the fixture during

construction. O. At the completion of construction clean the bottoms, the trim, the reflecting surfaces, lenses,

baffles, louvers and reflector cones of all lighting fixtures so as to render them free of any material, substance or film foreign to the fixture. If the luminaires are deemed dirty by the Architect at the completion of the project, the Contractor shall clean them at no additional cost to the Owner. Luminaire components whose finishes are damaged shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner.



265100 - 83

P. Ascertain and ensure that all lamps installed are exactly as specified for each fixture type. Q. Replace all burned-out or inoperative lamps, and inoperative ballasts in all high intensity

discharge and fluorescent fixtures before the building is accepted by the Owner so that all lighting fixtures will be in first-class operating condition.

R. Re-lamp all specified H.I.D. fixtures used as construction work lights with new specified

lamps. No H.I.D. lamps shall have a burning hours difference which exceeds forty (40) hours. S. Re-lamp all specified incandescent fixtures used as construction work lights with new

specified lamps. No incandescent lamps shall have a burning hours difference which exceeds forty (40) hours.

T. Provide labor and materials for final aiming of all adjustable fixtures under the Architect’s

supervision. Aiming shall take place immediately before building is turned over to Owner, after regular working hours where required.

END OF SECTION



265100 - 84


MCLA, Inc. EXTERIOR LIGHTING – PUBLIC SPACES 2016-06-13

265600 - 1

SECTION 265600

EXTERIOR LIGHTING – PUBLIC SPACES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Related Sections: Division 26, and the following sections are related to this Section

1. Section 26 5100 “Interior Lighting” 1.2 SUMMARY

A. Included in the Work of this Section are labor, materials, and appurtenances required to complete the Work of this Section, as specified herein, as required by job conditions, or as indicated on drawings. The scope of this section includes general requirements for Luminaries and their components, coordination, definitions, quality assurances, submittals, mockups, samples and general responsibility for a complete job.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The term “luminaries” refers to lighting fixtures with their lamps and all other components.

B. “Alternate Manufacturers” are defined as manufacturers that make products equal to the specified product as to design intent of performance.

1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provided labor, materials, and equipment for the installation of outdoor luminaries, lighting

equipment, and lamps as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

B. Refer to architectural drawings for dimensions and details. Check and verify dimensions and details on drawings before proceeding with the Work. Report any inconsistencies or discrepancies at once to the Architect. Should it appear that the Work intended is not sufficiently detailed or explained on the drawings or in the specification, apply to the Architect for further drawings or explanations, as may be necessary. Conform to these explanations in the work. If any question arises about the true meaning of the drawings or specifications, refer the matter the Architect, whose decision is final and conclusive. Under no circumstances shall any request for extra compensation be honored where the basis of claim is such a clarification by the Architect. In no case submit a bid, or proceed on any Work with uncertainty. The intention of this specification and the accompanying or applicable drawings is to provide a job complete in every respect. Contractor is responsible for this result.

C. Existing luminaries shall be removed as directed by scope of work. Proper disposal of

components, including but not limited to fluorescent lamps and ballast containing PCB’s, shall be conducted according to relevant Federal, State. Local, an EPA regulations or guidelines. Contractor shall provide Owner with verification of proper disposal.

1.5 COORDINATION



265600 - 2

A. Luminarie and pole locations as indicated on the electrical drawings are generalized and

approximate. Carefully verify locations with Architect’s drawings, landscape plans, and other reference data prior to installation. Check for adequacy of clearance and non-interference with other equipment. Bring conflicts to the Architect’s attention before proceeding with the Work. Although the location of equipment included in the Work of this Section may be shown on the Contract Drawings in a certain place, actual construction may disclose that the location for the Work does not make its position easily and quickly accessible. In such cases, call the Architect’s attention to this situation before installing this Work, and comply with Architect’s installation instructions.

B. Clearly indicated the Work to be performed by other trades’ contractors, and the materials that

are adjacent to or abutting the Work of this Section. Coordinate as required. Give ample notice of special openings required for placing equipment in, on, or near the building, in order to avoid damage to existing or completed Work. Furnish the materials and labor for Work included under this Section in ample time, and in sufficient quantities so that all of the Work may be installed in proper sequence to avoid unnecessary delay or disruption of finished work. Schedule the Work to prevent Work of this Section being damaged by other construction operations. Removed and replaced Work so damaged at no cost to Owner. Coordinate and schedule the Work of this Section with the Work of other Sections, Utility Companies and the Telephone Company so that there shall be no delay in the proper installation and completion of any part of each respective Work. Construction Work shall proceed in its natural sequence without unnecessary delay caused by the Work of this Section.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCES

A. General Notes on Control: Exteriors and Site Lighting – All exterior fixtures shall be energized in response to pre-programmed astronomical time clock events. Time-clocks will activate lights at dusk, and reduce lighting levels after hours (e.g. 11pm to dawn), turning all lights off at sunrise. Remote, manual override control for certain zones, for special event or to turn lights off when lights are buried by snow shall be provided for authorized individuals and/or security officers as required.

1.7 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Acceptable manufactures are listed in each section with the product descriptions. Acceptable manufacturers shall be capable of providing proof of satisfactory production of equal or similar luminaries for a period of at least five years. See Paragraph 2.1.

1.8 STATEMENT OF APPLICATION:

A. By commencing the Work of this Section, the Contractor assumes overall responsibility, as a part of the warranty of the Work, to assure that assemblies, components and parts shown or required within the Work of this Section, comply with the Contract Documents.

1.9 EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY:

A. Provide similar luminaries, ballasts and other components fabricated by one manufacturer, to simplify maintenance and replacement of equipment. Under no circumstances shall lamps of the same type, even if different wattages, be supplied by more than one manufacture.

1.10 REGULATORY AGENCIES:



265600 - 3

A. Provide luminaries constructed, wired and installed in compliance with the current edition of applicable city, state and national codes. Provide luminaries conforming to or exceeding Underwriters Laboratories (UL) standards, and to provisions of applicable codes which exceed those standards.

B. For any category of luminarie tested by any of the following agencies, provide luminaries listed

and labeled by an independent Nationally Recognized Testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910 such as UL, ETL, CSA, MET

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories shall be listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with IEEE C2 “National Electrical Safety Code”

E. Comply with NFPA 70 1.11 SUBMITTALS

A. General

1. For each luminarie, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting type designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: a. Physical description of luminarie, including materials, dimensions, weight, effective

projected area (EPA), and verification of intended parameters. b. Details for attaching luminaries and accessories c. Details of installation and construction. d. Photometric testing and reporting shall conform to IESNA procedures. Submit

photometric data based on laboratory tests of each type complete with specified lamps, ballasts, and accessories. 1) Photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. 2) Manufacturer Certified Photometric data: shall be certified by manufacture’s

laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

e. Ballast, including energy efficiency data. f. Lamps including rated life, lumen output, lumen mortality curve, CCT, CRI, and

efficacy data (lumens/watt), end-of-lamp-life-protection, BEF, BF. g. Materials, dimensions, and finish of poles and other support components h. Means of attaching luminaries to supports, and indications that attachment is

suitable for components involved. i. Anchor bolts for poles. j. Manufactured pole foundations.

B. Submit shop drawings for each type of luminarie or pole, except where specified luminaries are standard, unmodified, “off-the-shelf” units, fully describe by catalogue cuts. 1. Manufacturer’s Catalogue Sheets shall indicated input watts and electrical

characteristics, ambient temperature rating, noise level rating, IP Rating, mounting methods and UL or ETL listing for use with required lamp and ballast (if any).



265600 - 4

2. Detail equipment assemblies and indicated dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of filed assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer. 4. Design calculations, certified by a qualified professional engineer, indicating strength of

screw foundations and soil conditions on which they are based. 5. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: For products designated for sample submission in the fixture descriptions, each

sample shall include lamps, ballasts and plug. 1. After shop drawings, data and any other required submissions have been approved,

submit to Architect samples as directed in the contract documents.

D. Emerging Technologies: Rapid improvements in lamp, ballasts, sources or systems have provided increased efficacy, color, lamp life, maintenance curves and the like. Architect reserves the right to upgrade technologies or product features not available at the time of specification. Such upgrade shall not change the scope of contractor’s work, nor shall cost differential be great than manufacture’s cost increase to the contractor from specified to new technology. Owner shall have the right to refuse such upgrade upon presentation of itemized manufacturer’s quotation detailing the cost of said upgrade. The following lamp types, sources and applications are currently undergoing rapid development and may be expected to fall under this provision: SSI (LED), HID (Ceramic MH), NEMA Premium Ballasts (T8), lighting control systems or components, etc.

E. Pole and Support Component Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of poles, certifying that

products are designed for indicated load requirements in AASHTO LTS-4-M and that load imposed by luminarie and attachments has been included in design. The certification shall be based on designed calculations specific to this particular project by a professional engineer.

F. Owner’s Manual: Prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall provide a complete set of

operation and maintenance manuals, as described in PART 3 below. 1.12 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufactures agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain, perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lighting damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage. 1. Warranty Period for Luminaries: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.

Including ballasts, lenses, and other fixture components. 2. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for Poles: Repair or replace lighting poles and standards that fail in

finish, materials, and workmanship within manufacturer’s standard warranty period, but not less than three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.13 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Luminaries or other materials shall not be shipped, stored or installed into the Work unless prior approval has been received, based upon the submittal of shop drawings, samples, catalogue cuts, test data, certificates or other material submitted for approval. Make modifications to



265600 - 5

luminaries in accordance with Architect’s comments concerning submittals, as a part of the work of this Section.

B. Luminaries and their component elements shall be delivered to the job site factory-assembled

and wired to the greatest extent practical, in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings, samples, certificates and catalogue cuts, and shall be handled in a careful manner to avoid damage.

C. Luminaries and their component elements delivered to the job sit shall be stored in a secure,

weather protected location access to which shall be controlled by the owner or designated owner’s representative. Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that no material delivered to the site is used for any other purpose than that which is specified herein.

1.14 MOCK-UP

A. As a part of the Work of this Section, when specifically called for in the fixture descriptions and at no additional cost to Owner, temporarily install, connect and adjust a reasonable number of luminaries, three (3) unless otherwise stated.

B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide a mock-up of the lighting fixture or

lighting systems as indicated in the fixture description. The mock-up shall be erected within a time period and in a location that is acceptable to the Architect.

C. The mock-up installation shall closely conform to the conditions of the actual installation as to:

mounting height, number and type of lamps, material, color and etc. The Contractor shall submit a written description of each proposed mock-up with drawings in order to obtain the Architect’s approval prior to commencement of each mock-up.

D. The purpose of the mock-up will be to study the general appearance and performance of the

intended lighting systems. At that time, certain minimal test variations may be required including lamp location, lamp type, reflector shape, color and etc. Final modifications, if any, shall be considered a part of these Specifications and shall be accomplished with no additional cost to the Owner.

1.15 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Spare parts stock shall be furnished by the Contractor to the Owner upon completion of the

work. All boxes shall be clearly labeled regarding contents, relevant fixture type, and description. All spare parts shall be turned over to the Owner’s authorized representative, with the Architect or Construction Manager present, and a receipt in duplicate, signed by the site representative shall be delivered to the Owner’s authorized representative.

B. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Lamps: 10% of each type and rating installed, but not less than six (6) of each lamp. 2. Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and other Optical Parts: 5% of each type and rating

installed but not less than three (3) of each. 3. Ballasts: 5% of each type and rating installed but not less than three (3) of each. 4. Globes and Guards: 5% of each type and rating installed but not less than three (3) of

each



265600 - 6

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

A. Provide materials, equipment, appurtenances and workmanship for the Work of this Section conforming to the highest commercial standards, as specified and indicated on the drawing. Make luminarie parts and components not specifically identified or indicated on the drawings, of materials most appropriated to their use or function, and resistant to corrosion and to thermal and mechanical stresses encountered in the normal application and function of the luminaries in this application.

B. Luminaries shall comply with the most recent, relevant UL standard for the temperature and

climate conditions most likely to be experienced at this specific project location. Luminaries shall be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Additional Tests, Conditions, and Standards – provide luminaries meeting or exceeding the

following:

1. Luminarie Efficiency Rating (LER) Tests: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 for appropriate lamp type and distribution.

2. Lateral Light Distribution Patterns: Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaries.

3. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 4. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum unless otherwise indicated.

Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. 5. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather-and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or

deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaries. 6. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under

operation conditions. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.

7. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel or brass. 8. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changed due to aging, exposure to

heat, moisture, and UV radiation. 9. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light

distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field. 10. Internal reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise

indicated: a. White Surfaces: 85 percent. b. Specular Surfaces: 85 percent. c. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 80 percent.

11. Gaskets for Lenses and Refractors: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to

seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminarie doors. 12. Luminarie and Pole Finish: All exterior finishes shall be factory-applied. Manufacturer’s

standard finish applied to factory-assembled and –tested luminarie before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials a. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaries: Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal

Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for applying and designating finishes.



265600 - 7

1) Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, “Solvent

Cleaning,” to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Removed mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No.1, “White Metal Blast Cleaning,” or SSPC-SP 8, “Pickling.”

2) Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer’s standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-build polyurethane enamel. a) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. b) Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaries: Comply with

NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for applying and designating finishes

3) Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

4) Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax.

5) Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium stain; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

6) Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish; etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA611.

a) Color: as specified below

b. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with current UL 1598. Include specified lamps

and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

D. Marking of Luminaries Plainly mark luminaries equipped with ballasts for operation of specific lamps, (e.g., “use with Pulse Start Ceramic Metal Halide Lamps Only”). Similarly, mark other luminaries according to proper lamp type or wattage restrictions. Use high lumens 1.8 BF ballasts only and clearly mark ballasts that have multi-level outputs such as, and indicated proper terminals for the various outputs. Provide markings that are clear and that are located to be readily visible to service personnel, but invisible from normal viewing angels when lamps are in place. 1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. “USES ONLY XXXX LAMP” and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, ), tube configurations (twin, quad, triple), base

type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaries. c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED 17, DB56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for

HID luminaries. Use only Pulse Start Metal Halide lamps. d. Ballast type (rapid start, programmed start) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent

luminaries.

E. Luminaire Mounted Photoelectric Relays



265600 - 8

1. Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A. 2. Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and

factory set to turn light unit on at Pre-determined fc and off at Pre-determined fc with 15-scond minimum time delay. Relay shall have directional lens in front of photocell to prevent artificial light sources from causing false turnoff. a. Relay with locking-type receptacle shall comply with ANSI C136-10. b. Adjustable window slide for adjusting on-off set points.

F. Materials and Fabrication

1. Provide luminaries completely factory-assembled and wired and equipped with necessary

sockets, ballasts, wiring, shielding, reflectors, channels, lenses, and other parts and appurtenances necessary. Deliver to project site ready for installation and to complete the luminarie installation.

G. Finishes

1. Apply luminary’s finishes after fabrication in a manner that assures a durable wear-

resistant surfacing

H. Fluorescent Ballasts 1. Provide identical ballasts within each luminarie type. Provide ballasts that are suitable for

UL-listed for the electrical characteristics of the supply circuits to which they are to be connected, and which are suitable for operating the specified lamps.

2. Unless otherwise specified, provide ballast of same type and same manufacturer, for ease of stocking and replacement. Use multiple lamp ballasts to the greatest extent possible.

3. Provide NEMA “Premium” high performance ballasts of all categories of ballast where such a standard exists.

4. Provide ballasts designed for “Cold Weather Starting temp≤-40°C” when such ballasts exists.

5. Ballast shall be manufactured in an ISO 9002 certified facility. 6. Manufacturer shall have minimum 15 years of manufacturing experience. 7. Ballast, unless specified otherwise, shall be same manufacturer, and model in each

fixture of the same type. Acceptable ballast manufacturers unless otherwise noted are: a. Advance b. Universal Lighting Technologies c. Osram/Sylvania d. Vossloch-Schwabe (Aromat) e. Metrotech

8. Ballast Characteristics

a. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum. b. Sound Rating: Class P c. Total harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. d. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1, energy-saving, high power

factor, Class P, automatic-reset thermal protection. e. Case Temperature for Compact Lamp Ballasts: 65 deg C, maximum. f. Transient-Voltage Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2,

Category A or better.



265600 - 9

I. Lamps

1. General

a. Provide electric lamps as required, during construction, including lamps for

luminaries furnished by others. b. Provide a complete set of new lamps, as described in this Section and for each

luminarie, at the completion of the Work, leaving luminaries and lighting equipment completely lamped and/or in normal operating condition. Provide spares in accordance with the paragraph titled “Extra Materials,” above.

c. The following lamp manufacturers are approved unless otherwise specified: GE, Osram/Sylvania, Philips,

d. Submit catalogue cuts of all lamps to be used in the Work, along with the shop drawing submittal.

e. Unless otherwise indicated, supply high output, high performance “super” T8 fluorescent lamps, with 3100 lumen initial output, 92% maximum lumen degradation, extended life to 24,000 hours, and CRI about 84.

f. Unless otherwise indicated, supply pulse start, ceramic arc tube compact metal halide lamps with maximum lumen depreciation 20% at 21,000 hours, CCT 4200, CRI ≥90.

J. Metal Halide Ballasts

1. Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open-circuit operation without

reduction of average lamp life. 2. In addition, include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor

type. b. Minimum Starting Temperature: ≤ - 40% F c. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F

3. Auxiliary, Instant-On, System: Factory-installed feature automatically switches quartz or

LED lamp on when fixture is initially energized and when momentary power outages occur. System automatically turns quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately 60 percent of light output.

K. Metal Halide Lampholders

1. Proved Pulse start metal halide sockets

L. Luminaire Ratings

1. General: Provide luminaries designed and manufactured specifically for “rated” (e.g.,

damp, wet, hazardous) location service. Components, including nuts, bolts, rivets, springs, and similar parts shall be made of materials of effective corrosion resistance, or of materials which have been subjected to finishing treatment which will assure such resistance.

M. General Requirements for Poles and Support Components

1. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4-M.



265600 - 10

a. Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without

failure, permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in “Structural Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection.”

b. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of luminaries and brackets by an adequate safety factor ≥1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be used in pole selection strength analysis.

2. Luminarie Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminarie manufacturers’ mounting requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated.

3. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components. a. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. b. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication unless otherwise indicated. In marine environments, provide stainless steel hardware.

c. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.

4. Handhole: Oval-shaped, with minimum clear opening of 2-1/2 by 5 inches (65 by 130 mm), with cover secured by stainless-steel captive screws.

5. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete.”

6. Power-Installed Screw Foundations: Factory fabricated by pole manufacturer, with structural steel complying with ASTM 123/A 123M; and with top-plate and mounting bolts to match pole base flange and strength required to support pole, luminarie, and accessories.

7. Breakaway Supports: Frangible breakaway supports, tested by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, according to AASHOT LTS-4-M.

N. Steel Poles

1. Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000

psig (317 MPa); one-piece construction up to 6000mm in height with access handhold in pole wall. a. Shape: as specified in LIGHTING FIXTURE DESCRIPTIONS b. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway

support.

2. Steel Mast Arms: Continuously welded to pole attachment plate. Material and finish same as pole.

3. Brackets for Luminaries: Detachable, cantilever, without underbracing. a. Adapter fitting welded to pole, allowing the bracket to be bolted to the pole

mounted adapter, then bolted together with stainless-steel bolts. b. Cross Section: Tapered oval, with straight tubular end section to accommodate

luminarie. 1) Match pole material and finish.



265600 - 11

4. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminarie or luminaries and brackets indicted, and securely fastened to pole atop.

5. Steps: Fixed steel, with nonslip treads, positioned for 381mm vertical spacing, alternating on opposite sides of pole; first step at elevation 3000 mm above finished grade.

6. Intermediate Handhold and Cable Support: Weather tight, 76mm-by-127-mm handhold located at midpoint of pole with cover for access to internal welded attachment lug for electric cable support grip.

7. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 13-mm threaded lug, complying with requirements in Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems,” listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole.

8. Cable Support Grip: Wire-mesh type with rotating attachment eye, sized for diameter of cable and rated for a minimum load equal to weight of supported cable times a 5.0 safety factor.

9. Platform for Lamp and Ballast Servicing: Factory fabricated of steel with finish matching that of pole.

10. Prime-Coat Finish: Manufacturer’s standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting. 11. Galvanized Finish: After fabrication, hot-dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 123/A

123M 12. Factory-Painted Finish: Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural

and Metal Products” for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. a. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, “Solvent

Cleaning,” to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, “White Metal Blast Cleaning” or with SSPC-SP 8, “Pickling.”

b. Interior Surfaces of Pole: Once coast of bituminous paint, or otherwise treat for equal corrosion protection.

c. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer’s standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.

d. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

O. Aluminum Poles 1. Poles: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 5052-H34 marine sheet alloy with access handhold

in pole wall. a. Shape: as specified in lighting fixture descriptions

1) Mounting Provisions; Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or

breakaway support.

2. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminarie or luminaries and brackets indicated, and securely fastened to pole top.

3. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 13-mm threaded lug, complying with requirements in Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems,” listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole.

4. Brackets for Luminaries: Detachable, with pole and adapter fittings of cast aluminum. Adapter fitting welded to ole and bracket, then bolted together with stainless –steel bolts.



265600 - 12

a. Tapered oval cross section, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminarie.

b. Finish: Same as pole/ Luminaire

5. Prime-Coat Finish: Manufacturer’s standard prime-coat ready for field paining. 6. Aluminum Finish: Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and

Metal Products” for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

a. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

b. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax.

c. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin, Chemical Finish; etched, medium matter, Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

d. Class I Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

e. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

P. Receptacles:

1. Provide poles with locked, waterproof, duplex, 120v electrical receptacle. 2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURE DESCRIPTIONS



265600 - 13

TYPE GL1

1. Description: Medium aperture, in ground, 24V dimmable, LED uplight. 2. Dimensions: Faceplate 4” diameter, 4” deep. 3. Mounting: In ground, Fixture mounts at steel canopy beams at LM. 4. Lamping: 3x3W Cree XPE LED 5. Electrical: Remote 24VDC driver required. Integral 3W 24VDC 0-10V dimming power supply. 6. Voltage: Voltage per engineer. 7. Optics: 6º beam spread, Internally frosted toughened glass. 8. Labels: Wet label IP68 9. Features: Cast stainless steel body, on board electronics for 0-10V dimming. Threaded lens

frame allows replacement without screws or tools. 0.4” thick tempered glass lens, walk-over, drive-over rated at 11,000 lbs.

10. Finish: Stainless steel. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Design Plan #C4X-L-3R-Z-SS-1-Q-G-0 Power supply PPL T00158 (2 minimum) b. Equal by: Filix or Erco



265600 - 14

TYPE OL1

1. Description: Recessed, regressed, square, flanged, adjustable accent LED fixture.. 2. Dimensions: 3-1/2” square aperture, 5-1/2” square flange, Housing 13” wide, 18-5/8” long,7”

deep. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling. Fixture mounts at outdoor soffit condition 4. Lamping: 24 W LED 2700K, CRI 80+, 1875 delivered lumens 5. Electrical: ELDO 0-10V logarithmic dimming driver intended for use with Lutron systems. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Injection molded polycarbonate reflector optimized for 30º beam spread. Provide Solite

lens and and install spread lens to provide a 40ºx60º light distribution. 8. Labels: Wet location listing. 9. Features: 362º lockable horizontal rotation and 40º lockable vertical tilt. 10. Finish: Architect shall provide RAL number or sample to match. Architect shall verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. USAI Lighting #3131A10-W-B1-S-RAL-LSTA4-8424 -C2-27KS-30-NC-volt-DIML6A-AS61F

b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265600 - 15

TYPE OL1a


deep. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling. Fixture mounts at outdoor soffit condition 4. Lamping: 24 W LED 2700K, CRI 80+, 1875 delivered lumens 5. Electrical: ELDO 0-10V logarithmic dimming driver intended for use with Lutron systems. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Injection molded polycarbonate reflector optimized for 30º beam spread. Solite lens.

Furnish and install spread lens to provide a 40ºx60º light distribution.. 8. Labels: Wet location listing. 9. Features: 362º lockable horizontal rotation and 40º lockable vertical tilt. 10. Finish: Architect shall provide RAL number or sample to match. Architect shall verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. USAI Lighting #3131A10-W-B1-S-RAL-LSTA4-8424 -C2-27KS-30-NC-volt-DIML6A-AS61F

b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element

.



265600 - 16

TYPE OL1b


deep. 3. Mounting: Recessed ceiling. Fixture mounts at outdoor soffit condition 4. Lamping: 33 W LED 2700K, CRI 80+, 1875 delivered lumens 5. Electrical: ELDO 0-10V logarithmic dimming driver intended for use with Lutron systems. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: Injection molded polycarbonate reflector optimized for 30º beam spread. 8. Labels: Wet location listing. 9. Features: 362º lockable horizontal rotation and 40º lockable vertical tilt. 10. Finish: Architect shall provide RAL number or sample to match. Architect shall verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. USAI Lighting #3131A30-W-B1-S-RAL-LSTA4-8433 -C2-27KS-30-NC-volt-DIML6A b. Equal by Lucifer Lighting or Element



265600 - 17

TYPE OL2

1. Description: Surface mounted small scale linear LED fixture for wet locations. 2. Dimensions: 1.65” wide, 2.44” deep, 11’-6” nominal length. 3. Mounting: Fixtures mounts with fixed mounting to entry canopy structure - refer to architectural

drawings for mounting condition. 4. Lamping: Nichia 757 white LEDs 16 LEDs/ ft, 7.6 W/ft, 544 lumens/ft. 3000K, CRI 80+. 5. Electrical: Remote 24VAC dimmable magnetic transformers required - (1) every 1 fixture 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: 60º beam spread. 8. Labels: IP67 ETL listed for wet locations. Complies with UL standard 2108. 9. Features: Extruded aluminum housing. Homogenized opal white lens for completely even lighting

diffusion. High lumen output form a low profile and narrow fixture. 10. Finish: Architect shall provide RAL number or paint sample to match. Architect shall verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. LED Linear #Xoolight-HD25-W824/138”-W-MOD-T-IP67 (power supply #16000065) b. Equal by



265600 - 18

TYPE OL2a

1. Description: Surface mounted small scale linear LED fixture for wet locations. 2. Dimensions: 1.65” wide, 2.44” deep, 23’-6” nominal length. 3. Mounting: Fixtures mounts with fixed mounting to entry canopy structure - refer to architectural

drawings for mounting condition. 4. Lamping: Nichia 757 white LEDs 16 LEDs/ ft, 7.6 W/ft, 544 lumens/ft. 3000K, CRI 80+. 5. Electrical: Remote 24VAC dimmable magnetic transformers required - (2) for every 1 fixture 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer. 7. Optics: 60º beam spread. 8. Labels: IP67 ETL listed for wet locations. Complies with UL standard 2108. 9. Features: Extruded aluminum housing. Homogenized opal white lens for completely even lighting

diffusion. High lumen output form a low profile and narrow fixture. Feed power from both ends of fixture. Coordinate power path with canopy shop drawings and installer.

10. Finish: Architect shall provide RAL number or paint sample to match. Architect shall verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. LED Linear #Xoolight-HD25-W824/138”-W-MOD-T-IP67 (power supply #16000065) b. Equal by



265600 - 19

TYPE OL3

1. Description: Flexible LED linear strip light that can be installed to run line voltage without additional power supply.

2. Dimensions: 7/8” wide x 1/4” deep lengths per plans. 3. Mounting: Provide 6' power cord for mounting to bar counter & bench Provide wet rated wall

mounted outlet for power connection Coordinate outlet height with furniture dimensions. Provide continuous clear housing to prevent sagging and ensure a secure installation.


Can be dimmed with ELV dimmer. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer 7. Optics: High efficiency LEDs provide 112 lm/W.Flexible, optically clear thermoplastic jacket, no

other lens need. 8. Labels: ETL certified, indoors/ outdoors, damp, dry, wet locations 9. Features: Built in surge protection module. Snap-in clear plastic mounting channel. 10. Finish: Standard white. 11. Approved Manufacturers:




265600 - 20

TYPE OL4

1. Description: Surface wall mount LED area light with asymmetric distribution for outdoor use. 2. Dimensions:9.5”l x 4.125”w, 7.875”h 3. Mounting: Fixtures mount over recessed junction box at roof terrace canopy –refer to architectural

elevations for location. Fixtures mount to vertical face of roof line at terrace. 4. Lamping: 25.3 W LED, 830k, 1870 Lumen 3000K, CRI>80, 5. Electrical: Integral power supply with 0-10V dimming driver, 120-277 VAC. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer 7. Optics: Asymmetric, anodized aluminum internal reflector 8. Labels: CSA certified to U.S. and Canadian standards, suitable for wet locations. Protection class

IP65 9. Features: Fully gasketed for weather tight operation using a molded silicone rubber gasket. Can

be installed upward or downward facing positions. Install so light is directed toward the roof terrace.

10. Finish: Architect shall verify finish 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Bega #2386LED b. Equal by: Design Plan or Interlux



265600 - 21

TYPE OL5

1. Description: Recessed linear LED downlight fixture 2. Dimensions: 2.25” wide, 3.375” overall depth, 4’ nominal length. 3. Mounting: Fixtures recess into metal panel ceiling – Provide trimless housing for use in metal

ceiling. 4. Lamping: LED 8 W/ft, 827K, 400 lumens/ ft.3000K, CRI>80, 5. Electrical: Integral 0-10v dimmable driver. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer 7. Optics: High Efficiency WISP Lens. 8. Labels: UL/CUL Damp Location. 9. Features: Trimless for seamless integration into ceiling. 60% recycled aluminum extruded

housing. Electrostatically applied powder coat finish. 10. Finish: Architect to verify finish. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Alight #ACL5-4-G-LS-30-HE-U-O-D-Q b. Equal by: Design Plan or Bega



265600 - 22

TYPE OL6

1. Description: Adjustable, cylindrical surface mounted uplight for use with LED MR16 lamp. 2. Dimensions:2-1/4” diameter, 4-3/4” long. 3. Mounting: Fixtures mount in planters and aim up on trees Coordinate wiring into planter - wiring

shall be concealed from view. 4. Lamping: 9W Soraa #SM16-09-36D-827-03 -2700K CCT, 80 CRI 9W 36º beam spread. 5. Electrical: Provide remote magnetic transformer, location TBD. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer 7. Optics: Lamp 36º beam spread. Provide honeycomb baffle and soft focus lens. 8. Labels: ETL listed to ANSI/UL Standard 1838 Suitable for use in wet locations. 9. Features: 360º rotational knuckle mounting system. Body fully machined from copper free

aluminum. Unibody design provides enclosed, water proof wireway and heat sink. Integral knuckle for maximum mechanical strength.

10. Finish: Black polyester powder coating. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Hydrel #Aspen-SS-M20-12-FL-WLC-350R-STK-L2-C3-BRSS+TM100-volt b. Equal by: Erco or BK Lighting



265600 - 23

TYPE OL7

1. Description: Slender, cylindrical LED path-light, with glare shield. 2. Dimensions:1” diameter pipe, 24” stem length, glare shield 2-3/16” diameter. 3. Mounting: Provide CUS 1534 base for use directly on waterproofing membrane or in planter.

Coordinate wiring into planter - wiring shall be concealed from view. 4. Lamping: 3 W LED 2700K, CRI>80, 250 lumens delivered. 5. Electrical: Remote magnetic transformer required - location TBD 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer 7. Optics: Shock resistant, tempered, frosted glass lens. Machined glare shield reduces aperture

brightness. 8. Labels: ETL listed to ANSI/UL Standard 1838 Suitable for use in wet locations. 9. Features: Custom mounting and glare shield. Body fully machined from copper free aluminum.

Unibody design provides enclosed, water proof wireway and heat sink. 10. Finish: Black polyester powder coating 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. BK Lighting #LT-24-LED-e39-BLP-GS+cus1534-29 –transformer b. Equal by: Erco or Winona



265600 - 24

TYPE OL8

1. Description: Adjustable, cylindrical surface mounted downlight with LED light source. 2. Dimensions: Fixture - 3” diameter, 8” long. Canopy – 2-1/4” diameter, 1-1/2” tall 3. Mounting: Fixture mounts to AC Canopy structure. Mounting base accessory attaches directly to

canopy structure – pull 20’ class II power cables through trellis structure. 4. Lamping: 29 W LED 2700K, CRI>80, 1525 lumens delivered. 5. Electrical: Remote dimmable power supply, provide dual to power (2) fixtures per device. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer 7. Optics: Lamp 40º beam spread. Provide soft focus lens and hexcell louver. 8. Labels: ETL listed to ANSI/UL Standard 1838. Certified to CAN/CSA Standard C22.2 No. 9 and

Can/CSA TIL B-58B. RoHs compliant. Suitable for indoor or outdoor use. Suitable for use in wet locations.

9. Features: 360º rotational knuckle mounting system. Body fully machined from copper free aluminum. Unibody design provides enclosed, water proof wireway and heat sink. Integral knuckle for maximum mechanical strength. Provide class II power leads through hollow trellis structure and connect power supply with fixtures. Fixtures aim down to evenly illuminate entry to AC hotel

10. Finish: Powder coated satin aluminum. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. BK Lighting #DE-LED-X33-FL-SAP-12-11-C + SMJ-SAP + DRM-D31ARC b. Equal by: Bega or Hydrel



265600 - 25

TYPE OL9

1. Description: Adjustable, cylindrical surface mounted downlight for use with LED MR16 lamp. 2. Dimensions:2-1/4” diameter, 4-3/4” long. 3. Mounting: Fixture mounts to trellis structure. Thread 360SL base directly to trellis structure – pull

20’ class II power cables through trellis structure. Provide 360Sl Rotational Knuckle Mounting System.

4. Lamping: 9W Soraa #SM16-09-36D-827-03 -2700K CCT, 80 CRI 9W 36º beam spread. 5. Electrical: Provide 150w magnetic transformer. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer 7. Optics: Lamp 36º beam spread. Provide rectilinear lens. 8. Labels: ETL listed to ANSI/UL Standard 1838. Certified to CAN/CSA Standard C22.2 No. 9 and

Can/CSA TIL B-58B. RoHs compliant. Suitable for indoor or outdoor use. Suitable for use in wet locations.

9. Features: 360º rotational knuckle mounting system. Body fully machined from copper free aluminum. Unibody design provides enclosed, water proof wireway and heat sink. Integral knuckle for maximum mechanical strength. Modify fixture with 20’ class II power leads for use with hollow trellis structure. Pull wiring through trellis structure back to transformer.

10. Finish: Powder coated satin black. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. BK Lighting #DS-MR-0-BLP-13-E-360SL-MOD + TR150-volt b. Equal by: Bega or Hydrel



265600 - 26

TYPE OM1

1. Description: Recessed, round LED paver for outdoor use. 2. Dimensions:2-1/4” diameter, 4-3/4” long. 3. Mounting: Fixtures recess into paver at roof terrace. Verify placement with landscape plans. 4. Lamping: 3W LED 827K, 85 CRI 4000k CCT 5. Electrical: Osram 10% 0-10v dimming. 96W, 24VDC, 120-277VAC. Provide remote power supply

in an accessible location. 6. Voltage: Voltage per electrical engineer 7. Optics: Line of light. 8. Labels: UL STD 1598, wet location; Concrete housing: walkover rated 1500lb; Tiles housing:

driverover rated 3000lb. 9. Features: Trimless for seamless integration into grade; optional stainless steel trim. Regressed

LED for glare reduction. Aluminum construction, direct concrete pour housing, with diffused tempered glass.

10. Finish: Stainless steel. 11. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Interlux #FXSL-40-H-27-LL-24 + D-520-24006 b. Equal by: DesignPlan or Bega



265600 - 27

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. Install Luminaries complete with lamps, as indicated, and with equipment, materials, parts, attachments, devices aligner an filler clips, hardware, hangers, cables, supports, channels, frames and brackets necessary to make a safe, complete and fully operative installation.

3.2 ACCESSIBILITY

A. Install equipment such as junction and pull boxes, luminarie housings, transformers, ballasts, switches and controls, and other apparatus that shall be reached from time to time for operation and maintenance, to be reasonably accessible and appropriate for mounting and operational conditions.

3.3 SUPPORTS

A. Luminaries shall be securely fastened as per manufacturer’s instructions and to meet all relevant codes and standards of practice. Provide fixtures and support suitable to withstand seismic disturbances without damage. Luminarie supports and installation shall be suitable for the local climate and seismic zone.

3.4 SIZING AND ADJUSTMENT:

A. Provide manpower and tools for final focusing and adjustment, under the Architect’s supervision of all adjustable luminaries after regular workings hours (i.e., after dark) whenever necessary, at no additional cost to Owner. All fixtures shall be locked into place so that the aiming is not disturbed during future re-lamping.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Immediately prior to occupancy, clean reflector cones, reflectors, aperture plates lenses, louvers, lamps and decorative elements. As per manufacturer’s instructions. De-staticize lenses, after cleaning, installing them to leave no finger or dirt marks.

3.6 COMMISSING

A. For any luminarie, ballast, or lighting control system, the contractor is responsible for a complete and operational system which is satisfactory to the Owner, building manager and occupants. Further commissioning requirements may be detailed in the commissioning section of this specification.

B. The Owner shall provided for or engage a commissioning agent to verify that all components

and system as a whole meets design intent. This includes evaluation and verification of all adjustable features, such as aiming angles, time clock settings, sensitivity settings, high end trim, fine tuning, customized settings, etc. Contractor shall provide manpower and equipment after normal working hours to correct and adjust system, working with our without direct supervision of commissioning agent and lighting designer until reasonable satisfaction has been achieved.

C. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with Spares, as described in Part 2 above.



265600 - 28

D. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with maintenance manual and operational submittals,

as called for in Part 1 above, under the conditions of the relevant General Requirements. After approval by the Architect, this manual will be kept on site for reference use by facility maintenance personnel. Transfer of the document will include a through walk-through and demonstration of equipment by contactor facility personnel, and the designer/specifier. The Contractor shall assemble and submit, in bound 8.5”x11 format, and Operation and Maintenance Manual that includes the following: 1. A chart clearly documenting the luminarie, lamp and ballast actually installed for each

luminarie type, with product designations sufficient for reordering new product and components to match those installed.

2. A current list of lighting distributor, manufacturers and manufacture’s representatives, (for the purposes of replacement, reordering or trouble-shooting). This list shall be keyed to the list of luminaries, lamps and ballast, so that the Owner has a name, address and phone number of at least two (2) contacts for each product or component

3. Shop drawings, technical data sheets product technical documents, installation instructions cut sheets, operating instructions, calibration instructions, and troubleshooting guides in the installation, including but not limited to lamps, ballasts an lighting control devices.

4. Color-coded as-built drawings showing all lamp and ballast types, to facilitate replacement.

E. Owner Training: At the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor shall provide a minimum of four

(4) hours, not to exceed eight (8) hours, of expertise and training concerning the installation, characteristics, operations and maintenance of the Contractor’s work of this Section. Such training shall take place after the Contractors has provided the Owner with the maintenance and operational submittals mentioned above.

F. The Contractor shall video-tape the training session, and provide the Owner with two (2) copies

in DVD format. Alternative electronic formats may be provided if mutually agreed upon.

END OF SECTION


NORRIS DESIGN 0045-04-14-01 DECK PEDESTALS 2016-06-10

321400- 1

SECTION 321400

DECK PEDESTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

Adjustable Deck Pedestals.

1.2 REFERENCES

ASTM D 1238-04- Standard Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics by Extrusion Plastometer.

ASTM D 792-00- Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement.

ASTM D 638-03- Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics

ASTM D 256-06- Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics.

ASTM D 648-06- Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

B. Installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings detailing the installation methods. Coordinate placement with locations noted on the Contract Drawings.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. All primary products specified in this section will be supplied by a single manufacturer with a minimum of ten (10) years’ experience.




321400- 2

1. The deck support system installer must have a minimum of two (2) years proven construction experience, be capable of estimating and building from blueprint plans and details, determine elevations, and properly handle materials. All Work must comply with the Bison installation application procedures for deck support work specified herein.

C. Special Considerations:

1. The contractor assumes the responsibility for and must take into consideration the structural capability and adequacy of the structure to carry the dead and live load weight(s) involved, and that the density of any insulation is satisfactory to resist crushing and damaging the waterproofing membrane.

D. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship.

1. Finish areas designated by Architect.

2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship is approved by Architect. (if applicable)

3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store Bison Deck Supports and system components with labels intact and legible.

B. Inspect all delivered materials to insure they are undamaged and in good condition.

C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials such as construction adhesive, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. There are no pedestal installation temperature restriction guidelines other than the practical considerations of working in any unsafe condition or inclement weather.

B. Deck supports specified are to be for used with pedestrian traffic only.

C. Perimeter Walls and Containment

D. Pedestrian decks must be restrained by perimeter blocking or walls on all sides. Lateral movement greater than 1/8” is unacceptable and will be subject to rejection.



321400- 3

E. It is recommended that the deck surfacing above the waterproofing integral flashing and or counter flashing. In situations where the perimeter of the deck comes into contact with the flashing material, protective wall covering should be specified if deemed necessary by specifier.

F. Heavy Roof Top Features:

1. A minimum of one additional pedestal support must be installed for every 500lbs. (or portion thereof) of static loading. These additional support pedestals must be installed directly under the decking and evenly spaced immediately below the feature locations. One additional pedestal must be placed under corner of any rectangular feature.

a. When installing Bison Cubes, additional support may be needed under the center and corners of the cubes depending on the size and anticipated weight loads.

b. Features supported by legs or feet are not advised or considered unacceptable because of the consequences of point loading.

c. Any feature that creates vibration must be provided for in special consultation and written agreement with Bison. Cell phone towers, heavy planters and other similar features require their own separate curb designed by an architect or engineer.

G. All decks shall be designed to not exceed the design capacity of the pedestal.

H. The substrate immediately below the pedestals shall provide positive drainage.

I. In case of decks over roofing substrates, roof systems must meet local building code and be in accordance with the NRCA recommended good construction practices. Only roofing manufacturer approved systems shall be used.

J. For applications over roofing and waterproofing membranes Bison Innovative Products recommends that a 12’ x 12’ piece of the same type of membrane be installed as a separate protection slip sheet underneath each pedestal.

K. Decks over roofing and waterproofing:

L. Bison Pedestal Installation: Bison pedestals must be installed on surfaces with a minimum 40 psi bearing capacity.

M. Bison Pedestal Installation: Bison pedestals must be supported by a surface that provides a minimum 40 psi bearing capacity. There are alternate ways to accomplish the non-invasive and required support.



321400- 4

N. Roof top applications: Two basic types of roof systems are commonly found in the US and Canada for retrofit and new roofing. Roof systems that specify insulation below the waterproofing layer, and roof systems that have extruded insulation above the waterproofing membrane.

1. Roof Type 1- Common Insulation installed below Roof Membranes.

2. Currently the most typical and common roofing systems specify roofing membranes be installed over common ridged insulation boards that are typically manufactured from poly-isocyanurate, perlite, or wood fiber-board materials. These typical systems incorporate 20 psi density insulations that need additional support to create an adequate bearing surface. That is typically accomplished in one of three ways:

1. Incorporate one of the thin Cap Bearing Protective Layer Insulation specifications that call for a very thin protective layer to be installed on top of the common 20 psi insulation. Such a cap type insulation product is commonly formed as a thin dense low-foamed isocyanurate layer, and provides the necessary pedestal support.

2. Bison Model FIB Pedestal Base: Install an enlarged base that supports the pedestal to distribute the anticipated loaded weight of a pedestal over an enlarged area. Bison manufacturers the Floating Insulation Base (Model FIB) for this purpose. Model FIB is specifically designed to be directly installed over Type 1 roof systems that incorporate 20 + psi common insulation boards.

3. Insulation above the Membrane: Install a 1.5” thick (min.) layer of dense, closed cell 40 psi (min.) extruded cell poly-styrene insulation board above the common roofing system that has buried insulation to provide support for the pedestal system.

3. Roof Type 2- Closed Cell Insulation Protecting Roof Membrane Systems.

a. Inverted Roof Membrane Systems that incorporate 40 + psi density closed cell extruded poly-styrene insulation on top of the roofing membrane are the second type. The dense extruded polystyrene is capable of bearing Bison pedestal weights. Before the ballast rock is installed, deck system pedestals can be installed directly on the ballasting is required.



321400- 5

1.7 WARRANTY

A. At project closeout and upon request, Bison Deck Supports can provide to the Owner or Owners Representative, an executed copy of the manufacturer’s standard document outlining the terms, conditions and limitations of their limited warranty against manufacturing defect for a period of the three (3) years. The Contractor warrants that his work will remain free from defects of labor and materials used in conjunction with his work in accordance with the General Conditions for this project or a minimum of three (3) Years. It is the responsibility of the Contractor installing the product listed in this section to coordinate warranty requirements with any related sections or adjacent Work. Notify the architect immediately of any potential lapses or limitations in warranty coverage. For use with pedestrian traffic only- Never use Bison Deck Supports to support decks that have wheeled, motorized or equipment traffic. Decks should be restrained on all sides and not have lateral movement in excess of 1/8 inch.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Bison Innovative Products; 2395 W 4th Ave, Denver, CO 80223. Toll Free 888-412-4766. Phone 303-628-7950. Fax 303-825-5988. Email: [email protected]. Web: www.BisonIP.com.

B. Substitutions: Not permitted.

C. Requests for substitutions will be in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.

2.2 APPLICATIONS/ SCOPE

Furnish and install a complete adjustable deck support system with a maximum cavity height of up to:

A. Screwjack Pedestals maximum cavity height 16 inches (305 mm) without additional bracing.

B. Deck supports are not designed for supporting decks that carry vehicular traffic or equipment including but not limited to snow removal equipment, ATV’s, forklifts, or any motorized vehicles.

C. Consult the Manufacturer and the Project Engineer regarding the following:

1. When spacer tab condition or design requires spacing between decking tiles or concrete pavers other than the standard spacing required by the manufacturer.

2. When considering use for other than a raised decks (e.g. interior floors, stairs, etc.).

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.bisonip.com/



321400- 6

3. When the required pedestal height exceeds the safe limits as determine by the Manufacturer.

4. When pedestal load capacity exceeds the maximum listed. 5. When anticipating installation of any items with excess weight on top of the

deck. 6. When using Bison Deck Supports pedestals on grade (soil). 7. When greater pedestal load capacity is required.

2.3 SCREWJACK DECK PEDESTALS

Typical Height Range 0-16 inches

Weight Bearing Design Capacity 1000 lbs/pedestal FS:2

Integral 4.5 mm (3/16 inch) spacer tabs

Made in the USA

Pedestals:

A. Model B1: 1 ¼ inches to 2 inches (32mm - 51mm)

B. Model B2: 2 inches to 3 inches (51mm – 76mm)

C. Model B3: 3 inches to 4 ¾ inches (121mm – 197mm)

D. Top Unit: 5/32 inch (4mm) thick plate

1. Bearing Surface Area: 29 square inches (187 sq. cm.) 2. Material: Mineral Filled High Density Copolymer Polypropylene. Bison #B-

PP-2025: a. Contains 20% Post industrial recycled material.

3. C4 Coupler: Adds up to 4 inches (102 mm) of height. 4. Material: Mineral Filled High Density Copolymer Polypropylene. #B-PP-2025

a. Contains 20% Post industrial recycled material. Low Height Pedestal Supports H. Model VT316 1/8 inch (3.175mm) tall

1. Integral Spacer Tabs: Specify 3/16 inch 2. Material: Mineral Filled High Density Copolymer Polypropylene. Bison #B-

PP-2025 a. Contains 20% Post industrial recycled material

3. Bearing Surface Area: 17.75’ sq inches nominal I. Model HD25 Stackable (4 Max) ¼ inch (6.4mm) tall, with integral Spacer Tabs Base Leveler Disks: J. Model: LD-4 – Placed beneath pedestals to compensate for slopes up to 1 inch

per foot.



321400- 7

1. Slope: ¼ inch per foot. Stack up to four LD4’s under one pedestal for up to

1 inch of slope compensation. 2. Dimensions: Center point thickness 3/8 inch (9.5mm). 3. Material: Mineral Filled High Density Copolymer Polypropylene. Bison #B-

PP-2025 a. Contains 20% Post industrial recycled material.

2.4 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

C. Verify all elevations, required pedestal heights and deck dimensions before commencing work.

2.5 PREPARATION

A. Establish accurate lines, levels and visual pattern.

B. The substrate surface that will receive the deck supports must be well compacted (on grade) and structurally capable of carrying the dead and live loads anticipated.

C. The substrate must be clean and free of projections and debris that could impair the performance of the pedestals or the total deck system.

D. Decks over roofing and waterproofing: verify that installation conforms to section 1.7(H) of this specification.

E. Installation requirements vary for each individual project site. Deck materials used, pattern, grid layout, starting point, and finished elevation should be shown on plan view shop drawings which have been prepared and approved by the designer, installing contractor and/or owner.

F. Once a starting point and the finished elevation of the deck surface have been determined, the support system elevation (finished elevation minus deck material thickness) is established and marked around the perimeter using a transit “torpedo” water level or laser leveling device.

G. Precise measurements should be taken and deck area should be accurately defined. Mark off and square all outside edges with control lines (chalk lines or spray paint). Install two (2) lines that are perpendicular to each other across the deck area. Continue to mark a grid of lines in both directions marking the location of each pedestal. To assure a square layout, use the control lines as references to periodically check the layout during installation.

2.6 INSTALLATION



321400- 8

A. Install in accordance with Bison and other contributing manufacturer’s instructions.

B. If required, place a Floating Insulation Base (FIB) board or Floating Foundation Base (FFB) in the location on the grid of each pedestal.

C. Next, a deck support must be placed where each measured grid line meets the perimeter. Remove two (2) spacer tabs in line with one another on top of each deck support placed around the perimeter. Remove all four (4) spacer tabs at corners.

D. Adjust each deck support to a “top of pedestal” elevation marked around the perimeter. Normally the deck support is positioned as close to the perimeter as possible, with the two remaining spacer tabs aligned with the grid lines. Using the “top of pedestal” elevation marked on the perimeter, stretch a mason’s line along and slightly ahead of the second row of deck supports. A laser leveling device may also be used for this purpose.

E. On larger decks, it is recommended that pedestals be pre-sorted and pre-set to the proper elevation and placed in position prior to the installation of pavers or tiles.

F. As the deck supports located along the grid lines are loaded with pavers or tiles, fine vertical adjustment can be made by rotating the base or bottom of the deck support. Clockwise rotation of the pedestal base will raise the bearing surface and the deck. Counter- clockwise rotation will lower the top bearing surface.

G. Bison pedestals have built in height limit indicator ‘bumps’. When pedestal is fully extended, height limit indicator “bumps” will be felt and heard, indicating the maximum height of the pedestal. Do not extend pedestal beyond the height limit indicators. Do not exceed maximum height listed on pedestal, use the next size pedestal. A C4 coupler must be added to the B4 model to achieve greater heights. Always maintain adequate thread engagement. Never over extend any pedestal.

H. Slight irregularities in decking panel thickness can be compensated for by using one or two shim segments. Place on top of the pedestal, under the corner(s) of the decking tile or paver. Use no more than two (2) shims on top of the pedestal and always adhere quartered (1/4) wedges with construction adhesive.

I. Stackable Fixed Height Pedestals: Complete deck and grid layout as instructed above. Stack no more than four (4) fixed height pedestals together and place in lieu of adjustable pedestals where needed. Spacer tabs can be removed to accommodate perimeter and corner support locations.

J. Slope Compensation:



321400- 9

1. Preferred Method: A base leveler disk should be used to level the pedestal base. Place one to four disks under the pedestal base to compensate for up to 1 inch per foot of slope. Compensate for slope by placing the disks’ thickest edge (located on the edge by a small finger tab) at the down slope side of the deck support, one disk compensates for ¼ inch per foot of slope. Using two to four disks, rotate one in relation to the other to create a level deck support.

2. Shims may be used in multiples, whole or segmented, and placed under the base to level the deck support.

3. Under a pedestal: all shims under a pedestal must be adhered with construction adhesive to each other – never to the membrane. Shim no more than 1/8 inch (3mm) beneath each pedestal.

4. On top of a pedestal: Use no more than 2 shims.

K. If a specifier requires and desires to install a cavity deck system over the height of 16 inches (406.4mm) maximum of 24 inches (609.6mm) in height, special approval is required prior to commencing the installation. The installing contractor must furnish Bison Deck Supports the proposed design for the extreme height bracing, stamped by a professional, licensed engineer. Special written approval will then be furnished by Bison Deck Supports to the installing contractor with a copy to the specifier, prior to commencing any pedestal and decking work.

2.7 DECK SUPPORT PLACEMEMENT AND FINAL ADJUSTMENT

A. Deck supports and the deck surface panels must be placed as the manufacturer directs in these written instructions. Use of labor saving devices, such as paver lifters, is encouraged, especially on large jobs.

B. Pedestals are designed to be rotated for final slight adjustment when pedestals are fully loaded. Deck supports should be leveled in each succeeding row as the installation proceeds. Final height adjustment or maintenance is easily made by simply rotating the Screwjack support in a clockwise or counter-clockwise direction to raise or lower the deck surface material.

C. Additional sections of shims may be used and should be available for regular maintenance. Shims may be used in multiples, whole or segmented, and placed under the base or on top the pedestal to level the deck support.

D. Beneath the pedestal: Use a small amount of construction adhesive to adhere sections of shims and/or whole shims to each other or to the pedestal. Unless specified to do so, DO NOT use construction adhesive to adhere pedestal or shims to insulation, roofing or waterproofing membrane.

2.8 PERIMETER CONTAINMENT



321400- 10

A. Any area of a deck that is not restrained by a parapet or foundation wall must be ‘boxed-in’ and contained. The deck panels will move if all sides are not adequately restrained. Perimeter framing and edging boards located at the outside of the deck perimeter must be installed to provide restraint. No movement should be allowed at the perimeter of the deck system greater than 1/8 inch.


A. Inspect often during installation to assure that grid spacer lines are being maintained in a straight and consistent pattern and the deck panels or pavers are level and not rocking.

B. Confirm that deck pedestal height does not exceed the specified height of 16 inches (406.4mm).

C. Unless otherwise specified in writing to allow for expansion, inspect to assure that all paver spacing between tiles and at perimeter containment does not exceed a 1/8 inch. Particular attention should be made to assure that all pedestrian entry or access points to the deck are level and that the deck surface tiles are not randomly raised or uneven creating a tripping or safety hazard.

2.10 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

2.11 IMMEDITALEY FOLLOWING INSTALLATION

A. The Owner, or the Owner’s Agent, shall carefully inspect the deck system to be positive that:

1. The new deck system is adequately blocked on all sides to contain the surface decking and related components.

2. There is no more than 1/8 inch spacing between any deck panels and at all sides of the deck perimeter.

3. There is no ballasting rock used to fill in any perimeter voids.

4. There is no ‘rocking’ of deck panels as foot traffic is applied to the surface decking.

5. All required spacer tabs are in place and visible.

2.12 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE AND CARE



321400- 11

A. Installer and/or Architect has a duty to instruct the deck owner about performing routine maintenance of the deck. Check for rocking pavers and adjust or shim immediately. Pedestals can settle and may have to be realigned. Failure to do so can cause a tripping hazard. Periodically check spacer tabs and immediately replace broken tabs to limit deck movement. Make sure the edge restraint stays intact and structurally sound.

END OF SECTION